JP2020185151A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine for making it difficult for a player to estimate a setting value.SOLUTION: The number of special determination values is common regardless of a setting value. The number of predetermined determination values (losing determination values) is larger in a first setting value (setting value "1") than in a second setting value ("setting value "6"). State control means is controllable to a first specific state (high-probability/first KT state) as a state permitting execution of variation display, and to a second specific state (high-probability/second KT state) that is a state in which variation display is executable and allows a game value to be imparted more easily depending on a special state (small win game state) than the first specific state. Performance execution means displays corresponding display (active display) corresponding to variation display of identification information during variation display in the first specific state, erases the corresponding display before completion of variation display, disables display of corresponding display in the second specific state, and at the same time can execute a special performance (small win informing performance) corresponding to control of a special state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 13-8

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, when a game ball launched in a game area wins a prize in a predetermined winning opening, the identification information is variably displayed, and when the display result of the variable display becomes a predetermined display result, a game corresponding to the display result is generated. Pachinko game machines that let you play are known. The predetermined display result is, for example, a display result indicating a big hit or a display result indicating a small hit. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine changes the gaming state to the normal state.
It controls one of a plurality of gaming states such as a time saving state and a probability change state.

In addition, some pachinko gaming machines can change the winning probability of a big hit according to a set value. Specifically, the set value is a plurality of values (for example, 1 to 6) having different jackpot winning probabilities.
), Any one value is set. For example, the winning probability of a big hit is the set value "6".
Is the highest, and decreases in the order of "5", "4", "3", "2", and "1" as the value decreases.

Further, on the pachinko gaming machine, the second identification information in which the small hit probability is set to be higher than the first identification information is variably displayed, and the second identification information is mainly variably displayed for the game. In the gaming state, there are some that generate small hits frequently. For example, the small hit probability is set to the same probability in the low probability state and the high probability state, and small hits are frequently generated in the high probability state and the gaming state without the universal power support to increase the number of balls. A game machine is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1 below).

Further, for example, in a pachinko gaming machine whose settings can be changed, when the fluctuation of the identification information is stopped,
A gaming machine that suggests a set value by displaying a character image selected with a selection rate according to the set value is known (see, for example, Patent Document 2 below).

JP-A-2017-148127 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902

However, in order to suppress gambling, when the small hit probability is common regardless of the set value, if the big hit probability is changed according to the set value, the loss probability also changes accordingly. For this reason, there is a problem that the set value can be estimated by the player counting the number of appearances of the loss.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of making it difficult for a player to estimate a set value.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game) is
Variable display execution means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 or a production control CP) that variably displays identification information (for example, a special symbol or a decorative symbol) and derives and displays a variable display result.
U120) and
Based on the fact that the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the variable display result, the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) is controlled, and the variable display result is a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, the jackpot game state). For example, a state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that controls a special state (for example, a small hit game state) based on the derived display of the small hit symbol).
It can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values including a first setting value (for example, setting value "1") and a second setting value (for example, setting value "6") having different advantages for the player. Setting means (for example, game control microcomputer 100) and
An effect execution means for executing an effect (for example, an effect control CPU 120) and
It is a game machine equipped with
The variable display executing means can derive and display the specific display result and a predetermined display result (for example, loss) different from the special display result as the variable display result.
A special determination value for determining the variable display result as the special display result (for example, FIG. 13-2 (for example, FIG. 13-2).
The number of small hit judgment values) in B) is the same regardless of the set value.
A predetermined determination value for determining the variable display result as the predetermined display result (for example, FIG. 13-2 (for example, FIG. 13-2).
The number of the loss determination values shown in B) is larger in the first set value than in the second set value (for example, in the set value 1, the loss probability is "1/60", and in the set value 6, the loss probability is "1/60". Loss probability is "1 /
It is "100". ),
The state control means can execute variable display in a first specific state (for example, a non-small hit RUSH state such as a high probability / first KT state or a low probability / first KT state) in which variable display can be executed. It is possible to control to a second specific state (for example, high probability / second KT state: small hit RUSH state) in which the game value is more likely to be given by the special state than the first specific state.
The effect executing means is
In the first specific state, the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information (for example, the active display 007SH110 in FIG. 13-5 (C)) is displayed during the variable display, and the corresponding display is displayed before the end of the variable display. Erase and
In the second specific state, the corresponding display is hidden, and a special effect corresponding to the control of the special state (for example, the effect image 007SH300 in FIG. 13-8 (E) and FIG. 13-8 (F)). The winning effect image 007SH121, etc.) can be executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to estimate the set value.

(2) In the game machine of (1) above
The effect executing means can execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value set in the setting means (for example, an effect that denies the set values "1" and "2", an effect that suggests an even number setting, and the like). Is.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to effectively suggest the set value while making it difficult for the player to estimate the set value.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
The effect mode in the advantageous state (for example, the effect screen of FIG. 13-7 (A)) and the second
At least a part is common (for example, the background image of "night" and the character are common) with the effect mode in the specific state (for example, the effect screen of FIG. 13-7 (C)).
When the effect executing means is controlled to the advantageous state, the special display corresponding to the advantageous state (for example, the display of the character A of the 6R probability variation jackpot shown in FIG. 13-5 (A) and FIG. 1
(Display of character B of 10R probability variation jackpot shown in 3-7 (A)) can be executed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest while making it difficult for the player to estimate the set value.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above,
The effect executing means is
In the first specific state, the variable display number display (for example, the variable display number display 007SH140 in FIG. 13-5 (C)) can be displayed, while it can be displayed.
In the second specific state, the variable display number display is hidden (for example, the variable display number display is hidden as shown in FIG. 13-7 (D)).

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to estimate the set value.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above,
The effect executing means is
In the first specific state, the decorative identification information (for example, the decorative symbol 007SH100 of FIG. 13-5 (C)) is variably displayed corresponding to the variable display of the identification information, and at least the specific display result is derived (for example, the specific display result). Whether or not the combination of doublets) is notified by deriving and displaying the variable display result of the decoration identification information.
In the second specific state, the decorative identification information is hidden (for example, the decorative pattern is hidden as shown in FIG. 13-7 (D)), and the special effect (for example, FIG. 13-8 (F)) is shown. The winning effect image 007SH121, etc.) can be executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to estimate the set value.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
The effect executing means is
In the first specific state, the hold display (for example, the hold display 007S in FIG. 13-5 (C))
H111) is displayed, and the movement display of the hold display (for example, the hold shift display of FIG. 13-6 (F)) is executed in response to the start of the identification information.
In the second specific state, the hold display can be hidden and the special effect (for example, the winning effect image 007SH121 of FIG. 13-8 (F)) can be executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to estimate the set value.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 1st special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the payout control board. It is a rear view which shows the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. (1) to (3) are explanatory views showing the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect, and (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notification example when the setting changing flag is set at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power cut occurs before the set value is fixed, and (2) shows control when a power cut occurs after the set value is fixed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the special variable winning ball device in the feature part 052IW. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like in the feature part 052IW. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the small hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing. It is the flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the character control normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the gate passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the way of transition of a game state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of ordinary symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a normal design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing before opening of a normal electric accessory. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect processing at the time of over winning. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the suggestion effect decision table at the time of over winning. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect processing at the time of a small hit prize. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the suggestion effect determination table at the time of a small hit prize. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display suggestion effect processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number emphasizing effect processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the prize ball number emphasis effect decision table. It is a flowchart which shows the process of waiting for a variable display start. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the setting value suggestion effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the ending effect processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect mode of the set value suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating display mode of right-handed notification. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the over-winning suggestion effect, the small hit winning suggestion effect, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the over-winning suggestion effect, the small hit winning suggestion effect, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during execution of the variation display of one special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing in modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing in modification 1. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variation display when a small hit is made in the variation display of the other special symbol during execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing in modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing in modification 2. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variation display when a small hit is made in the variation display of the other special symbol during execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing in modification 3. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variation display when a small hit is made in the variation display of the other special symbol during execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing in modification 4. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing in modification 4. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the game state and the transition of an effect mode after a big hit game which concerns on a feature part 020SH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect mode setting process which concerns on a feature part 020SH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display correspondence display control processing which concerns on a feature part 020SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the initial color determination table and the final color determination table of the variable display correspondence display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the suggestion effect execution processing which the effect control CPU 120 performs when it is controlled to a small hit game state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the suggestion effect execution processing which the effect control CPU 120 performs when it is controlled to a small hit game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the determination table of various suggestion effects. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the change effect execution processing of the variable display correspondence display performed by the effect control CPU 120 during variable display. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of the effect screen in a small hit RUSH mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of the effect which changes the display mode of the hold display in a chance time mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of the Gase effect of the effect which changes the display mode of the hold display in a chance time mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the setting value suggestion effect in a chance time mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the probability change suggestion effect in a chance time mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the small hit opening timing and the execution timing of various suggestion effects. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of the setting suggestion effect which concerns on the feature part 003SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the jackpot type determination table of the feature part 003SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the big hit probability and small hit probability of the 2nd special symbol in the feature part 003SH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing in the 2nd KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the enemy character determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the waiting process per special figure in the 2nd KT state which concerns on a feature part 003SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the card pack opening effect decision table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ending effect processing which concerns on a feature part 003SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the screen transition of appearance of an enemy character and acquisition of a card pack. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the screen transition at the time of performing a card pack opening effect during a big hit game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the priority set for each playing card and a display area. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the screen transition at the time of performing a card pack opening effect during a big hit game. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the big hit probability, the small hit probability, and the loss probability of the 1st special symbol in the feature part 007SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the big hit probability, the small hit probability, and the loss probability of the 2nd special symbol in the feature part 007SH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the display control processing at the time of receiving a background designation command performed by the effect control CPU 120 which concerns on a feature part 007SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the background image in the probability variation mode, and the background image in a small hit RUSH mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the screen transition after being controlled to the 6R probability variation big hit game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the screen transition after being controlled to the 6R probability variation big hit game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the screen transition after being controlled to the 10R probability variation big hit game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the screen transition after being controlled to the 10R probability variation big hit game state.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area), a variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. First to do
A special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. Special symbols include numbers indicating "0" to "9" and "
It is represented by a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

Further, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a right-handed display 26 for prompting a right-handed operation of aiming at the right side of the game area and performing a firing operation is provided. There is. The right-handed display 26 is composed of, for example, LEDs, and is lit and controlled by a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game,
Variable display of decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, "
The decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction or update display) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is held is provided. In this example, the first hold display area 5A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure and the second hold display for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure. A region 5B is provided. A display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-handed notification LED 37 for prompting a right-handed operation is provided. The right-handed notification LED 37 is lit and controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

In addition, a first hold indicator 25 configured to include a plurality of LEDs at a predetermined position on the game board 2
A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided, the first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the first hold indicator 25B according to the number of LEDs lit. The second reserved storage number is displayed.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning opening is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening is guided to the back surface of the game board 2, and the first starting opening switch 2
Detected by 2A. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Further, a row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first start winning opening, so that the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area does not enter the area provided with the first starting winning opening. Has been done.
In this way, by providing the row of nails 19 for preventing the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area from entering, the game ball is launched (so-called left-handed) aiming at the left side of the game area. The game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when the operation) is performed.

In this example, since the row of nails 19 is provided, the game ball can be won in the first start winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed. Not limited to. For example, since the first start winning opening is provided on the left side of the game area, the game ball may be configured to be able to win the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed, or the first starting winning opening may be won. A game ball may be configured to be able to win a prize in the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed by providing the mouth on the left side of the game area and also providing the row of nails 19.

A passing gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. The game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

Below the passage gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 that forms a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves the plate-shaped bottom surface member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows in the front-rear direction.
The large winning opening located below the bottom member is changed into an open state (also called an open state) in which the game ball can win a prize and a closed state (also called a closed state) in which the game ball cannot win a prize. Special variable winning ball device 7
Moved the bottom member forward in the jackpot game state that occurs when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state, and the opening control is executed so that the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning opening for small hits and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning opening are provided. FIG. 1 As shown in, a special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and a variable winning ball device 6B is arranged adjacent to the right side thereof. These special variable winning ball devices 17 and variable winning ball devices 6B
Is located below the bottom member by moving the plate-shaped bottom member, which extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state and is formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows, in the front-rear direction. The special winning opening and the second starting winning opening are changed into an open state (also called an open state) in which the game ball can win a prize and a closed state (also called a closed state) in which the game ball cannot win a prize. The special variable winning ball device 17
In the small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the bottom surface member is moved forward toward the front. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state, and the opening control is executed so that the special winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. Further, the variable winning ball device 6B is a normal symbol display 2
When the symbol hits 0 and the symbol is derived and displayed, the bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward, and the second start winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. Execute open control.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6
B is formed so as to have a similar structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, the game ball dropped on the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed. If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, it moves on the special variable winning ball device 7 from the upper left to the lower right, and falls on the variable winning ball device 6B below it.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are formed. The game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B when the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is in the closed state. Go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged adjacent to each other, the special variable winning ball device 7 is placed on the variable winning ball device 6B without winning a prize. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning opening is in the open state, the game ball wins the second starting winning opening and the special variable winning ball The game ball does not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second starting winning opening is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward and the special winning opening is in the open state, the game ball wins the special winning opening. Further, if the special winning opening is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and falls toward the out opening as it is.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of regulation pieces for reducing the flow speed of the game ball flowing down on the bottom surface member. There is. In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with a restricting piece, so that the game flows down from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the movement of the front-back component, and the time required for the flow is delayed as compared with the case without the regulation piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. However, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are arranged. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 6B is used as the special variable winning ball device. Since the game ball is configured to flow toward 17, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. It can be said that

A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the large winning opening is provided in the large winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is open-controlled and the large winning opening is opened,
It will be in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be closed and the large winning opening is closed, the game ball cannot be passed (entered) through the large winning opening to obtain the winning ball. It will be a disadvantage.

A switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the special winning opening is provided in the special winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of winning balls is smaller than that when the game ball wins the large winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) through other prize openings such as the first starting prize opening 1 and the second starting winning opening. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is open-controlled and the special winning opening is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is closed and controlled and the special winning opening is closed, the player cannot obtain the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball through the special winning opening. It will be a disadvantage.

Further, in the second start winning opening, a second starting opening switch 22B capable of detecting a winning game ball in the second starting winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, a passing gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening), a variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening), and a special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) Is provided on the right side of the game area, so when the player is in a big hit game or in a KT state (so-called small hit time), the player aims at the right side of the game area and launches (so-called right-handed operation). )I do.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area), the normal symbol display 2
0 is provided. As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal pattern game.

A normal symbol display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, since the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, the passing gate 41 plays a role as a normal starting area. However, even when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the passage gate 41 also plays a role as an operating region because the game shifts to the jackpot game state based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41. Therefore, the passing gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that plays the role of both a normal starting region and an operating region.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are located at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3.
Is provided, and a frame LED 9 for a game effect is provided in the peripheral portion of the game area.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. )
A hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. Stick controller 31
A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (so-called left-handed operation) aiming at the left side of the gaming area. Pachinko game machine 1
When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A by performing a left-handing operation by the rotation operation of the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided by the player, the first special symbol display device 4A performs the left-handing operation. 1 The special figure game is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (although the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "
7 ”, the actual design differs depending on the jackpot type described later. ) Is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "big hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing". Even in the first special figure game, the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed at an extremely low rate, and may be configured to be a "small hit".

After the display result in the first special figure game becomes "big hit", the game is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state is a combination of the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an open upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, how to open the big prize opening (
Multiple types of game states (normal state, probability change state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) after the big hit game state (number of rounds and open upper limit period) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As a big hit type, you can get a lot of prize balls,
There may be a jackpot type in which there are few or almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a probability variation state, a KT state, or a high base state according to the jackpot type.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), the probability variation control is executed in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

In the KT state, KT control is executed, which is more likely to be a small hit than in the normal state. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, since a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small hit game state, the number of prize balls obtained is smaller than that in the big hit game state, but it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the high base state, the control (time reduction control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shorter than the normal state is executed (time reduction state), and in the normal map game, it is called "normal map hit". Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed by improving the probability of becoming the game ball from the normal state. High base state is a special symbol (especially the second
Since the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

The probabilistic state, KT state, and high base state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. To do. A condition in which the end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called a number cut (number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a probability variation state, a KT state, and a high base state, and the display result in the special figure game is "big hit". The pachinko game machine 1 controls the same as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (when a predetermined return process is not executed after the power is turned on, for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in a state of being reset.

When the jackpot game is finished and the game state is controlled to the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state,
It is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (right-handed operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. When the player performs a right-handed strike operation on the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol (normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "normal symbol lost".
Will be. When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special symbol game, a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "
7 ”, the actual design differs depending on the jackpot type described later. ) Is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "big hit", and when a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "big hit", the game is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the small hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed).

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. In addition, it should be noted
The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the frame LED 9
It may be performed by the point or the like, turning off the light, operating the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol )
Is also stopped and displayed (derived).

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example,"
The same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right".

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. If it is an uncontrolled "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (
For example, "6" etc.) may be displayed together as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability big hit" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example,""is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C,
The decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective line in 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state in the same mode as small hit game state) and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also called) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and then the variable display is restarted to make one variable display look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. Besides,
On the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, and a solenoid circuit 111.
And so on.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 and a RAM (Random A).
ccess Memory) 102, CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and random number circuit 10
4 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, ROM10
Various data stored in 1 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). Controls (drives) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc.
It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal to be used, a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24). )) Detect signals (such as a detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed or entered and the switch is turned on) are taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a solenoid 81, a solenoid 82, a signal for turning on the solenoid 83, etc.) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or a prize-winning door. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is
It is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )))
, The game status (for example, the start or end of variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). Including the decision etc.). At this time, ROM
Various data (data such as various tables) stored in 121 is used, and RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 includes a controller sensor unit 35A or a push sensor 35.
The display control unit 123 may be instructed to execute the effect based on the detection signal from B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicating the operation content).

The display control unit 123 includes VDP (Video Display Processor) and CGROM (Character G).
It is equipped with enerator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the effect image to the image display device 5 based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display device 5.
To display. The display control unit 123 further controls the sound designation signal (the signal that specifies the sound to be output) in order to output the sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37. It is supplied to the board 13 or an LED signal (a signal for designating an LED lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the LED control board 14. In addition, the display control unit 12
3 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37, drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 based on the LED signal, and is in a mode designated by the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 are turned on / off.
In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the LED.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, LED lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, LED signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 has various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects.
Numerical data indicating is counted up to date. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 has an input port for capturing the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, L).
It is configured to include an output port for transmitting an ED signal).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the LED control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3).
). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (
Step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, C
The PU 103 is an RA that clears the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102.
Perform M clear processing and set the initial value in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), the RAM
It is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.)
In addition, the state of the backup flag and the error detection code are also included. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. RAM1 with backup flag off
If the backup data is not stored in 02 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes),
The CPU 103 checks the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. If it is determined that these match, RAM10
It is determined that the data of 2 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), CP
The U103 performs a restoration process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored to the state when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120
An appropriate screen display may be performed based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (.
Step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, the interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 10 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms).
It is sent to No. 3, and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 10
First, by executing a predetermined switch process, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 pass through the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not the detection signal is received from various switches such as (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of times jackpots have occurred) and start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Information indicating the number of winnings, etc.)
, Data such as probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability change state has been reached) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process (step S25A). C
When the PU 103 executes the first special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, the execution and hold management of the first special symbol game are realized (details will be described later). Also, CPU103
Executes the second special symbol process process (step S25B). When the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, the execution and hold management of the second special symbol game are realized. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to simultaneously execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel.

Following the first special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process process (step S25C). When the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process process for each timer interrupt, it is possible to control the big hit game state, the small hit game state, the game state, and the like (details will be described later).

Following the accessory control process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26).
). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, C
The PU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

Further, although the description is omitted in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal is a process for outputting a test signal so that the control state of the game machine can be confirmed outside the game machine. Processing is also executed. In the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 also controls to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can identify the period during which the right-handed operation is performed. Specifically, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 controls to output a right-handed test signal during the big hit game, during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and during the KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 does not control to output a right-handed test signal during the small hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process process. In this first special symbol process process, C
The PU 103 first executes the first start winning determination process (step S101A).

In the first start prize determination process, the occurrence of a start prize in the first start prize opening is detected, and the RAM 10
The process of storing the hold information in the predetermined area of 2 and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When a start prize is generated in the first start prize opening, a random value for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information in a first hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. Will be done. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the first hold storage number, transmission for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination results such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the first hold memory number, and the look-ahead determination on the effect control board 12. The settings are made. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is controlled by the main board 11 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the first special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

After executing the first start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110A to S113A according to the value of the first special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. Each process of the first special symbol process process (step S)
In 110A to S113A), a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

In the first special symbol normal processing in step S110A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is "0".
It is executed when (initial value). In this first special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reserved information and the like. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as "big hit" or "small hit" or "big hit" is set based on the random value for determining the display result. The jackpot type of the case is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. .. After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal processing ends.

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

In the first variation pattern setting process of step S111A, the value of the first special figure process flag is ".
It is executed at the time of "1". In this first fluctuation pattern setting process, a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is determined based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes a process of determining one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns using. In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

In the first special symbol variation process in step S112A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is "2".
Is executed when. In this first special symbol variation process, the process of setting the first special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol are measured. Processing to be done is included. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the first special symbol variation processing ends. To do.

In this example, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. Therefore, for example, the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) is performed.
When the variation display of the special symbol is in progress, the variation display of the second special symbol may result in a small hit and be controlled by the small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is before the small hit is released. (Determine whether or not the value corresponds to the processing-small hit end processing), and if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the first special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the first special symbol variation processing In this way, the value of the first special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop process unless the small hit game is in progress. By performing such control, the variation display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. It is controlled to do. Not limited to such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is interrupted (timer). It may be configured to suspend the update).

Further, for example, the small hit ending period as the small hit end processing period may be configured to be different depending on the game state. For example, if the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted in the normal state, the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes long, and the execution period and the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol become longer. If the difference becomes large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period by stopping the shaking of the decorative pattern, which gives the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable to make the small hit ending period shorter than the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the normal state, whereas the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, for example, in the first KT state, the game ball is practically difficult to win in the small hit control and no particular effect is performed, so that the small hit ending period is shorter than in the second KT state. It may be configured to do so. On the other hand, in the second KT state, the game ball is easy to win in the small hit control, and the effect of emphasizing the small hit control is executed. Therefore, the small hit ending period may be longer than in the first KT state. .. In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, whereas the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

Further, as for the small hit fanfare period as the small hit opening pretreatment period, the length of the period may be different depending on the game state, as in the above-mentioned small hit ending period.

In the first special symbol stop process of step S113A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is "3".
Is executed when. In this first special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A stops the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (
It includes a process to make settings for (deriving). Then, when the display result is "big hit", the setting process for starting the big hit game is performed. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", a process for starting the small hit game is performed. Then, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. .. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop process ends.

The process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process process described with reference to FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process process will be explained. In addition, each random number value extracted in the first start winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in the second hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as hold information.

In this example, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. Therefore, for example, the transition to the second special symbol variation process is performed to change the second special symbol. When it is being displayed, it may be a small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol and may be controlled by the small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103).
) Determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, whether or not the value of the first special figure process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing to the small hit end processing). Judgment), if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the second special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the second special symbol variation process, and if it is not in the small hit game, the second special figure process The value of the flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop process. By performing such control, the first
During the small hit game based on the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. Not limited to such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the variable display of the first special symbol,
The process of measuring the elapsed time since the second special symbol starts to fluctuate may be interrupted (timer update is interrupted).

Regarding the small hit control based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the length of the small hit fanfare period and the small hit ending period may be different depending on the game state.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25C shown in FIG. 4 as the accessory control process process. In this accessory control process processing, the CPU 10
In step 3, step S12 is performed according to the value of the accessory control process flag provided in the RAM 102.
One of the processes 0 to S128 is selected and executed. In each process (steps S120 to S128) of the accessory control process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The bonus control normal process in step S120 is executed when the value of the bonus control process flag is “0”. In this bonus control normal process, it is monitored whether or not the setting for starting the big hit game is made, and if the setting for starting the big hit game is made, the process for starting the big hit game is performed. , The value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "1".

The gate passage waiting process in step S121 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “1”. In this gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "2".

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S122 is executed when the accessory control process flag is “2”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for keeping the big winning opening in the open state and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S123 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “3”. This big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, and the like. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "4" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. , End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The jackpot release post-processing in step S124 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “4”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit execution number, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit execution number, the accessory control process The value of the flag is updated to "5". When the value of the accessory control process flag is updated, the processing after opening the jackpot ends.

The jackpot end processing in step S125 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “5”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control, KT control, and high-base control. When such a setting is made, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S126 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “6”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the special winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "7", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S127 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “7”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the special winning opening is opened and the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "8", and the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S128 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “8”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 7. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 7 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). In addition, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73).
). The timer interrupt flag is set for a predetermined time (for example, 2) based on the CTC register setting, for example.
It is set to the on state every time (milliseconds) elapses. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on,
The effect control CPU 120 is automatically set to disable interrupts, but when a CPU that is not automatically disabled is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is turned on in step S73 (step S73; Ye
s), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to turn it off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, the main board 1
After reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of 1 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, settings and controls corresponding to the read effect control commands are performed. It is said. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the RAM 1 may be stored so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like.
The reception flag provided in 22 is turned on. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation in the decorative light emitting body such as the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED, and the driving of the movable body 32. Controls such as operation to operate various production devices are performed. In addition, the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices is determined, determined, set, and the like according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 7 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 8, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 is, for example, the RAM 12
Depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in 2, the following steps S170 to S1
One of the 77 processes is selected and executed.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. Image display device 5
If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern in is started, the value of the effect process flag is set to ".
Update to 1 ”and end the variable display start waiting process.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120
By instructing the display control unit 123, the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 can be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, the movable body 32 can be driven, and the voice control board 13 can be driven. Speakers 8L, 8 by the output of the command (sound effect signal) to
Various types of decorative symbols are displayed during variable display, such as outputting voice and sound effects from R, and turning on / off / blinking the frame LED 9 and decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the LED control board 14. Execute production control. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120
For example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state is set, and various effect controls in the small hit game state are executed based on the set content. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. is there"
Update to 5 ”and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120
Sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120
Sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and executes various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

What is displayed during the variable display of a special symbol is one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-").
The variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).
..

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) , Regular Bonus, RT, AT, A
The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of RT and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via the communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, the expression ("high", "high", "high" of the comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production.
Expressions such as "low" and "differentiate") may include that one is in the proportion of "0%". For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

[Explanation of feature 21TM]
Next, the feature unit 21TM will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM01 as shown in FIG. 9-1.
Various control boards such as No. 6 are mounted. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a main board 1
Relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between 1 and the effect control board 12
Etc. are also installed. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko game machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes a first start port switch 22A, a second start port switch 22B, a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. Various parts are connected, and speakers 8L, 8R, and frame L are connected to the effect control board 12.
Various production devices such as the ED9 are connected, but these are omitted in FIG. 9-1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and as shown in FIG. 9-3, the board case 21T
It is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being stored in the M201, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main substrate 11 is mainly
It is an example of command information addressed to a control board on the sub side including a function for setting a random number used in a special figure game, a function for inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. It has a function to output and send control commands as control signals, and a function to output various information to the hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 that can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and various prize information related to winning is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. It also has a function to display. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the display changeover switch 21
The information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be switched by operating the TM030.

The main board 11 incorporates various signals such as a power cutoff signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal in addition to detection signals from, for example, a game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for detecting a game ball, and is used as a game control microcomputer. The switch circuit 110 to be transmitted to 100 and the information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as security signals from the terminal board 21TM016 are mounted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 9-1 is enclosed in a substrate case 21TM201 made of a permeable synthetic resin material, and the display monitor 21TM029 is in the center of the main substrate 11. (For example, 7 segments) are arranged, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 9-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided in the lower center of the back surface of the main board 11. Main board 11
Is not visible when the gaming machine frame 3 is not open, so the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 is when the back side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 3 is open is visually recognized. It is the front of the pachinko machine 1 and is different from the front of the pachinko machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

In addition, the main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) has each winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings, hereinafter, "entrance area". The number of game balls entering the (also referred to as) is totaled, and various prize information such as the ratio and the combination ratio based on the total is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and these prize information is displayed. This makes it possible to check various winning information such as the ratio and the role ratio after installation in the amusement park. That is, on the manufacturer side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming ball enters the general winning opening (passing the test) at a predetermined frequency. Also,
When conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment is being made, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the gaming ball has entered the general winning opening at the frequency as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made in the pachinko gaming machine 1 after installation.

In addition, the power supply board is enclosed in a board case made of a permeable synthetic resin material.
On the lower right side of the back of the power supply board, there is a clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM05 that functions as a setting switch for changing the setting values such as the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later.
2 and a power switch 21TM055 are provided. By operating the power switch 21TM055 in a state where the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko game machine 1, a clerk of the game hall or the like determines each board such as the main board 11, the effect control board 12, and the payout control board 21TM037. The operating voltage of is supplied. Furthermore, at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated,
If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and the initialization process (RAM clear) described later is executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, it is easy to perform the power-on operation and the initialization operation.

The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM05
2 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 which can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened, and only the clerk who possesses the predetermined key can operate the machine 2. It becomes operable. Further, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires key operation, only the clerk who has the key to operate the lock switch 21TM051 can operate the lock switch 21TM051 among the clerk of the game store. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and O by a predetermined key.
Although it is a switch capable of executing the switching operation of the FF, it may be a switch capable of executing the switching operation and performing an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pushing operation).

The lock switch 21TM051 can maintain an ON state or an OFF state. That is, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state even if no force is applied by a clerk of the amusement park or the like. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 has a configuration in which the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the game hall clerk or the like must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key, so that the game hall clerk or the like leaves the lock switch 21TM051 in the ON state. It can be prevented from being lost.

As shown in FIG. 9-3, in the lower part on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming balls that have won the winning openings and the gaming balls that have entered the out openings are discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (discharge port) is provided, and a discharge port switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a launched game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a frame LED 9 and decorations. It includes LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the LED.

FIG. 9-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 9-2, the payout control board 21
The TM037 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer and has at least a built-in RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, RAM (not shown), ROM (not shown) containing the payout control program, the I / O port, and the like constitute the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is a payout control C.
Payout control microcomputer 21 with PU21TM371, RAM and ROM
It is realized by TM370 and I / O port. Further, the I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

The detection signals from the ball-out switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and then output to the main board 11 via the I / O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-2, the payout control board 21TM037 has a game machine frame opening sensor that detects the opening of the game machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2, and can open and close the front surface of the game board 2. A door frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a covering the glass door frame 3a and a game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 equipped with the same are connected, and various abnormalities are found based on the detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of (error). The detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, so that the payout control microcomputer is used. 21TM37
0 makes it possible to distinguish between the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

Further, the detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is the relay board 21TM07.
It is input to the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via 2.
The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor consisting of a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and the game ball is clogged.
That is, it is used to detect so-called ball biting. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 has a ball-out switch 21T.
If the detection signal from M187 indicates a ball out state or the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full tank state, the ball payout process is stopped.

Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank state,
The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs a low-level full tank signal to the launching board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball launching from the ball launching device. The launch motor signal to the launch motor 21TM094 output by the AND circuit 21TM091 of the launch board 21TM090 is transmitted from the launch board 21TM090 to the launch motor 21TM094. The full tank signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is the launch board 21.
It is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the TM090, and is a drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (a signal for driving the launch motor 21TM094, which serves to supply power from the power supply board. The signal to be fulfilled) is input to the other side of the input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the launch motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the launch motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs a full tank signal, the launch motor 21TM094
The output of the launch motor signal to is stopped.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a serial communication circuit 21T for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) signals with the game control microcomputer 100 by serial communication.
M380 is built-in. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 10
0 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are serial communication circuits 21TM.
Signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second) in order to confirm the connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. ) Is being exchanged (sent and received). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal for confirming the connection (a prize ball request signal in this embodiment) at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the prize ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100 is received, is a signal notifying that fact (reception A).
The CK signal) is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment,
By superimposing specific data on the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal, a specific data is specified between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 at the timing of transmitting and receiving the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal. It is configured to exchange data. For example, when a prize is won, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by differently setting a predetermined bit of the prize ball request signal, and the prize for which the setting is made. The ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM3
When the prize ball payout operation is completed, the 70 sets data indicating the end of the prize ball by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and transmits the set received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. To do. In addition, when a predetermined error (error such as ball lending, full tank, out of ball, etc.) occurs, the data indicating the content of the error is set by changing the predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is set. The received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls paid out and a ball rental number signal indicating the number of balls to be rented to a terminal board (external terminal board for frame and external terminal board for board) via the output port 21TM372b. (Including and) Output to 21TM160. Although the driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, FIG. 9-2
Is omitted.

Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has an output port 21TM37.
An error signal is output to the error display LED 21TM374 by the 7-segment LED via 2c. Further, a signal for instructing lighting / extinguishing is output to the prize ball LED 21TM053 and the ball burnout LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. A detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for canceling the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

Furthermore, the payout motor 21TM from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370
The drive signal to 289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. A driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is provided outside the output port 21TM372a.
Is installed, but the description is omitted in FIG. 9-3.

A microcomputer for controlling the card unit is mounted on the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the game machine. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indicator lamp, a connecting stand direction indicator, a card insertion indicator lamp, and a card insertion slot. The interface board (relay board) 21TM066 has a frequency display LED.
21TM060, ball lending possible LED 21TM061, ball lending switch 21TM062 and return switch 21TM063 are connected.

From the interface board 21TM066 to the card unit 21TM050, a ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are given to the card unit 21TM050 according to the operation of the player. .. Further, the card unit 21TM050 gives the interface board 21TM066 a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lending availability display signal.
A connection signal (VL) between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037.
Signal), unit operation signal (BRDY signal), ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), ball lending completion signal (EXE signal) and pachinko machine operation signal (PRDY signal) are input ports 21TM.
It is transmitted and received via the 372f and the output port 21TM372d. Card unit 21
Between TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, the interface board 21TM066
Is intervening. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9-2, signals such as the connection signal (VL signal) are transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066.

When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 has a card unit 21TM050.
Outputs a PRDY signal to. Further, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. Disbursement control microcomputer 21TM37
0 determines the connected / unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 according to the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit control microcomputer outputs the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit control microcomputer uses the payout control board 2
The BRQ signal is output to 1TM037.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a card unit 21T.
When the EXS signal for M050 is raised and the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050 is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number of rental balls to the player. Then, when the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21T
The M370 lowers the EXE signal for the card unit 21TM050. afterwards,
On condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the ON state, the prize ball payout control is executed when the payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100.

The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is the payout control board 21T.
It is supplied from M037. That is, the power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066.
It is done through. In this example, the card unit 2 is connected to the AC24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066.
A fuse for protecting 1TM050 is provided to prevent the card unit 21TM050 from being supplied with a voltage equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has a configuration in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value is composed of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest ball output rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the ball output rate.
That is, when 6 is set as the set value, it is most advantageous for the player.
The smaller the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage is.

9-4 (A) to 9-4 (F) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value for a big hit is set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. If it is, the jackpot will be won with a lower probability (1/300) than when the set values are "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". ing. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is the target of variable display, the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/30)
You will win a big hit at 0).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in some cases. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is the target of the variable display, the same probability as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display (1/28)
You will win a big hit at 0).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than when it is "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is the target of the variable display, the same probability as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display (
You will win a big hit at 1/280).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (D), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 4 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". "2", "3"
The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than in the case of. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". "2", "3"
, "4", the jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235). Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/235) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". "2", "3"
, "4", "5", the jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/220) as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to any of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to 9-4 (F). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the winning of the big hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. In addition, Fig. 9-4
The "probability" shown in (A) to (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of becoming a big hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design.

Further, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to 9-4 to determine whether or not to make a big hit, but the big hit determination table is used. The jackpot is determined separately by using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. May be good.

In this embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The set value that can be set in may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Setting suggestion production)
The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends different according to the designated set value. FIG. 9-5 (1),
(2) and (3) show an example of setting suggestion effect. FIG. 9-5 (1) shows an example in which the ending image in the "sunny" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen, and FIG. 9-5 (2) shows an example in which the ending screen in the "cloudy" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. For example, FIG. 9-5 (3) shows an example in which the ending image of the "rain" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen.
Further, FIG. 9-5 (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the set value specified by the setting command.

The CPU 103 transmits a setting command for specifying a set value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, when the jackpot game state ends, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for executing the ending effect on the image display device 5 to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 sets the set value specified by the received setting command as R.
By storing in AM102, it is possible to determine the mode of the ending effect based on the stored set value. For example, a character (“B”) that notifies the image display device 5 that the jackpot game state has ended, based on the effect control command transmitted when the jackpot game state ends.
It is possible to display the ending image of the mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rain mode) determined based on the stored setting value together with the character (character of "ONUS end").

In the table shown in FIG. 9-5 (4), when the setting value specified by the setting command is "1, 2", "3, 4", and "5, 6". When the mode of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be the “sunny” mode shown in FIG. 9-5 (1), FIG. 9-5 (2).
When determining the "cloudy" mode shown in FIG. 9-5 and when determining the "rainy" mode shown in FIG. 9-5 (3), determination values are assigned.

In the effect control CPU 120, the set value specified by the received setting command is "1" or ".
In the case of "2", it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a low ratio (for example, 20%), and a medium ratio (for example, 40%). so(
Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in 2).
It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3) at a moderate ratio (for example, 40%). Further, the effect control CPU 120 has a low ratio (for example, 20%) when the set value specified by the received setting command is "3" or "4".
It was decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1), and the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) was performed at a high rate (for example, 50%). ), And at a moderate rate (eg 30%) the "rain" shown in (3)
It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the aspect. Further, when the set value specified by the received setting command is "5" or "6", the effect control CPU 120 has a high ratio (for example, 50%) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3) at the ratio of (for example, 30%).

In this way, by making the determination ratio of each mode of the setting suggestion effect different according to the set value, the player becomes interested in how the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the setting suggestion is performed. It is possible to improve the interest of the production. In this example, the player becomes interested in how the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends is executed, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in the "sunny" mode. You will expect it to be done.

(Processing when power is turned on)
Next, the power-on processing will be described.
9-6 to 9-8 are diagrams showing an example of processing executed by the game control microcomputer 100 when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 9-6, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21).
TM4010). This process performs a parity check as a data check.

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), CPU103
Is that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is a regular value, for example, 0 to 0.
It is confirmed whether or not it matches any of 5 (step S21TM4020). In this example, as the setting values stored in the setting value storage area, six numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are set as regular values, and six levels of setting values having different jackpot probabilities are provided. ing. The setting value 0 in this example corresponds to the setting value 1 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, and the setting value 1 in this example corresponds to the setting value 2 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, and the setting in this example. The value 2 corresponds to the set value 3 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, the set value 3 in this example corresponds to the set value 4 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, and the set value 4 in this example is described above. It corresponds to the set value 5 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like, and the set value 5 in this example corresponds to the set value 6 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above.

Here, in this example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is shipped from the game machine maker (before it is installed in the game hall), the value having the lowest jackpot probability among the above regular values is stored in the set value storage area. It is assumed that (0 in this example) is stored. If the data in the set value storage area is corrupted, it may not be a regular value. If the set value is a regular value (step S21
YES in TM4020), and confirm whether or not the setting changing flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting changing flag is set when the mode shifts to the setting change mode described later (step S21TM4580), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state (step S21TM4720).

If the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030),
The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4040).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S)
21TM4040 YES), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether or not it is decided to execute RAM clear (initialization of the game state), and if the value is 1, RA.
It indicates that it has been decided that M clear will be performed. In this example, the RAM clear is not actually executed when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear is executed after the processing related to the setting change mode is completed. Will be done.

The area where the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power is cut off, the value of the RAM clear flag is not retained, and the value of the RAM clear flag at the time of power restoration is 0 (the initial value is not set). Note that the notification that the game state is initialized may be performed before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and as will be described later, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. It may be done.

On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4060.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a are the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300.
The detection signal indicating that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, and the opening of the glass door frame 3a. A detection signal indicating that the state has been detected is output.
When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected. Recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected,
By notifying the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, the game control microcomputer 100 side has the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. It is possible to individually recognize the open state.

The game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a, which is a detection signal indicating that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected, to the game control microcomputer 100. When the configuration is such that a detection signal indicating that is output (that is, when the game control microcomputer 100 includes the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300), the game control microcomputer 100 has these. By inputting the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4070). .. And lock switch 21TM
If 051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), it is shown in FIG. 9-7.
Processing after step S21TM4510 related to setting change mode or setting confirmation mode,
Move to. When the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the set value can be confirmed and changed, and when the mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode, the set value can be confirmed.

That is, the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (step S21T).
YES in M4010) and the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020)
), If the power is not cut off during the setting change (NO in step S21TM4030)
), The setting value can be changed and / or confirmed on condition that the game machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060) and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070). It becomes. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Step S21TM4 described later without being controlled by the mode.
Move to 760 (send setting command).

In the present embodiment, in order to make it possible to confirm the set value (setting confirmation mode) although the change of the set value is not permitted, (1) the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2) ) Two conditions are required that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. CPU
In 103, when it is confirmed by the determination processing of step S21TM4060 and step S21TM4070 that all of the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, the set value can be confirmed (setting confirmation). It is possible to shift to mode). In addition to these conditions (1) and (2), (3) clear switch (setting changeover switch)
A state in which the set value can be changed (setting change mode) as described later, provided that the RAM clear flag is set based on the determination that the 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES). It is possible to move to.

As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated to confirm or change the set value is provided on the back side of the game board 2, and must be operated unless the game machine frame 3 is opened. I can't. If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the game machine frame 3 is not in the open state, there is an abnormality in the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300, or something is wrong. There is a possibility that the set value is being confirmed or changed by means. Since it is inappropriate to allow confirmation or change of the set value in such a state, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode. And it is not controlled by any of the setting change modes.

In the present embodiment, as the condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although it is controllable, it is not limited to such a form, and even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode It may not be controlled by any of the above.

On the other hand, when the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4060 (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. When it is in the closed state, it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and is described later in step S21TM47.
Move to 60 (send setting command). Further, when it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (step S21TM407).
0), without being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) described later.

In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010),
If the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 will
The process proceeds to step S21TM4120. Further, in checking the value stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4020), a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area.
If is not stored (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103
The process proceeds to step S21TM4120. Also, in checking the setting changing flag (
In step S21TM4030), if it is confirmed that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 performs step S21T.
Move to M4120.

Here, even if a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is damaged, it is determined as NO in step S21TM4010. Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. That is, if there is a possibility that the value stored in the set value storage area is inappropriate, the setting is changed based on the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) being satisfied. It will be controlled by the mode. Further, even if the data check in the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010) is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the normal value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area. (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode is controlled based on the condition that the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. Further, when the setting change mode is controlled when the power is cut off last time, the setting change mode is controlled based on the condition of the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. It will be.

In step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4120). CPU
When 103 recognizes the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (
YES in step S21TM4120), confirming whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4130).

If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130)
), The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S)
21TM4140 YES), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). Then, the processes after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 9-7 are executed.

On the other hand, when the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4120 (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. If it is closed, step S21TM413
At 0, when the lock switch 21TM051 is not in the ON state (step S21TM4).
NO in 130), when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state in step S21TM4140 (N in step S21TM4140)
In O), the CPU 103 does not execute the process after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode, and indicates that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal. An error command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value abnormality error command, the image display device 5
Notifies that the set value may be abnormal. For example, the message "The setting value may be abnormal" is displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 temporarily turns off the power (power switch 21TM055 is turned off) in the image display device 5.
), Then when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on), the mode is changed to the setting change mode and an operation for changing the set value is performed (the set value is fixed). For example, the message "Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode" is displayed. It should be noted that the same notification may be performed by the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a predetermined loop process (step S) until the power is turned off.
21TM420-Repeat step S21TM4220) is executed.

In this loop processing, the CPU 103 has a weight of 4 ms (step S21TM420).
After performing 0), by displaying the character "E" on the display monitor 21TM029, etc.
"The transition condition for controlling the setting change mode even though the set value may not be a normal value (0 to 5) (all are determined to be YES in steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140) is satisfied. It has not been changed to the setting change mode. ”(Step S21TM4210). Then, the security signal is output from the output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21T).
M4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information on a plurality of game machines, a card unit or a ring lamp device provided corresponding to the game machine, etc.). Will be done.

The loop processing period is 4 m on the 7-segment display provided in the display monitor 21TM029.
The letter "E" will be displayed for each s. By providing a weight of 4 ms, it is possible to prevent excessive heat from staying in the 7-segment display and damaging the display. In addition, the security signal is continuously output during the loop processing period. By outputting the security signal to the outside, a predetermined event (in this example, the set value is a normal value (0 to 5)) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the input of the security signal in an external device such as a hall computer. ), But the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied and the transition to the setting change mode has not occurred) can be identified.

The loop processing of step S21TM420 to step S21TM4220 is continued until the power supply is stopped (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (step S2).
If 1TM4010 is NO) and the set value is not a regular value (step S21TM4020)
NO) or when the power is cut off during the setting change (that is, when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on and YES is determined in step S21TM4030). If applicable, the game should not be played in this state, and the set value is set before shifting to the normal game processing (for example, the game control timer interrupt processing including the prize ball processing, the special symbol process processing, etc.). It is necessary to fix the setting value of the storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set to shift to the setting change mode.

In the present embodiment, in order to make the setting value changeable (setting change mode), (1)
) The game machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state.
(3) The clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state.
Two conditions are required. The CPU 103 is subjected to these (1) by the determination processing of step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140.
) To (3), when it is confirmed that all of the conditions are satisfied, it is possible to shift to a state in which the set value can be changed (setting change mode).

If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value of the set value storage area can be fixed to a regular value. It is not possible to shift to normal game processing. Therefore, if NO is determined in any of the determination processes of step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140, the process proceeds to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) described above.

If the process shifts to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), the normal game process cannot be performed. Therefore, the clerk at the game hall must turn off the pachinko gaming machine 1 and turn it on again. It doesn't become. In this way, if the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied, the power is turned off once and all the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied when the next power is turned on. Then, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and the setting value of the setting value storage area is fixed to a regular value.

When any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 predetermined the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. It is also possible to urge the power to be turned off by emitting light in the power off instruction mode.

In the present embodiment, when the setting changing flag is not set (step S21TM4).
030 is NO), and although the change of the set value is not permitted, in order to make it possible to confirm the set value (setting confirmation mode), (1) the game machine frame 3 is open (step S2).
Two conditions are required: (YES in 1TM4060) and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070).

However, if the setting changing flag is set (step S21TM4).
030 YES), (1) The game machine frame 3 is in the open state (step S21TM4120).
Yes), (2) The lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4).
Even when the two conditions of YES) in 130 are satisfied, the setting confirmation mode is not controlled. Even when these conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied
(3) Clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM05 in step S21TM4140
When it is determined that 2 is not in the ON state (NO), it is controlled to the game stop state (loop processing in steps S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) without being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Will be.

Next, with respect to the processing related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, FIGS. 9-7 and 9
This will be described using -8. In the process of FIG. 9-7, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value (any of 0 to 5 in this example) ( Step S21TM4510). Regular value (0 to 5) in the set value storage area
) Is stored (YES in step S21TM4510), step S21
Move to TM4530. When a regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 has the lowest jackpot probability "0" as a regular value in the set value storage area. Is stored (step S21TM4520).
Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4530.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a power cutoff process after performing a weight of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) (step S21TM4540). In the power cutoff process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a power cutoff signal based on a power cutoff including an unexpected power failure is input, and if a power cutoff signal is input, the power supply is supplied. Immediately before the operation becomes inoperable due to the stop, the power supply stop processing is executed. In this power supply stop processing, R
Processing to turn on the backup flag indicating that data will be backed up to AM102,
Data protection processing of the RAM 102 and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. That is, in the power cutoff process, check data is stored in a predetermined backup area.

As a result, when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S).
Repeated processing of 21TM4530 to step S21TM4620 or step S21T
If a power failure occurs during the iterative processing of M4530 to step S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650), step S21TM40 after the power is restored.
At 10, the data check will be executed appropriately.

Next, the CPU 103 uses the set value stored in the set value storage area (0 to 5 in this example).
The value corresponding to is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4550).
). Here, the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area. Since the clerk of the game hall usually recognizes the range of the set value as 1 to 6, if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed as it is on the display monitor 21TM029, the clerk of the game hall actually displays it. There is a risk of erroneously recognizing the set value of. Therefore, in this example, [value stored in the set value storage area + 1] is set to
It is set to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as a set value. Then CPU1
03 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570)
Yes), that is, when the RAM clear is not executed after the mode (here, the setting confirmation mode) is completed, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command specifying that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled (step S21TM4650). , Step S21TM4680. The effect control CPU 120 can identify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the game machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is executed after the mode (here, the setting change mode) is completed, the CP
The U103 sets a setting changing flag indicating that the setting value may have been changed (step S21TM4580). The area where the value of the setting changing flag is stored is
Since it is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting changing flag is retained even when the power is turned off. Therefore, if a power failure occurs while the setting change mode is being controlled, the value of the setting changing flag is 1 (set state) when the power is turned on next time.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command that specifies that the setting change mode has been controlled (step S21TM4590). The effect control CPU 120 receives the setting change mode command, and the game control microcomputer 100
Can be identified as having transitioned to the setting change mode. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the CPU 103 inputs the setting changeover switch information indicating whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and confirms whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

If the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4680. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and steps S21TM4.
Move to 680. The updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

Every time the clerk of the amusement park operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, the regular setting value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area when the setting change mode is controlled (when the power is turned on or when the power is cut off last time) is 3. If there is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated in the order of 3 → 4 → 5 → 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 for each setting change operation, and the display monitor 21TM029 responds accordingly. The displayed information will be updated in the order of 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4.

Here, the display of the current setting value (step S21TM4550), the output of the security signal (step S21TM4560), and the transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650) can be executed, but the setting change mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4650).
The state in which 21TM4590) and the update of the set value (step S21TM4620) cannot be executed corresponds to the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed or the set value cannot be changed.
The period controlled in the setting confirmation mode is from step S21TM4530 to step S21.
The processes of TM4570 and step S21TM4650 will be repeatedly executed.

In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21T).
M4070 determines YES), clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052
Is in the OFF state (NO is determined in step S21TM4040 and the RAM clear flag remains 0).

In addition, the display of the current set value (step S21TM4550) and the output of the security signal (step S21TM4560) can be executed, and the setting change mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4590) and the set value is updated (step S21TM4620).
The state in which the above can be executed corresponds to the setting change mode in which the setting value can be confirmed and changed.

In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21T).
M4070 or step S21TM4130 determines YES), clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140 determines YES), and step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150 sets the RAM clear flag to 1. It is controlled based on what is set).

The setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once when the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits the setting confirmation mode command, it is possible to identify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted, and the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off should be set. , When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once when the setting change mode is controlled. Therefore, when the setting change mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 should set the setting change mode command transmission flag which can identify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. , When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

In step S21TM4680, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), the weight of 4 ms is again (step S21T).
After performing M4530), the processes after step S21TM4540 are repeated. That is, R
If the value of the AM clear flag is 0, the control of the setting confirmation mode is continued, and if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the control of the setting change mode is continued.

If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state in step S21TM4680 (YES in step S21TM4680), the CPU 103 terminates the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and sets 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer (YES).
Step S21TM4710). By setting a predetermined time as the value of the security signal timer, the security signal is continuously output until the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 ms from the predetermined time in the information output processing when the normal game processing is started. Will be done. For example, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped when the value reaches 0 ms. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms regardless of whether the setting change mode has ended or the setting confirmation mode has ended.

That is, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), the output of the security signal is started corresponding to the start of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4560).
Corresponding to the end of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is continuously output until at least 1 sec has elapsed from the end of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The value of the security signal timer is set (step S21TM4710).

Here, the process of starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 determines whether the mode is controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled). It is being executed as a common process (without). Further, in step S21TM4710, the process of setting the remaining output period of the security signal is also determined regardless of whether it is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled). It is being executed as a common process. In this way, the security signal output control is simplified by sharing the security signal output start control and output end control between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled. , The control burden can be reduced.

In addition, the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the security signal is output in response to the end of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By stopping the above, it is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that the game machine may have been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Here, step S21T immediately after the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed.
In M4710, a common value (1000 ms) is set in the security signal timer when controlled in the setting change mode and when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. However, if both the output start control and the output end control of the security signal are shared between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting change mode is controlled, which mode is used on the external device side. It becomes difficult to grasp whether it is controlled.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2), when the setting change mode is controlled, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, step S21 is once performed.
After setting 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer in TM4710, reset (overwrite) 30000 ms as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465 after clearing the RAM based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770 described later. ) That is, after the remaining output period of the security signal is once set to 1 sec, the remaining output period of the security signal is reset (overwritten) to 30 sec.

When the signal output control shown above is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is the setting confirmation mode end when the setting confirmation mode is controlled as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2). It is the timing when 1 sec has elapsed from the above, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the timing is 30 sec after the end of the setting change mode.

Specifically, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled (RAM is not cleared and the value of the security signal timer is not changed from 1 second), the game control timer interrupt after the interrupt is permitted is interrupted. In the process (for example, information output process), the value of the security signal timer is 10.
The output of the security signal is continued from 00 ms to 0 ms, and when the setting change mode is controlled (when the RAM is cleared, the value of the security signal timer is 1).
When the value is changed from seconds to 30 seconds), the security signal is output until the value of the security signal timer changes from 30000 ms to 0 ms in the game control timer interrupt process (for example, information output process) after the interrupt is permitted. Will be continued. When the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the security signal timer value is set to a predetermined time (1000 ms or 3) at the timing before shifting to the game control timer interrupt process when the setting change mode is controlled.
The output of the security signal may be continued from (0000 ms) to 0 ms, and the process may shift to the game control timer interrupt process after the output of the security signal is completed.

In this way, the security signal is continuously output for at least 1 sec depending on whether the control of the setting confirmation mode is finished or the control of the setting change mode is finished.
When controlled to the setting change mode, 30 seconds after the control of the setting change mode is completed.
The security signal will be continuously output until the elapse of. With such a configuration, when the security signal output control is standardized and the setting confirmation mode is controlled,
The output period of the security signal can be different depending on whether the setting change mode is controlled.

As a result, it is possible to grasp whether the external device is controlled to the setting confirmation mode without executing the initialization process, or whether the initialization process is executed and controlled to the setting change mode. .. For example, if the output period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, it can be specified that the setting confirmation mode is controlled without executing the initialization process, and if the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more, the initial setting is performed. It is possible to estimate that there is a possibility that the conversion process is executed and the setting change mode is controlled.

In addition, even when a game stop target error such as a magnetic abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor,
A security signal will be output. The security signal in this case is continuously output until the power of the game machine is turned off. Further, the CPU 103 sets an abnormality detection flag in the backup area (however, the area cleared by the initialization process) of the RAM 102 based on the fact that the abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. Then, it is assumed that the security signal is output for 4 minutes based on the fact that the abnormality detection flag is set when the power is restored.

Here, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled at the time of power restoration, the RAM clear is not executed, so that the value of the abnormality detection flag is not initialized in the signal output processing and remains set. It is possible to continuously output the security signal for 4 minutes after the power is turned on. That is, it is possible not to limit the output period of the security signal to the period from the end of the control of the setting confirmation mode to the elapse of one second. On the other hand, if the setting change mode is controlled when the power is restored, the RAM is cleared, so the abnormality detection flag is cleared in the subsequent signal output processing (power off occurs). Sometimes it is unknown whether an abnormality has been detected), and as a result, the security signal output period is the period from the end of the setting change mode until 30 seconds have passed (depending on the execution of RAM clear). Period).

In the example shown in step S21TM4710 of FIG. 9-7, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer, but the present invention is not limited to this mode and is the first after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. The value of the security signal timer set to is at least a period during which the external device can recognize that the security signal has been output, and may be, for example, 50 ms or more. That is, a common 50 ms may be set as the value of the security signal timer when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

After the process of step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting changing flag (step S21TM4720). Here, if the power is cut off after that because the setting changing flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not set when the power is restored (NO in step S21TM4030). Become.

Next, the CPU 103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the set value (0) stored in the set value storage area.
(Any of 5) is set in the setting command, and the setting command is transmitted (step S).
21TM4760). Even if neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 will be executed and the setting command will be transmitted.

Here, the player usually recognizes that the range of the set value is 1 to 6, and the effect control CPU 12
If the value specified by the setting command (the value stored in the setting value storage area) is displayed on the image display device 5 as it is on the 0 side, the player may misunderstand the set value. .. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 side recognizes the value obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) specified by the setting command as the set value (1 to 6), and sets the set values 1 to 6. In the range, the effect that suggests the set value is executed.

Not limited to such a form, the CPU 103 sets a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the set value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area in the setting command to control the effect. For C
It may be transmitted to PU120. As a result, the range of the set value specified by the setting command becomes 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. On the effect control CPU 120 side, the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is displayed as it is on the image display device 5, or an effect suggesting the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is executed. By doing so, the set value can be appropriately notified or suggested. In addition, CP for production control
It is not necessary for the U120 side to perform addition processing on the set value specified by the received setting command, and the control load on the effect control CPU 120 side can be reduced.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. In addition, it is possible to suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends different according to the designated set value.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

Here, the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770).
That is, the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (step S).
It is determined that the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), and the power is not cut off during the setting change (step S21T).
NO for M4030), and clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is O
Since it is in the FF state (NO in step S21TM4040), it is sufficient to execute the process at the time of power failure recovery without clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes a process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal when the power is turned on, and after the interrupt is permitted, the game control timer interrupt process (special). (Including design process processing, etc.) That is, when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or when the control of the setting confirmation mode is completed, the CPU 103 performs RAM based on the value of the RAM clear flag being 0. Without executing clear, a backup command will be sent as a command when the power is turned off and restored, and the normal game processing will be started.

Based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of recovery), the effect control CPU 120 has recovered from the power failure based on the data at the time of power supply stop (RAM clear is not performed). That) is recognized. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the frame LED 9
It is possible to notify that recovery from power failure has been performed (RAM clearing has not been performed) based on the data when the power supply is stopped.

On the other hand, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770) means that the RAM clear is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150, and it is determined to execute the RAM clear. Therefore, it is sufficient to execute the process at the time of turning on the power accompanied by clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes a process of setting 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer and a process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal when the power is turned on. , After the interrupt is permitted, the process may be shifted to the game control timer interrupt process (including the special symbol process process).

As shown in FIG. 9-8, the CPU 103 performs the RAM clear process based on the RAM clear flag being 1 (step S21TM1410). In RAM clear processing, R
The data indicating the game state (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, hold storage, etc.) stored in the game state information storage area of AM102 before the power supply is stopped is cleared and the initial value is set. , The set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear process. In addition, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated value for each set value is not cleared. The value does not change before the RAM clear process. Then, by displaying the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029 or the like, it is notified that the game state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). RA
By the M clear processing, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) is initialized to 0, but is initialized to an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. It may be changed to. Further, the entire area of the RAM 102 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is.

The reason why the set value stored in the set value storage area is not cleared in this RAM clear process is as follows: (a) If the setting change mode is not controlled, a regular value is set in the set value storage area when the power is turned on. It means that it was stored (YES in step S21TM4020).
, (B) When the setting change mode is controlled, the value of the setting value storage area is set to 0 (step S21TM4520), or the regular value is stored by the operation in the setting change mode (step S21TM4610). And step S21TM4620).
Further, after the RAM clear processing, the setting change mode cannot be controlled, and there is no opportunity to change the value stored in the setting value storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the initialization table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization table in the work area (step S21TM1440). Step S21TM1
By the processing of 430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively processing according to the control state are initially set. The value is set.

After executing step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21T).
M1450). In the game control timer interrupt processing described later, the jackpot determination in the special symbol process processing is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command that specifies that the initialization process has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode ends) (step S21TM1460). Production control CPU 120
Then, the initialization process was performed based on the reception of this initialization command (the RAM was cleared without the recovery from the power failure based on the data when the power supply was stopped). Recognize. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the frame LED 9, the game state and the like are initialized (data when the power supply is stopped). It is possible to notify that the RAM has been cleared without recovering from the power failure based on the above.

Next, the CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). As a result, step S21TM4 after the setting change mode ends.
The value of the security signal timer (1 second) set in 710 is changed (overwritten) to the value (30 seconds) corresponding to the execution of RAM clear. Further, when the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, step S21TM4710 is not executed (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer). Without), the value of the security signal timer is set to 30 seconds corresponding to the RAM clear being executed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is not executed (including the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled), this step S21TM14
Since the process of 65 is not executed, the value of the security signal timer is set to step S21TM47.
It remains 1 second set at 10.

Since the value of the security signal timer is set in this step S21TM1465 or the above-mentioned step S21TM4710, the security signal is output in the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt is permitted (information output process). After that, the value of the security signal timer is 2 m each time the game control timer interrupt process is executed by the interrupt permission.
It is subtracted by s, and the output of the security signal is stopped at the timing when the value of the security signal timer becomes 0.

Then, the CPU 103 executes the setting process of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11
A connection confirmation signal is output to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037. Further, the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are set in a state in which communication can be executed.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (
Step S21TM1490). The CPU 103 performs processing according to, for example, a random number circuit setting program, so that the random number circuit 104 has a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result.
Make settings to update the value of.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 determines the predetermined time (for example, 2).
The CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every ms). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this example, 2 m
It is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically applied every s.

Next, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S21TM1520) and the initial value random number update process (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt prohibition state is set (step S21TM1510), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enable state is set. Set (step S21TM1540). As a result, the game shifts to the normal game processing in which the game control timer interrupt processing can be executed. In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when it is not a big hit, and is for display. The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number for display. Further, the initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number determines the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter). It is a random number to do. Game control processing that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game devices such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also called the game device control process), the count value of the random number for determining the normal symbol hit is one round (taking the random number for determining the normal symbol hit). The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value.

In this example, when the RAM clear flag is determined to be 0 (YES) in step S21TM4770, the CPU 103 determines whether or not both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process is shifted to the process at the time of power failure recovery, but the process is not limited to such a form, and step S
When it is determined in 21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES), the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed (the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door). (Depending on the state of the frame 3a), the process may be shifted to the process at the time of power failure recovery.

Further, in this example, when the CPU 103 determines in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), whether or not both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state is determined. Processing at power-on (processing after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)) without confirmation (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a)
However, not limited to such a form, when the RAM clear flag is determined to be 1 (NO) in step S21TM4770, both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. Processing at power-on (processing after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)) on condition that the power is turned on (depending on the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a).
You may move to.

As shown above, the clerk of the amusement park, etc., turns on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on.
By setting the N state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 to the ON state, it is possible to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting change mode, and to initialize the gaming state and the like (RAM clear). To be executed) becomes possible. Further, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming state, etc. Is not initialized (step S21TM40)
40 or step S21TM4140 to determine NO and not set the RAM clear flag to 1). In this way, the clerk of the game hall can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also can select whether to initialize the game state or the like. There is.

As described above, if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, it means that the setting change mode was controlled when the power was turned off, so the setting value is in an unstable state. There is a possibility that the set value to be confirmed on the playground side is not stored in the set value storage area. In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 is in a game stopped state (step) without shifting to the normal game processing based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). S21TM4200-Step S21TM42
It is made possible to control the loop processing of 20), and a security signal is output in response to the control to the game stop state (step S21TM4220).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from being started in a state where the set value is unstable (the game control timer interrupt process is executed), and when the power is turned on, the game is prevented from being executed.
It is possible to notify the external device that the setting change mode was controlled when the power was cut off.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 has a condition for shifting to the setting change mode based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). If step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 are all YES) is not satisfied, a set value error error command is transmitted (
Along with step S21TM4190), the game is stopped (step S21TM4200-
In step S21TM4220 loop processing), "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.
An error display for displaying the characters of (step S21TM4210) is performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-10, by displaying the character "E" on each of the 7-segment displays 21TM029A to 21TM029D constituting the display monitor 21TM029, an abnormality occurs in the clerk of the amusement park (in the setting change mode). (There is a possibility that the power supply was cut off while it was being controlled) is clearly notified. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting value abnormality error command displays the message "Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode" on the image display device 5, thereby displaying the game hall. Operation to change the set value by shifting to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on) after the power is turned off (power switch 21TM055 is turned off). (Confirm the set value).

In this example, (a) when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, (i) the game machine frame 3
Is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), and (ii) lock switch 21T.
M051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii).
The clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21).
If it is determined to be YES) in TM4140, the setting change mode is controlled. As a result, an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display monitor 21TM0)
The display of "E" in 29) is not executed, and the message display ("Display") on the effect control board 12 side is not executed.
After turning off the power, turn on the power again to shift to the setting change mode. ") Will not be performed either.

Here, in the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590), the image display device 5 has controlled the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052). ), It is possible to notify that the set value can be changed. For example, the message "In the setting change mode" or the message "Please change the setting value by performing the setting change operation" can be displayed on the image display device 5. As a result, the clerk of the amusement park can grasp that the setting change mode is controlled, and the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052
By operating, the set value stored in the set value storage area is changed to the planned set value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state to confirm the set value and the pachinko gaming machine. 1 can be shifted to the normal game processing.

On the other hand, (b) when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is not satisfied, that is, the above (i) to (ii)
If any of the conditions in i) is not satisfied, the setting change mode is not controlled.
After the set value abnormality error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190), the game is controlled to the game stop state (loop processing in steps S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220). As a result, an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display monitor 21T)
(Display of "E" in M029) is executed, and a message is displayed on the effect control board 12 side ("Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode"). ..

In this way, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("The power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). Please move to the setting change mode. ")
If this is also performed, it is notified that the game machine is in a state in which the transition condition to the setting change mode is not satisfied after the power is restored even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. It will be. In this case, the clerk of the game hall, etc. knows that the game is not controlled in the setting change mode and is in the game stop state (it is necessary to turn on the power again to control the setting change mode). It is possible. Therefore, after the power is turned off once, the power is turned on again by operating so that all the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for the setting change mode are satisfied. Then, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to the planned setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off. By switching to the state, the set value can be fixed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal gaming process.

In this way, when the power is cut off in the setting change mode, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

Here, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied when the power is restored (a),
Error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display monitor 21TM029
(Display of "E" in) is not performed, and the mode is automatically shifted to the setting change mode, so that unnecessary error display can be avoided and the setting value can be appropriately changed.

On the other hand, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied when the power is restored (b), the mode cannot be switched to the setting change mode when the power is restored even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. Since it is in a state, the game is forcibly stopped (step S21TM420).
0 to step S21TM4220 (loop processing), an error display (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is performed on the main board 11 side. As a result, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in an unstable state in which the set value is not fixed, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

When the setting changing flag is set (Y in step S21TM4030).
ES), when all the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied, and when any of the transition conditions (i) to (iii) is not satisfied. A different command may be sent as a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal.

For example, if the transition condition is satisfied, it is a command indicating that the setting value may be abnormal, and the mode has been shifted to the setting change mode (or the transition condition is satisfied). The effect control CPU 120 that transmits a command indicating
Then, it is advisable to display the message "the setting value may be abnormal" and the message "automatically controlled to the setting change mode" on the image display device 5. On the other hand, if the transition condition is not satisfied, step S21TM4 as described above.
It is advisable to send a setting value error error command of 190.

After the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game processing is started, when both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, (1) the lock switch 21T
In response to the operation of M051 (from the OFF state to the ON state), the game control microcomputer 100 sends a lock switch operation command to the effect control CPU 120, and (2) the setting changeover switch. (Clear switch) A setting changeover switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120 in response to the operation of 21TM052 (from the OFF state to the ON state). become.

Then, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) receives a lock switch operation command.
And / or, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the operation for changing the setting value was performed even though neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode was controlled. Can be specified and notified to that effect. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "lock switch operation has been detected." In addition, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected" is executed. As a result, the clerk of the amusement park clearly understands that the operation for changing the set value has been performed even though it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and is illegal. It is possible to confirm whether or not is performed.

Not limited to such a form, the game control microcomputer 100 has a lock switch 21TM after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game processing is started.
Whether or not 051 was operated, and the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052
The lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the operation has been performed. In this way, during the period when the normal game processing (game control timer interrupt processing) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value is not confirmed. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the game control microcomputer 100.

(Modified example of processing at power-on)
In the example shown in FIG. 9-6, when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120). ), (Ii) The lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140).
Only when it is confirmed that the three conditions of ,, are satisfied, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150), and the mode shifts to the setting change mode (step S21T).
NO with M4570).

Not limited to such a form, as shown in FIG. 9-11, when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) to (iii).
The RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) and the mode shifts to the setting change mode (step S21TM4) without confirming whether or not the three conditions of)) are satisfied.
NO) may be set at 570.

In the process shown in FIG. 9-11, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010) and the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting changing flag is set. If it is (step S)
The RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without determining whether or not the conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied in (YES) of 21TM4030, and the mode is controlled to the setting change mode (step). The process is different from the process shown in FIG. 9-6 in that it is not controlled in the game stopped state (process corresponding to the loop process in step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) (NO in S21TM4570). The other parts are the same as the processes shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8.

Even in such a form, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 and the setting change mode is set based on the setting changing flag being set when the power is turned on. It is possible to appropriately determine the state of the game machine when the power is cut off during the change.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-11, when the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. It is controlled to the setting change mode based on the three conditions that the state is in the state and the (iii) clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (determined as NO in step S21TM4570). (The setting value of the setting value storage area can be changed), whereas when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) to (iii) Regardless of whether or not the three conditions are satisfied, the setting change mode is forcibly controlled.

In this way, if a power failure occurs while the setting change mode is being controlled, the three conditions (i) to (iii) are set based on the setting changing flag being set when the power is restored. By being automatically controlled to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not is established,
Workability for fixing the set value can be improved.

Here, when the setting changing flag is set (Y in step S21TM4030).
In ES), (ii) lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM).
Even if the condition of YES) in 4130 is not satisfied, the setting change mode is controlled. As a result, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode.
By operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in this state,
The set value stored in the set value storage area will be changed (step S in FIG. 9-7).
21TM461-10 step S21TM4620).

As described above, the condition for ending the setting change mode is to set the lock switch 21TM051 to O.
It is to switch from the N state to the OFF state (it is made to determine YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, in order to confirm the set value and end the setting change mode, the clerk of the amusement park who has performed the operation of changing the set value temporarily turns the lock switch 21TM051 from the OFF state if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (step S21T).
M4680 will be judged as YES).

In this way, when the setting changing flag is not set (step S21TM40)
NO in 30), and when the setting changing flag is set (step S21TM40)
30), the conditions for starting the control of the setting change mode are different, while the conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode (operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) are standardized. The conditions for terminating the control of the setting change mode are clarified so that the normal game processing can be appropriately performed.

Here, the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030).
), The lock switch 21TM051 is turned on when the setting change mode is controlled.
It is also possible to give a notification prompting the state. For example, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150 and transmits a setting value error error command (in step S21TM4190 described above). The corresponding process is executed), and the effect control CPU 120 that receives the set value error error command (step S21TM4110) says, "Turn on the lock switch once, and then switch it off after changing the set value." The message may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In the processes shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8 and 9-11, it is not possible to shift to the normal game process when the setting changing flag is set. Therefore, when the pachinko machine maker ships the pachinko machine 1 (before installation in the game hall), the setting changing flag is set in advance, and then the game hall side goes through the setting change mode. Unless the set value is changed and the setting change mode is terminated, the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be played. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game hall, it is possible to ensure that the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the setting change mode to perform the setting change operation and take measures to determine the set value.

(Set value storage control when the power is cut off while changing the set value)
Next, the set value storage control when a power failure occurs while changing the set value will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-12. In the example shown in FIG. 9-7, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area is changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode.

First, regarding the control when the power is cut off before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the end of the setting change mode) by the operation of changing the set value during the setting change mode, FIG. This will be described using -12 (1).

As shown in order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled.
In this example, when the power is turned on, the set value is set to "0" in the set value storage area of the RAM 102.
"Is stored. Next, as shown in order 2, the set value "0" stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read as the setting change mode is started, and the read set value is set to 1. "1" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in order 3, in the setting change mode, the first setting changeover switch (
Clear switch) Based on the operation of 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed from "0" to "1", and 1 is added to the changed setting value "2". Will be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. Lock switch 21TM05 at this point
1 remains in the ON state. Further, as shown in order 4, in the setting change mode, 2
Based on the operation of the second setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed from "1" to "2", and the changed setting value is 1. "3" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in order 5, it is assumed that the power supply is cut off while the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON in the setting change mode, that is, before the operation for ending the setting change mode is performed. At this time, the set value "2" is stored in the set value storage area after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is performed.
In the power off state, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is retained as it is.

Next, as shown in order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled. When the power is turned on, "2" is set as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102.
Is stored. This set value "2" is a value stored in the set value storage area when the power is cut off during the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 7, the RAM 102 is associated with the start of the setting change mode.
The set value "2" stored in the set value storage area of is read, and "3" obtained by adding 1 to the read set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Since the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on in order 6, when the control shown in FIG. 9-11 described above is applied, even if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (or cleared). Even if the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), it will be automatically controlled to the setting change mode. Therefore, the state of the lock switch 21TM051 in the order 6 and the order 7 may be an OFF state.

In this way, the set value is changed in the setting change mode, and the lock switch 21TM0
If a power failure occurs without turning 51 off (without terminating the setting change mode), the changed setting value in the previous setting change mode is retained in the setting value storage area when the power is restored. It is in a state of being. Therefore, when the power is restored, the set value that has already been planned may be set. In this case, the clerk at the amusement park terminates the setting change mode without performing an operation to change the set value again. Since the game machine may be shifted to the normal game processing, the workability can be improved.

Next, regarding the control when the power is cut off after the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode ends) by performing the operation of changing the set value during the setting change mode. This will be described with reference to FIG. 9-12 (2).

The order 1 to order 4 are the same as the example shown in FIG. 9-12 (1), and the description thereof will be omitted. Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051
The setting change mode ends when is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. As a result, the set value "2" after the operation of the second setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is performed is fixed as the final set value. At this time, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area, and "3" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 by adding 1 to the confirmed set value.

After that, as shown in order 6, it is assumed that the operation of turning off the power switch 21TM055 is performed and the power supply is stopped. In this power off state, R
The setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of AM102.
Will be retained as it is.

Next, as shown in order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled. When the power is turned on, "2" is set as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102.
Is stored. This setting value "2" is a value finally stored in the setting value storage area at the end of the previous setting change mode.

Then, as shown in order 8, the RAM 102 is associated with the start of the setting change mode.
The set value "2" stored in the set value storage area of is read, and "3" obtained by adding 1 to the read set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

As shown in FIGS. 9-12 (1) and 9-12, when the power supply is cut off while the setting change mode is controlled, and when the power supply is stopped after the setting change mode control is completed. In either case, when the power is restored, the set value after being changed according to the setting change operation in the previous setting change mode, that is, the set value stored in the set value storage area immediately before the power is turned off, is , It is a valid setting value (setting value stored in the setting storage area when the power is restored).

The memory control of the set value shown in FIG. 9-12 is not limited. That is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area when controlled in the setting change mode is copied to the setting information temporary storage area, and the setting changeover switch (clear switch) is used when the setting change mode is controlled. 21
When TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value in the setting value storage area, and the setting change mode is terminated (lock switch 21TM051 is turned on). Based on the operation of switching from the state to the OFF state), the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored (overwritten) in the setting value storage area to confirm the setting value. You may. In this case, the display monitor 21TM029
The setting value to be displayed in is the value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0 to 5) stored in the setting information temporary storage area, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is The set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 also changes according to the change.

With such a configuration, it is controlled to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, and even when the setting change operation is performed (when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed), the setting is made. Without completing the operation to end the change mode (lock switch 21TM0
If the power is cut off (without the 51 being switched to the OFF state), the RAM 10
The set value stored in the set value storage area of 2 has not been changed since the power was turned on (before the setting change operation was performed in the setting change mode). That is, in the power supply stop state, the set value stored in the set value storage area at the time of the previous power-on is still held. Therefore, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is
The value corresponds to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on last time.

In this way, the set value when the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode can be appropriately set. Further, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode is not ended, the change of the setting value can be restricted.

For the control related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode shown in the above embodiment, a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, and the jackpot probability differs depending on the setting values. It is applicable, but not limited to this, although a plurality of set values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is common regardless of the set values (for example, for all of the set values 0 to 5). It can also be applied to a game machine (with a jackpot probability of 1/300).

Further, the present feature section 21TM discloses the following inventions.

As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine has been proposed in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board. Regarding a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when it is necessary for an external device to grasp the control state related to the setting when changing the setting value or the like. However, even if the signal output technique of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-500206 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp this. is there. The invention according to the means O1 to the means O4 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of appropriately notifying the outside of the game machine of a control state related to the setting.

The gaming machine of the means O1 is a gaming machine (pachinko) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for big hit determination is different). In the game machine 1), the setting value can be confirmed with the setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed. Setting confirmation mode control means (step S21TM4530 to step S21TM) that can be controlled to various setting confirmation modes.
A game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing 4570 and step S21TM4650, and a specific signal output means for outputting a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. (Step S21TM45
A game control microcomputer 100 that outputs a security signal at 60) and a setting means (a game control micro that sets a value of a security signal timer) for setting a value (value of a security signal timer) related to a period during which a specific signal is output. The computer 100) is provided, and the setting means can set a common predetermined value between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled (security signal timer in step S21TM4710). 1 second is set as the value of), and the specific signal output means corresponds to the end of control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, until at least a period corresponding to the predetermined value elapses. Output a specific signal (The security signal is continuously output until 1 second elapses from the end of the setting confirmation mode when the setting confirmation mode ends, and 30 seconds from the end of the setting change mode when the setting change mode ends. It is characterized by continuously outputting a security signal until it elapses. According to this, the state of the gaming machine related to the setting can be appropriately notified to the external device.

The gaming machine of the means O2 is a gaming machine of the means O1 and is an initialization means for initializing the gaming state (
A game control microcomputer 100) that executes RAM clear (step S21TM1410) based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is set in step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150 is provided, and the initialization means accompanies the control of the setting change mode. After initializing the game state (when controlled to the setting change mode, RAM clear is executed after being controlled to the setting change mode), the setting means sets the predetermined value (in step S21TM4710). After setting 1 second as the value of the security signal timer), it is possible to set a specific value corresponding to a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value (when RAM clear is executed, security is performed in step S21TM1465). 30 seconds can be set as the value of the signal timer), and the specific signal output means outputs the specific signal until the period corresponding to the specific value elapses in response to the end of the control of the setting change mode. (The security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds have passed from the end of the setting change mode with the end of the setting change mode). According to this, a specific signal is output at least for a period corresponding to a predetermined value in both cases when the control of the setting change mode is finished and when the control of the setting confirmation mode is finished, and the setting is changed. When controlled to the mode, a specific signal will be output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value.
It is possible to set different output periods in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode while standardizing the setting processing by the setting means.

The gaming machine of the means O3 is a gaming machine of the means O1 or the means O2, and in the setting changing mode, a specific operation for ending the setting changing mode (step S21TM4680).
Specific information storage means (backup of RAM 102) that stores specific information (setting changing flag) when the power supply to the game machine is stopped without performing (detection that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off) is performed. In the area, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the setting changing flag in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 based on the end of the setting change mode. ) Is provided, and when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started (the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration). (When it is determined), the game is stopped and a specific signal is output (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 based on the fact that the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied.
It is characterized in that it is possible to repeatedly execute the above process until the power is turned off. According to this, when the power supply is stopped during the control of the setting change mode, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified to the external device when the power supply is restarted.

The game machine of the means O4 is any game machine selected from the means O1 to the means O3, and is a game control means for controlling the progress of the game (a game control microcomputer that executes a game control timer interrupt process). 100) and the effect control means (CPU 1 for effect control) that controls the execution of the effect.
20), and the game control means includes a display means (display monitor 21TM029) and the setting change mode control means (step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620).
In the game control microcomputer 100) that executes the process of (step S) and the setting change mode, no specific operation for terminating the setting change mode is performed (step S).
Specific information storage means for storing specific information when the power supply to the game machine is stopped (without detecting the operation in which the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off by 21TM4680)
For game control in the backup area of the RAM 102, the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting changing flag is cleared in step S21TM4720 based on the end of the setting change mode. When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started (step S2 at the time of power restoration).
(When it is determined in 1TM4030 that the setting changing flag is set), it is possible to execute the error notification in the display means and send an error command to the effect control means (set value in step S21TM4190). An abnormal error command is transmitted, and "E" is sent to the display monitor 21TM029 in the error display of step S21TM4210.
(It is possible to display the characters), and the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 of prompting an operation for changing the set value in response to receiving the error command.
After the power is turned off, turn the power on again to shift to the setting change mode. "Is displayed. According to this, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified to the clerk of the game hall, and the operation for changing the set value can be urged.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. The inventions according to the means P1 to the means P4 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and provide a gaming machine that appropriately notifies the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. To provide.

The gaming machine of the means P1 is a gaming machine (pachinko) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for big hit determination is different). In the game machine 1), the setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed, and the setting change mode. Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can be identified as controlled (setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the step is based on the end of the setting change mode. The game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag in S21TM4720, and the specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the game machine is stopped ( The value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102), and when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (power restoration). When it is determined in step S21TM4030 of the time that the setting changing flag is set), an error notification means capable of executing error notification (when the transition condition to the setting change mode is not satisfied, an error occurs in step S21TM4210). It is characterized by further including a game control microcomputer 100) for displaying. According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified.

The game machine of the means P2 is the game machine of the means P1, and the setting change mode control means satisfies the setting change condition (when the power is turned on, the game machine frame 3 is in an open state. ,
The lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state), so that the setting change mode can be controlled, and the power supply to the game machine is started. In this case, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (when it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set), the setting change condition is satisfied. Based on the above, it is possible to control the setting change mode without executing the error notification (step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, step S21TM at the time of turning on the power).
Based on the fact that all the results are determined to be YES in 4140, the mode shifts to the setting change mode without shifting to the loop processing of steps S21TM420 to step S21TM4220).
It is characterized by that. According to this, when the condition to be controlled in the setting change mode is satisfied, the setting change mode is controlled without executing the error notification, and the setting value is appropriately set while avoiding unnecessary error notification. You can encourage changes.

The game machine of the means P3 is a game machine of the means P1 or the means P2, and when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started (power supply). When it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of restoration that the setting changing flag is set), the error notification can be executed and the game can be stopped (when the power is turned on, the setting change mode is entered. If the migration condition is not satisfied (step S2)
If NO is determined in any of 1TM4120 to S21TM4140),
Step S21TM4200-Step S21TM4 without shifting to the setting change mode
It shifts to 220 loop processing). According to this, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in a state where the set value is unstable, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

The game machine of the means P4 is any game machine selected from the means P1 to the means P3, and is a game control means for controlling the progress of the game (a game control microcomputer that executes a game control timer interrupt process). 100) and the effect control means (CPU 1 for effect control) that controls the execution of the effect.
20), and the game control means includes a display means (display monitor 21TM029) and
The setting change mode control means (step S21TM4530 to step S21TM46)
It has a game control microcomputer 100) that executes the processes of 20 and the specific information storage means, and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when power supply to the game machine is started. When it is set (when it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set), the display means executes the error notification and sends an error command to the effect control means. It is possible to (
The setting value error error command is transmitted in step S21TM4190, and step S21TM
It is possible to display the character "E" on the display monitor 21TM029 in the error display of 4210), and the effect control means performs an operation for changing the set value in response to receiving the error command. It is characterized in that it gives a prompting notification (displays a message on the image display device 5 "Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode"). According to this, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified to the clerk of the game hall, and at the same time,
It is possible to prompt an operation for changing the set value.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine as described in JP-A-2010-201002 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. The inventions according to the means Q1 to the means Q5 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and provide a game machine that appropriately determines the state of the game machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. To do.

The gaming machine of means Q1 is a gaming machine (pachinko) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for big hit determination is different). In the game machine 1), the setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed, and the setting change mode. Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can be identified as controlled (setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the step is based on the end of the setting change mode. The game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag in S21TM4720, and the specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the game machine is stopped ( The value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102), and the setting changing mode control means is
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), the setting change mode is controlled (when the power is turned on, the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON. Regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change mode of being in the state is satisfied, the setting change mode is automatically controlled). According to this, the state of the game machine can be appropriately determined when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode accompanied by the initialization of the game state. It should be noted that the gaming machine of means Q1 initializes the gaming state in response to the control of the setting change mode (for example, RAM in step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150).
RAM clear based on the clear flag set (step S21TM14
A game control microcomputer 100) that executes 10) may be further provided.

The game machine of the means Q2 is the game machine of the means Q1, and the setting change mode control means stores the specific information in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started. If not, the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied (when the setting change flag is not set when the power is turned on (step S2).
1TM4030 NO), the game machine frame 3 is open, and the lock switch 21TM0
51 is in the ON state and the RAM clear flag is 1 (Because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 was in the ON state, RA after the setting change mode ends.
(M clear is executed)), the setting change mode is started based on the condition for shifting to the setting change mode), and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means. Is controlled to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied (when the setting changing flag is set at the time of turning on the power (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting change mode Regardless of whether or not the conditions for shifting to are satisfied, the setting change mode is automatically controlled). According to this, when the power is cut off during the setting change mode control, the setting change mode is set even when the setting change condition is not satisfied based on the specific information stored at the time of power restoration. Since it will be controlled, workability can be improved.

The game machine of means Q3 is a game machine of means Q1 or means Q2, and the setting change mode control means is a transition operation when power supply to the game machine is started (setting is being changed when the power is turned on). When the flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and
The condition for shifting to the setting change mode that the RAM clear flag is 1 (RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode ends because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state) is satisfied. It was confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 was turned off in the specific operation (step S21TM4680) when the setting change mode was controlled based on the setting change mode. It is possible to terminate the setting change mode based on the above, and the specific information storage means stores the specific information when controlled by the setting change mode (control of the setting change mode is started). The setting changing flag is set at the timing of step S21TM4580), and the specific information is deleted when the setting change mode ends based on the specific operation (at the timing of step S21TM4720 when the control of the setting change mode ends). (Clearing the setting changing flag), the setting change mode control means performs the transition operation when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started. Regardless of whether or not it has been performed, the setting change mode is controlled (if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YE in step S21TM4030).
(S), regardless of whether or not the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied, the setting change mode is automatically controlled), and the setting change mode is terminated based on the specific operation (step S21TM4680). The setting change mode is terminated based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off). According to this, the conditions for terminating the control of the setting change mode can be appropriately determined.

The game machine of the means Q4 is any game machine selected from the means Q1 to the means Q3, and is a set value for storing a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different). It is provided with a storage means (a set value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the set value is stored), and is controlled according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (big hit determination process in special symbol process processing, etc.).
Is possible, and the set value stored in the set value storage means is changed based on the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled (the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is changed in step S21TM4610. When it is operated, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed), and the setting change mode control means is based on the specific operation when the setting change mode is controlled. (Step S2)
(The setting change mode is terminated based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in 1TM4680), and the setting value storage means performs the specific operation when controlled to the setting change mode. When the power supply to the game machine is stopped without being interrupted, the set value after being changed by the change operation in the setting change mode is continuously stored (the setting value storage area is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102). It is formed, and when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area is changed, so that the power supply is performed during the setting change mode. Even if a disconnection occurs, the set value after being changed by the change operation is retained). According to this, when the power supply is restarted, the set value after being changed by the change operation in the setting change mode before the power failure occurs is stored in the set value storage means, and the set value corresponds to the set value. Workability can be improved because control is executed.

The gaming machine of the means Q5 is any of the gaming machines selected from the means Q1 to the means Q3, and is a set value that stores a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different). It is provided with a storage means (a set value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the set value is stored), and is controlled according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (big hit determination process in special symbol process processing, etc.).
The setting change mode control means can perform the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled and (the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21 in the setting change mode).
When TM052 is operated, only the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed instead of the setting value stored in the setting value storage area), and based on the specific operation after the change operation. The setting value stored in the setting value storage means is changed and the setting change mode is terminated (based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode, the setting information is temporarily set at that time. The setting value stored in the storage area is stored in the setting value storage area and confirmed as a valid setting value, and the setting change mode is terminated), and the setting value storage means is controlled to the setting change mode. In this case, when the power supply to the game machine is stopped without performing the specific operation, the setting value before the change operation is performed in the setting change mode is stored (setting switching during the setting change mode). Lock switch 21TM051 even when the switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated
If is not switched to OFF, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area is not changed, so if a power failure occurs during the setting change mode, the setting value before being controlled to the setting change mode is retained. It is characterized by being). According to this, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode is not ended, the change of the setting value can be restricted.

(Explanation of feature part 052IW)
Next, the feature unit 052IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the feature unit 052IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the feature unit 052IW includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state, and in this feature unit 052IW, the gaming state is set to a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). When it is controlled, when it is controlled to the first KT state (low probability / first KT state) with low probability, and when it is controlled to the first KT state (high probability / first KT state) with high probability. , High probability and may be controlled to the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

In the first KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, small hits are likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in the open state, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long, and small hits are made. Even if this occurs, there are very few cases where a game ball wins a special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and is controlled to a high base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B becomes long. Further, in the second KT state of the KT state, as will be described later, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is moved to the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Easy to win. Specifically, the second K
In the T state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and is controlled to a low base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened.

In addition, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in this feature unit 052IW, the variable winning ball device 6
The probability that B will be in the open state is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. Then, while the ratio of small hits is low when the first special symbol changes, the ratio of small hits is high when the second special symbol changes (however, it will be described later). (Except in the case of forced loss), the KT state is set to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated by mainly changing the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player.

The configuration for setting the KT state to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state is the same as in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes. By configuring the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to a certain time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state, and the KT state is set to the normal state. It may be in a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur.

Further, the feature unit 052IW is configured so that the time required from the game ball passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation position of the passing gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the nail group forming the flow path of the game ball. Although details will be described later, the feature unit 052IW has a configuration in which the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to the open state based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41, and the game ball passes in the first KT state described later. The time from passing through the gate 41 until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passing gate 41. Since it is shorter than 0.6 seconds, which is the time required for the game to be played, when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state when one game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the first KT state, the one The game ball can be directly entered into the variable winning ball device 6B.

(Special variable winning ball device)
FIG. 10-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the special variable winning ball device 7 in the feature unit 052IW. As shown in FIG. 10-1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a plate-shaped bottom member 052IW108 formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows, and the bottom surface member 052IW108 is provided in the jackpot game state. Bottom member 0 from the closed state moved forward toward the front
By moving the 52IW108 backward, the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won a prize in the large winning opening is detected by the first count switch 23.

In this feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-1, the game ball that has won a prize in the large winning opening is
Further, it is guided to the guidance path 052IW100 provided on the right side of the special variable winning ball device 7.
The guidance path 052IW100 is further branched into two paths 052IW102,103, and the game ball guided to the guidance path 052IW100 is guided to the left side path 052IW102 or the right side path 052IW103. When guided to the left path 052IW102, the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 and is detected by the V region switch 052IW106. When guided to the right path 052IW103, the game ball is discharged area 052IW1
It enters 05 and is detected by the discharge area switch 052IW107.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, the V region opening / closing plate 0 is located near the entrance of the left side path 052IW102.
When 52IW101 is provided and the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is in the open state, the game ball guided by the guidance path 052IW100 enters the left side path 052IW102 and V.
It is possible to enter the area 052IW104. Further, when the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is in the closed state, the game ball guided to the guidance path 052IW100 is on the right path 052IW10.
It enters 3 and is discharged from the discharge area 052IW105 to the back side of the game area.

The V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is controlled from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 052IW109 by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103).

Further, in the present feature unit 052IW, when controlled by the big hit game, the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, and on the condition that it is detected by the V area switch 052IW106, after the big hit game is completed. It is controlled to a probabilistic state.

The total number of game balls detected by the V area switch 052IW106 and the number of game balls detected by the discharge area switch 052IW107 during one round matches the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. It should be. Therefore, the total number of the number of game balls detected by the V area switch 052IW106 and the number of game balls detected by the discharge area switch 052IW107 in one round is the first count switch 23.
If the number of game balls does not match the number of game balls detected by, it may be determined that a large winning opening / discharge mismatch error is made, and the error may be notified. In this case, since it takes some time for the winning game ball to reach the V region 052IW104 and the discharge region 052IW105 immediately before the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state. If the number of game balls does not match by the time when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, it may be configured to determine a large winning opening entry / discharge mismatch error.

(Control board configuration)
FIG. 10-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like in the feature unit 052IW.
In this feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-2, the switch circuit 110 includes a gate switch 21 and a start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B).
), Count switch (1st count switch 23 and 2nd count switch 24))
In addition to the detection signal from, V region switch 052IW106 and discharge region switch 05
2 The detection signal from the IW107 is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

Further, in the feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-2, the solenoid circuit 111 is
Solenoid drive signals from the game control microcomputer 100 are added to the solenoid 81 for ordinary electric accessories, the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening, and the solenoid for the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101. It is transmitted to 052IW109.

(Big hit probability, small hit probability)
10-3 and 10-4 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 10-3 shows the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. Further, FIG. 10-4 shows the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. In addition, FIG. 10-3
And, as shown in FIG. 10-4, in this example, the case where the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values “1” to “6” is shown. In addition, not only when the setting can be changed in 6 steps
For example, the setting may be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or the setting may be changed in 7 or more steps.

First, the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 10-3. In the example shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), in the non-probability state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the case of the set value "6" is the jackpot probability "
It is the highest at 247/65536, which is the most advantageous setting for the player. Also,
In the example shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the overall jackpot winning probability is 10 times higher than in the non-probability state (low probability state), and the set value " The case of "1" is the lowest with the jackpot probability "2050/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the case of the set value "6" is the jackpot probability "2470/65536". high,
This is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, regarding small hits, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 (A) and 10-3 (B), the set values "1" to
The small hit probability is "6298/65536" regardless of which of "6" is, and whether it is a non-probability state (low probability state) or a probability change state (high probability state). It is constant. That is, in this example, the determination value for small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is common to the non-probability change state and the probability change state. Even in the case where the jackpot probability is different depending on the set value while the small hit probability is constant in this way, FIG. 10-3 (A),
As shown in (B), the number of determination values for each set value may be matched by making the probability of loss different between the set values "1" to "6".

Next, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-4. In the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), in the non-probability state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the case of the set value "6" is the jackpot probability "
It is the highest at 247/65536, which is the most advantageous setting for the player. Also,
In the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the overall jackpot winning probability is 10 times higher than in the non-probability state (low probability state), and the set value " The case of "1" is the lowest with the jackpot probability "2050/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the case of the set value "6" is the jackpot probability "2470/65536". high,
This is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, regarding small hits, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 (A) and 10-4 (B), the set values "1" to
Regardless of which of "6", and regardless of whether it is a non-probability state (low probability state) or a probabilistic state (high probability state), the small hit probability is "62986/65536". It is constant. That is, in this example, the judgment value for small hit judgment is common regardless of the set value.
Moreover, it is common to the non-probable state and the probable state. However, in this example, in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol (see FIG. 10-4), the small hit is compared with the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 10-3). The winning probability is about 10 times (that is, the number of judgment values for small hit determination when executing the variable display of the second special symbol is the small hit when executing the variable display of the first special symbol. More than the number of judgment values for judgment). Even in the case where the jackpot probability is different depending on the set value while the small hit probability is constant in this way, FIG.
As shown in -4 (A) and -4 (B), the number of determination values for each set value may be matched by making the deviation probabilities different between the set values "1" to "6".

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, the determination values corresponding to the deviations are included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values "1" to "6" (FIG. 10). -3 and Figure 10
As shown in -4, there is no set value at which the probability of loss is 0). Then, the determination value corresponding to the deviation differs depending on the set value (as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, depending on which of the set values "1" to "6". , The probability of loss is different).

Not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, when the probability of loss is 0 (that is,
It may be configured so that there is a set value) that does not include the determination value corresponding to the deviation. For example, at the set value "6" having the highest advantage (highest jackpot probability), the loss probability may be 0, and the determination value corresponding to the loss may not be included.

Further, not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, when the small hit probability becomes 0 (that is, when
It may be configured so that there is a determination value) that does not include the determination value corresponding to the small hit. For example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol (FIG. 10-3), the small hit probability may be uniformly set to 0 so that the judgment value for the small hit is not included. Good.

In addition, in FIG. 10-3 (A), (B) and FIGS. 10-4 (A), (B), the small hit probability is the same between the probabilistic state (high probability state) and the non-probability state (low probability state). Although the off-probability is different, in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the jackpot probability is higher than that in the non-probability state (low probability state), so the small hit probability is higher than in the non-probability state (low probability state). It may be lowered to match the probability of loss. Further, even if the set values are different in, for example, "1" and "2", the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched respectively. As a result, in a game machine in which the number of stages that can be substantially set is less than 6 or a game machine in which there is no difference in advantage due to the setting change function, a type of game machine having a setting change function in 6 stages and a hardware / software configuration. Can be standardized and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

(Big hit type judgment table)
10-5 (A) and 10-5 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is set to "2R normal jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot" based on the random number for hit type determination. "6R normal jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", or "1"
It is a table referred to for determining one of "0R probability variation jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), in the feature unit 052IW, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6", 9% chance of being determined as "10R probability variation jackpot", 56% probability of being determined as "6R probability variation jackpot", 35
It is determined as "6R normal jackpot" with a probability of%. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (B), in the feature unit 052IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6". Is determined to be a "10R probability variation jackpot" with a 10% probability,
There is a 50% chance that it will be a "6R probability variation jackpot", a 5% chance that it will be a "2R probability variation jackpot", and a 35% chance that it will be a "2R normal jackpot".

The "10R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 10 rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. In addition, "6R probability change jackpot" is
It is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state of 6 rounds and shifts to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state. Further, the "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends.

The "6R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, the "2R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and is controlled to a low probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

In this feature unit 052IW, "10R probability variation jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", and "6
In the case of "R normal jackpot", a jackpot is won until a predetermined period (30 seconds in this example) elapses in each round of the jackpot game or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are won. The mouth is controlled to be open, and a maximum of 10 large winning mouths can be won in each round. On the other hand, in the case of "2R probability variation big hit" and "2R normal big hit", the big winning opening is controlled to be open only for a short period (1.8 seconds in this example) in each round of the big hit game. The number of winnings to the large winning openings that can be won in each round is about 2 to 3.

Further, in this feature unit 052IW, when the big hit game is finished, it is controlled to either the first KT state, the second KT state, or the non-KT state according to the game state before the big hit game and the big hit type. The method of transitioning the game state after the big hit game will be described later (see FIG. 10-29).

(Small hit type judgment table)
10-6 (A) and 10-6 (B) are explanatory views showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol, the small hit type is set to "small hit A" based on the random number for determining the hit type.
, "Small hit B", or "Small hit C" is a table referenced to determine.

As shown in FIG. 10-6 (A), in the feature unit 052IW, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6", It is determined as "small hit A" with a 100% probability. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (B), this feature portion 05
In 2IW, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, it is determined as "small hit B" with a probability of 70%, and 30 It is determined as "small hit C" with a probability of%.

In this example, as will be described later, in the case of "small hit A", the special winning opening is opened only for an extremely short 0.2 seconds during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-12), and the small hit game. You can hardly expect a game ball to win a special prize inside. In the case of "small hit B", the special winning opening is opened for 0.8 seconds during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-13), and the game ball wins the special winning opening during the small hit game. Can be expected to some extent. In the case of "small hit C", the special winning opening is opened for 1.8 seconds during the small hit game (see Fig. 10-14), and the game ball wins the special winning opening during the small hit game. Can be expected most.

(Variation pattern table)
10-7 to 10-9 are explanatory views showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in the feature portion 052IW. EX shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9
T is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9, nine types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 09 for the first special symbol and decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and decorative symbol. 34 types of # 01 to # 34 are used. Hereinafter, for example, the fluctuation pattern #n (n)
= 01 to 09 or 01 to 34) means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

When executing the variation display of the first special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the first special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 10-7 (A). The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 06.

When executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability /
In the case of the first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the variation pattern table for the first special symbol for KT shown in FIG. 10-7 (B) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. Figure 1
As shown in 0-7 (B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 07 to # 09.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, when it is in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the second special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 10-8 (C) The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 03. Specifically, when it is determined to be out of alignment, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also,
The second variation pattern # 02 is also determined when it is determined to be a small hit, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when the jackpot is determined, the second variation pattern # 03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 5 minutes.

In this feature unit 052IW, even in the non-KT state, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is made, a situation occurs in which a certain amount of prize balls can be expected by winning a game ball to the special prize opening. Will end up. Therefore, in this feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), even if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the fluctuation time is made extremely long and the execution frequency of the fluctuation display is executed. By reducing the number of small hits, the frequency of small hits is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which a small hit is aimed at winning a prize ball even in a non-KT state. In the feature unit 052IW, the "small hit occurrence frequency" is, for example, the small hit occurrence rate per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example,
The rate of small hits per unit time is higher than in the normal state.

In this feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time even if it is a big hit. 5
By making it relatively long, it is possible to prevent the act of aiming for the prize ball by unreasonably winning a prize in the special winning opening during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the digestion of the first reserved memory as compared with the case of a small hit, so the fluctuation time is configured to be shorter than in the case of a small hit. There is.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. in this case,
When executing the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation, the low probability shown in FIG. 10-8 (D) / the first KT
The second special symbol variation pattern table for the first variation is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 04 to # 06. Will be decided.

As shown in FIG. 10-8 (D), when it is determined that the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state is out of order, the second fluctuation pattern # 04 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds is used. It is determined. In addition, when it is determined that a small hit is the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 05 (opening of the second start winning opening), which is a relatively long fluctuation time of 7 seconds as a small hit. It is determined by the fluctuation pattern for preparation). In this feature unit 052IW, as already described, when controlled to the first KT state, the frequency of small hits increases, but by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning is actually achieved. The special winning opening in the ball device 17 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball is immediately available. If the device 17 is controlled in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win the special winning opening. Therefore, in this feature unit 052IW, by securing a fluctuation time of at least 7 seconds in the first fluctuation of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 can be used even before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 17 to the open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member fall, it is possible to win a prize in the special winning opening. It prevents a situation in which a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the 1KT state. Further, when the big hit is determined as the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 06 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 minutes.

Further, if the fluctuation display of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed, FIG.
The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / 1st KT and the 2nd to 49th fluctuations shown in -8 (E) is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (E), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation patterns # 07 to # 13 It is decided to be either. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (E), when it is determined that the second to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state are out of order,
The second fluctuation pattern # 07 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds and the second fluctuation pattern # 08 of the shortened fluctuation with a shorter fluctuation time of 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, low probability / 1st K
When it is determined that the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the T state are out of alignment, the second fluctuation pattern # 09 with reach may be determined. Further, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, the second fluctuation pattern # 10 of the shortened fluctuation, and the fluctuation time is as short as 1 second. The second fluctuation pattern # 11 of the shortened fluctuation may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined as a small hit as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state,
The second variation pattern # 12 with reach may be determined. Second fluctuation pattern # 07
, # 10 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold memory is not stored.
The second fluctuation patterns # 08 and # 11 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when one or more second reserved storages are stored. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased. Further, when the jackpot is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 13 with reach is determined.

In addition, the 50th variation display (that is, the final variation in the low probability / 1st KT state) is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed. If this is the case, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 50th variation shown in FIG. 10-8 (F) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), the second is the 50th variation in the low probability / first KT state.
When the variation display of the special symbol is executed, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 14 to # 16.

In the feature unit 052IW, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, for example, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as “during chance time”. Figure 10-
As shown in 8 (F), when it is determined that the 50th variation in the low probability / 1st KT state is a miss or a small hit, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "chance time is over !!" It is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 14 or the second fluctuation pattern # 15 accompanied by the display. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), when a big hit is determined as the 50th variation of the low probability / first KT state, a character display such as "chance time ends !!" is displayed on the image display device 5. The second variation pattern # 16 is determined with a predetermined revival display after the end display to be performed.

In addition, in this feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-7, when a big hit is made in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first fluctuation pattern # 07 having a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is displayed. It is configured to determine. This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is set to a long fluctuation time, Since the change of the second special symbol executed during the big hit change of the first special symbol is configured to be a forced loss, the forced loss occurs frequently even in the second KT state, and the player makes a small hit. You will not be able to receive any profit from this.
Therefore, in this feature unit 052IW, by setting the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol to a short fluctuation time, it is possible to shift to the jackpot gaming state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol before the forced loss occurs frequently. It is configured.

In addition, unlike the present feature unit 052IW, even if the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is not forcibly missed (for example, the first). If the game machine has a configuration in which the second special symbol is forcibly removed when the second special symbol is changing when the special symbol jackpot symbol is stopped), the fluctuation time of the jackpot of the first special symbol in the KT state May be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a jackpot occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot is set to the same short fluctuation time as the outlier, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from small hits. Therefore, if the fluctuation time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, a sufficient time that a small hit can occur at least a plurality of times. (For example, 1 minute) is configured to be secured.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / first KT state, the variation after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is completed. Select the variation pattern table according to the number of times. In this case, if the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation is to be executed, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 10-9 (G) is selected and fluctuates. The pattern is determined. Figure 10-
As shown in 9 (G), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first fluctuation in the high probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second fluctuation patterns # 17 to # 21. To.

As in the case of the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (G), the fluctuation time is also determined to be out of the first fluctuation in the high probability / first KT state. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 17 of the shortened fluctuation as short as 5 seconds. On the other hand, high probability / 1st KT
Second fluctuation pattern # 18 with reach even when it is determined that the first fluctuation of the state is out of order.
May be decided. Further, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the variation pattern for preparing to open the second starting winning opening (second variation pattern # 19) may be determined. On the other hand, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 20 with reach may be determined. In addition, FIG.
As shown in -9 (G), when the jackpot is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 21 with reach is determined.

Further, in the case of executing the variation display after the second variation after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is completed, the high shown in FIG. 10-9 (H). Probability / The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the first KT and the second and subsequent fluctuations is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (H), 2 in the high probability / first KT state
When the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed after the fluctuation, the second fluctuation pattern # 2
It is determined to be one of 2 to # 28.

As in the case of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / 1st KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (H), when it is determined that the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / 1st KT state are out of order, as shown in FIG. The second fluctuation pattern # 22 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds or the second fluctuation pattern # 23 of the shortened fluctuation with a shorter fluctuation time of 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, high probability / 1st KT state 2
When it is determined that the variation is out of line after the variation, the second variation pattern # 24 with reach may be determined. Further, when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 25 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds and the fluctuation time of 1
It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 26, which is a shortened fluctuation shorter than seconds. On the other hand, when it is determined that a small hit is made after the second fluctuation in the high probability / first KT state, the second with reach.
Fluctuation pattern # 27 may be determined. The second variation patterns # 22 and # 25 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold memory is not stored, and the second variation patterns # 23 and # 26 store one or more second hold memories. It is a variation pattern that can be selected only when it is present. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased. Also,
When the jackpot is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 28 with reach is determined.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the case of high probability / second KT state, FIG.
The variation pattern table for the second special symbol for high probability / second KT shown in 0-9 (I) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation patterns # 29 to #
It is determined to be one of 34.

As shown in FIG. 10-9 (I), when the deviation is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 29 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is determined. In some cases, the fluctuation time is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 30 of the normal fluctuation of 5 seconds.
On the other hand, when it is determined to be out of the high probability / second KT state, it may be determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 31 with reach. Further, when the small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the fluctuation time is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 32 of the shortened fluctuation as short as 1.5 seconds, or the fluctuation time is usually 5 seconds. The second fluctuation pattern # 33 of the fluctuation may be determined. Further, when the jackpot is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 34 with reach is determined.

When determining the variation pattern, more specifically, it depends on which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is to be executed, the current game state, and the variable display result. Using the fluctuation pattern table, lottery processing is performed based on the random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern.
Which fluctuation pattern is used is determined. FIG. 10-10 is for determining the fluctuation pattern when the variable display result is a small hit in the fluctuation pattern table for the second special symbol for high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 10-9 (I). It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table for small hits.

As shown in FIG. 10-10, in this feature unit 052IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the high probability / second KT state, and when the variation display which is a small hit is executed, the variation display is executed. , Regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the second fluctuation pattern # 32 is determined with a probability of 70%, and the second fluctuation pattern # 33 is determined with a probability of 30%. Therefore, in this example, in the case of the second KT state, there is a high probability that the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is selected.

In addition, in FIG. 10-10, as an example, a variation pattern table in the case of executing the small hit variation of the second special symbol during the high probability / second KT state is shown, but FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9 show. The other variation pattern tables shown are also configured in the same manner, and each variation pattern is determined with the same probability regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6".

In the examples shown in FIGS. 10-8 to 10-10, a shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the case of the first KT state, and a shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is performed with a high probability in the case of the second KT state. It shows the case where it is configured to be executed in, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second may be executed in the low probability state, and the shortening variation of 1.5 seconds may be executed in the high probability state.

(Opening pattern of special variable winning ball device 7)
Next, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 will be described. FIG. 10-11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7. First, FIG. 10-11 (
Using 1), the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 when controlled by a jackpot game based on a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, and a 2R probability variation jackpot (hereinafter, also simply referred to as "probability variation jackpot") will be described. To do. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), when the first round of the big hit game is started, the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is opened. Is controlled by. Then, if the game ball wins while the large winning opening is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23.

Further, in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), the first
When the winning of the second game ball to the big winning opening is detected in the round, the solenoid 052I
W109 is driven, V area opening / closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to be open, V area 052
A game ball can enter the IW104. Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings are detected in the large winning openings in the first round, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), special When the variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is controlled to be closed again and the large winning opening is controlled to be closed, the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is also controlled to be closed.

A game ball enters the V area 052IW104, and the V area switch 0 is within a predetermined detection valid period.
When detected by 52IW106, the game state is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the predetermined detection valid period is started at the timing when the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to the open state, and the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 It is the period from when the closed state is controlled again until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) elapses.

Next, using FIG. 10-11 (2), opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 when controlled by a jackpot game based on a 6R normal jackpot and a 2R normal jackpot (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “normal jackpot”). The pattern will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), when the first round of the big hit game is started, the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is opened. Is controlled by. Then, if the game ball wins while the large winning opening is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23.

Further, in the big hit game based on the normal big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), the first
When the winning of the first game ball to the big winning opening is detected in the round, the solenoid 052I
W109 is driven, and the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is used for an extremely short period (in this example, 0.
It is controlled to the open state (for 02 seconds). Then, in the first round, a predetermined period (for example, 29)
When (seconds) have passed or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings have been detected in the large winning openings, FIG. 10-
As shown in 11 (2), the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is controlled to be closed again.
The big winning opening is controlled to be closed.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), in the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot, the predetermined detection effective period is an extremely short opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 (0.02 in this example).
After (seconds), it is set as a period until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) elapses.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is long. Therefore, the V region 052 during the predetermined detection valid period.
The game ball easily enters the IW104, and it is easy to be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game is completed.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), in the big hit game based on the normal big hit, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is extremely short. Therefore, it is practically difficult for the game ball to enter the V region 052IW104 during the predetermined detection valid period, and it is extremely rare that the game ball is controlled to the probabilistic state after the end of the big hit game. Therefore, in this example, in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 at a higher rate during the jackpot game than in the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be described. 10-12 to 10-14 are explanatory views for explaining the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state. Of these, FIG. 10-12 shows the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit A. Further, FIG. 10-13 shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit B. Also,
FIG. 10-14 shows the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 1 in the case of a small hit C.
The opening pattern of 7 is shown. Further, FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1) show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state, respectively, and FIG. 10-12 (2) shows. 10-14 (2) show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state, respectively.

First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1). FIG. 10
As shown in -12 (1) to 10-14 (1), when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 displays the normal symbol. When the variable display is executed and it is determined that the normal symbol hits, the hit symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and when it is determined to be out of order, the missing symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. .. In this feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the hit symbol and the missed symbol are derived and displayed. The time is set to 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, FIG. 10-12
As shown in FIGS. 10-14 (1), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed and the time before the second start winning opening opening process has elapsed 0.1 seconds, the variable winning ball The device 6B is opened for 5.5 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, in the case of the small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-12 (1). , In the case of small hit B, FIG. 10-13
As shown in (1), when the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds and has a small hit C, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (1), the special variable winning ball Device 17 is 1
.. It is opened for 8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening (however, in the case of small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 opens only for 0.2 seconds, which is extremely short. You can hardly expect a prize). However, in the first KT state, FIG. 10-12 (1)
), While the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side is as short as 0.2 seconds, 0.8 seconds or 1.8 seconds, the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side The time is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), the next variable winning ball device 6B can be opened after the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is completed. After at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the fluctuation time of the next normal symbol of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time before opening the second start winning opening of 0.1 seconds, has elapsed. is there. Therefore, this feature portion 05
In the 2IW, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened.

Further, in the feature unit 052IW, in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. After 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening pre-opening processing time of 0.1 seconds, the game ball The time required from passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the state where the normal symbol is not changed until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. Since the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 to when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B is shorter than the time when the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is already open. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B when the state is controlled. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed is likely to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2). FIG. 10
As shown in -12 (2) to 10-14 (2), when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 displays the normal symbol. When the variable display is executed and it is determined that the normal symbol hits, the hit symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and when it is determined to be out of order, the missing symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. .. In this feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1.0 second, and the hit symbol and the missed symbol are derived and displayed. The time is set to 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, FIG. 10-12
As shown in (2) to 10-14 (2), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed and the time before the second start winning opening processing has elapsed 2.6 seconds, the variable winning ball The device 6B is opened for 0.2 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, in the case of the small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-12 (2). , In the case of small hit B, FIG. 10-13
As shown in (2), when the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds and has a small hit C, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (2), the special variable winning ball Device 17 is 1
.. It is opened for 8 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the special winning opening.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is as short as 0.2 seconds. Further, in the feature unit 052IW, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6
The interval period (closing period) after opening B is at least 3.8 seconds (normal symbol fluctuation time 1.0 seconds + symbol confirmation time 0.2 seconds + time before the second start winning opening opening process 2.6 seconds ) Is secured for a relatively long period of time. Therefore, in the second KT state, FIG. 10-12 (2)
As shown in FIG. 10-14 (2), since the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period) is long, the special variable winning on the downstream side is compared with the first KT state. It is easy for the game ball to enter the ball device 17, and the game ball is easy to win in the special winning opening. However,
In the case of the small hit A, since the special variable winning ball device 17 opens only for an extremely short 0.2 seconds, it is almost impossible to expect the game ball to win the special winning opening even in the second KT state.

In the second KT state, a game ball is easily won in the special winning opening and a prize ball is easily obtained. Therefore, in this example, it is also called "small hit RUSH", and in the second KT state, "small hit R".
A character display such as "USH" is displayed.

Further, in this example, the case where the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is different depending on which of the small hit types A to C is used is shown. I can't be limited. For example, the number of times the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened may be different depending on which of the small hits A to C is the small hit type. In this case, for example, in the case of small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened only once during the small hit game, whereas in the case of small hit B or small hit C, during the small hit game. The special variable winning ball device 17 may be configured to be opened 2 to 11 times. Further, for example, even if the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is short to some extent, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) can be opened by executing the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17 four times for 0.4 seconds. ) May be configured to provide a small hit type in which a game ball can win a prize to some extent, and various modes can be considered. Further, in this example, the small hit type is small hit A to
Although the case where there are three types of C is shown, the case is not limited to such a mode, and for example, four or more types of small hit types may be provided.

Further, in the present feature unit 052IW, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. After the lapse of 3.8 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1.0 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time of 2.6 seconds before opening the second start winning opening, the game ball The time required from passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state in the state where the normal symbol is not changed is longer. Since it is longer than the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 until the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B before being controlled by. Therefore, in the second KT state, it is difficult for the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

In addition, in this feature part 052IW, the variable display of a normal symbol is executed, and the variable winning ball device 6
The process of opening and controlling B is performed by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the game control microcomputer 100).
It is performed by executing the normal symbol process process (see step S26) by the CPU 103). Further, in the normal symbol process processing of step S26, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the game state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), and whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state, or a second KT state. Regardless of whether or not there is a big hit game state, it is determined whether or not to make a normal hit with the same probability (for example, 10% or 100%).

In this feature unit 052IW, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same for each of 0.2 seconds in the first KT state and the second KT state, and the time before the opening processing of the second start winning opening is the second. The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B is changed by shortening it to 0.1 seconds in the 1KT state and lengthening it to 2.6 seconds in the second KT state has been shown, but only in such a mode. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be different by making the fluctuation time and the symbol determination time different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after the variable winning ball device 6B is closed can be controlled, and the time after the second starting winning opening opening process differs between the first KT state and the second KT state. The closed period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be different depending on the setting. In particular, if the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state is configured to have a shorter closing period (interval period) by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress winning of the special winning opening in the first KT state. ..

As will be described later, in the feature unit 052IW, in the first KT state, by setting a high base flag indicating that the high base state is set, the high base state is controlled, so that FIGS. 10-12 (1) to FIGS. As shown in 10-14 (1), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be long. Further, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2) by controlling the low base state without setting the high base flag. It is controlled so that the time is shortened.

For example, a special flag (opening extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, FIG. 10-12 (1).
) ~ The variable winning ball device 6B as shown in FIG. 10-14 (1) is controlled by the first opening pattern (long opening) that is opened for a long time, and if the special flag is not set, FIG. 10-12 (2).
~ The variable winning ball device 6B shown in FIG. 10-14 (2) may be controlled by a second opening pattern (short opening) that opens for a short time. That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the special flag may not be set in other states including the big hit game state.

Further, even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be shortened when the final variation display in the low probability / first KT state is executed. For example, low probability / 1st KT
Of the 50 shortened fluctuation periods of the special symbol in the state, the above-mentioned special flag may be deleted in response to the 49th stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol. With such a configuration, low probability /
After the end of the first KT state, it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort when the variable winning ball device 6B is long open when the left-handed notification is given.

In addition, as described above, when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured by using the flag (special flag) for opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B, the flag for shortening the variation display of the special symbol is further used. The variation display of the special symbol may be controlled, and in this case, the special flag and the flag for shortening variation may be managed and controlled separately.

Further, the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be short-opened in the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to have a high opening probability in a low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. Then, it is possible not to win the variable winning ball device 6B, and the probability is low / non-KT.
It is possible to prevent a right-handed operation from being performed during the state.

In this feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed in the first KT state, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped and there is no hold memory of the normal symbol. This is because the device 6B is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the second special symbol aiming at the fluctuation stop timing (in the case of a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the passing gate By the time the game ball that has passed through 41 reaches the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, the variable winning ball device 6B does not open, and the special winning opening can be won). On the other hand, in this feature unit 052IW, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 6B. Is set to start, so that it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the variation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

(Direction control command)
10-15 and 10-16 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIG. 10-15, command 80
00 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H) are effect control commands for designating the variation pattern of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. (Fluctuating pattern command). The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, the effect control CPU
120 is a command 8000 (H) to 8009 (H), 8011 (H) to 8032 (H).
When any of the above is received, the image display device 5 is controlled to start the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is to be missed. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (10R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 10R probability variation jackpot. .. Command 9003 (H) displays the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command.
This is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation jackpot designation command)) for designating the R probability variation jackpot. The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R normal jackpot. .. Command 9005 (H) displays the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command by 2.
This is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation jackpot designation command)) for designating the R probability variation jackpot. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R normal jackpot. .. The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this feature unit 052IW, the game control microcomputer 1
Since 00 transmits the display result specification command immediately before the fluctuation pattern command, the display result specification command received by the effect control CPU 120 immediately before the first fluctuation pattern command is the first.
Since it can be determined that the display result specification command is for the special symbol, and the display result specification command received immediately before the second variation pattern command is the display result specification command for the second special symbol, the display result specification command can be determined. Can be used for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the display result specification command for the first special symbol and the display result specification command for the second special symbol may be separated.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 does not send a display result designation command, but corresponds to each of 10R probability variation jackpot / 6R probability variation jackpot / 6R normal jackpot / 2R probability variation jackpot / 2R normal jackpot / small hit / miss. The variation pattern command may be determined, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

The command 9C00 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) for designating that the right-handed display 26 has finished lighting. The command 9C01 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) for designating that the right-handed display 26 has started lighting.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

The command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped. The command A003 (H) is an effect control command (second forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped.

The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the jackpot game. B001 (H) is an effect control command that specifies the end of the jackpot game (
Jackpot end specification command: ending specification command). B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005
(H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during the opening of the big winning opening) that specifies the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. It should be noted that a command indicating the first reserved storage number may be transmitted as the first valid start winning prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved storage number may be transmitted as the second valid start winning prize designation command. Then, the first effective start prize designation command and the second valid start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

The command C801 (H) is an effect control command (gate passage designation command) for designating that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

The command D000 (H) is in the first customer waiting state (the first special symbol has not been changed, and the command D000 (H) has not been changed.
This is an effect control command (first customer waiting demo display designation command) that specifies that the first hold memory is not stored). Command D001 (H) is in the second customer waiting state (second).
This is an effect control command (second customer waiting demo display designation command) that specifies that the special symbol has not been changed and the second hold memory is not stored). The first customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. Further, the second customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / non-KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability / non-KT state. Command E001 (
H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / first) that specifies the background display when the game state is the high probability / first KT state.
KT background specification command). Command E003 (H) has a high probability of playing / 2nd K
This is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background specification command) for designating the background display in the T state.

The command E1XX (H) is an effect control command that specifies the currently set value (
Setting value command). A set value is set in "XX". For example, the set value "1"
When set to, the command E101 (H) is transmitted as a set value command. Further, for example, when the set value is set to "6", the command E106 (H) is transmitted as the set value command.

The effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 is a game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11.
When the above-mentioned effect control command is received from, the display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 10-15 and 10-16, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the voice control board 13 is changed. The sound number data is output to. It should be noted that FIGS. 10-15 and 10
An effect control command other than the effect control command shown in -16 is also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating the game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

(1st special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 10-17 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal processing is executed is
This is the case where the value of the first special figure process flag is a value indicating step S110A. When the value of the first special figure process flag is a value indicating step S110A,
In the first special symbol display device 4A, the variation display of the first special symbol is not made.

In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 052IWS50A). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (the value of the first reserved storage number).
Step 052IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first hold storage counter is confirmed. If the first hold storage number is 0, the first customer waiting demo display specification command is used for effect control C.
It is transmitted to PU120 (step 052IWS52A).

If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 has RAM 1
Each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of 02 is read out and stored in the first random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 052IWS53A), and the first reserved storage. Decrease the number value by 1 (subtract the count value of the 1st hold storage counter by 1) and shift the contents of each storage area (step 052IW).
S54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the first reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number is always extracted is always the first reserved storage number = 1.
, 2, 3, 4 are in order. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The order of extraction is also identifiable and saved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 052I).
WS55A). In this example, by executing the process of step 052IWS55A, the setting value command is transmitted every time the fluctuation display is started, but the setting change process (process of changing the set value) when the power is turned on. The setting value command is also sent when is executed.

The timing of sending the setting value command is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, the setting value command is configured to be transmitted at each end of the fluctuation display, or the setting value command is transmitted during the fluctuation display. It may be configured to do so.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS56A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined that the state is low probability / non-KT, and the low probability / non-KT background specification command is executed. The probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on. In some cases, the low probability / 1st KT state is determined and the low probability / 1st KT background specification command is issued.
When the probability change flag is on and the high base flag is on, it is determined that the state is high probability / first KT, and the high probability / first KT background specification command is executed. When the probability change flag is on and the high base flag is off. Is determined to be in the high probability / second KT state, and a high probability / second KT background specification command is transmitted to.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in progress (step 052IWS57A). Specifically, when the second jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is changing, step 052I without performing the processing after step 052IWS58A.
Move to WS69A. As a result, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly removing the wire is not limited to the above. For example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing in step 052IWS57A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range as a random number for hit determination is performed, and step 052IWS59A
By shifting to, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which hit determination random number was acquired at the time of starting winning.

Further, for example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing in step 052IWS57A, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as a random number for hit determination without performing the processing of steps 052IWS58A to S63A. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of starting winning.

If the jackpot of the second special symbol is not changing, the game control microcomputer 100
Reads a random number for hit determination from the first random number storage buffer (step 052IWS58A).
), The jackpot determination module is executed (step 052IWS59A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for hit determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step 052IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 052IWS61A). .. Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot based on the hit type determination random number (step 052IWS62A), the jackpot type is stored (step 052IWS63A), and step 052IWS69A. Move to.

If the big hit is not obtained in step 052IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 052IWS6).
4A). In the small hit judgment module, a random number for hit judgment (a random number for small hit judgment may be used),
It is a program that decides to make a small hit if it matches a predetermined small hit judgment value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 052IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first small hit flag indicating that the small hit will be made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 052IWS65A). Step 052IWS66A). Also,
The game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for determining the hit type (step 052IWS67A), and stores the small hit type (step 052IW).
S68A). In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be small hit A (see FIG. 10-6 (A)). And step 052IWS
Move to 69A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state is "0" (step 052IWS69A).
, "0", the process proceeds to step 052IWS75A. When the value of the high base count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the value of the high base count counter by "1" (step 052I).
WS70A), it is determined whether or not it has become "0" (step 052IWS71A). If the value of the high base count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 052IWS75A. When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 1
00 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step 052).
Together with IWS72A), the special figure time reduction flag indicating that the shortening control of the variation display of the special symbol is being performed is reset (step 052IWS73A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 is extended until the end of the fluctuation (step 052IWS74A). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS75A.

In this feature unit 052IW, as will be described later, it is highly probable that the high base flag is set and the number of executions of the fluctuation display in the high base state is managed at the end of the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit. / High base state (low probability / first KT state) is controlled and 50 times of fluctuation display is executed. Low probability / high base state (low probability / 1st KT)
In the case of (state), step 052IWS7 when starting the 50th variation display.
It is determined as Y in 1A and S71B, the high base flag is reset in steps 052IWS72A and S72B, and the special time reduction flag is also reset in steps 052IWS73A and S73B. ) Will be moved to.

The lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is for continuing the right-handed notification and continuing the right-handed state, and although the high base state has ended as the game state, the fluctuation reduction common to the first KT state is shortened. It is a flag for making the production background common to the first KT state while keeping the state.

In this example, the process of step 052IWS74A and step 052IWS described later will be described.
By executing the process of 74B, the final fluctuation in the high base state due to the start of fluctuation of either the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (in this example, the 50th fluctuation display). When is started, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set and the fluctuation shortening state is extended. In this case, when the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set, the variation display of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol (50 in this example).
The lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is reset according to the end of the variation display (the fifth variation display) or the start of the variation display (in this example, the 51st variation display) of the other special symbol, and the variation shortening state. It is desirable to configure it so that the extension of is completed.

Then, in step 052IWS75A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step 052IWS75A). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step 052IWS75A is confirmed.

In step 052IWS59A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

(1st fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, first, whether or not the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is set with the special figure time reduction flag indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is being shortened. (Step 052IWS1700A). In this example, it is more advantageous to execute the variation display of the second special symbol by setting the special symbol time reduction flag and performing the shortening control of the variation display of the special symbol (FIG. 10-7). (Refer to FIG. 10-9), since a small hit is likely to occur, the state is controlled to the KT state. If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 10
0 selects the first special symbol variation pattern table for non-KT shown in FIG. 10-7 (A) as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern (step 052IW).
S1701A). If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state)
, The game control microcomputer 100 selects the first special symbol variation pattern table for KT shown in FIG. 10-7 (B) as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern (step 052IWS1702A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 is described in step 052IWS1701A,
Which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 10-7 is used based on the fluctuation pattern table determined to be used in S1702A and the fluctuation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. (Step 052IWS1703A). In this example, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern. Further, after the fluctuation time is determined, the fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (
Step 052IWS1704A).

Further, in step 052IWS1703A, the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol
When the determination is made, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first fluctuation time timer and starts the measurement of the fluctuation time (step 052IWS1705A), and the first special symbol display device. The variation display of the first special symbol in 4A is started (step 052IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 052IWS1707A).

(1st special symbol change processing)
FIG. 10-19 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation processing, the CPU 10
In step 3, first, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 052IWS1120A). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121).
) ~ The value indicating the small hit end process (step S128) is not obtained, and even during the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) during the small hit game (special variable winning ball device 17).
Is not open).

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not yet been transmitted.
And, based on the determination result of the jackpot type, one of the display result specification commands (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 3 designation command, display result 4 designation command, display result 7 designation command) is produced. Control to transmit to the control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1121A).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first fluctuation time timer (step 052IWS11).
22A), when the first variable time timer times out (step 052IWS1123A)
), Control to transmit the first symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 052).
IWS1130A).

If the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052I).
WS1125A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. 2nd Indicates that a big hit will be made based on the variable display of the special symbol.
It can be determined by checking whether or not the jackpot flag is set.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS1126A). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second small hit flag indicating that the small hit is obtained is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol.
If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B, the process ends as it is.

If the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit (step 0).
52IWS1127A). It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined by checking, for example, whether or not the first big hit flag is set. If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit type is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot (step 052IWS1128A). Whether or not it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot can be determined by checking, for example, the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63A. If it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot, the process ends as it is.

When the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS)
1125A Y) or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (step 052IWS112)
When it is Y) of 6A and neither 10R probability variation jackpot nor 6R probability variation jackpot (that is, 6R normal jackpot) is being executed (step 0).
Y of 52IWS1127A, N of step 052IWS1128A), CPU103
Controls to send the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A). In this case, if the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 052IWS113).
0A).

By executing the processes of steps 052IWS1125A to S1129A, in this feature unit 052IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol. In this case, when the variable display of the first special symbol, which is a normal jackpot (6R normal jackpot in this example), is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and the first special symbol is stopped. And the second special symbol are prevented from causing a big hit or a small hit at the same time. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, if the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly missed, the decorative symbol is changed based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 052IWS1129A. As a display result, control is performed so that the out-of-order symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed.

In this example, the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the probability variation jackpot (in this example, the 10R probability variation jackpot or the 6R probability variation jackpot). If the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y in step 052IWS1128A), but in this case, the second
Based on the fact that the variation display of the special symbol becomes a small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step S126), and the game shifts to the small hit game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, it is determined as N in step 052IWS1120A, the processing of steps 052IWS1121A to S1130A is skipped, and the first fluctuation time timer of step 052IWS1122A is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a probability variation big hit, is being executed, the first variation time timer is during the small hit game. The update of the first special symbol is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variation time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being performed. If there is, the first special symbol variation processing is terminated as it is (see N in step 052IWS1127A). Therefore, even when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being executed, the first variation is performed during the small hit game. When the update of the time timer is interrupted and the variation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed and the small hit game is completed, the update of the first variation time timer is restarted.

(1st special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-20 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 052IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, C
PU103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 052IWS).
2011A). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (
In addition to step 052IWS2012A), control is performed to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2013A).

In this example, the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area. Therefore, when the game state is controlled to the KT state, the person who performs the right-handed operation. Is advantageous for the player, and the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on. Therefore, in this example, low probability / 1st K
The right-handed indicator 26 is lit during the T state, but steps 052IWS69A to S
By executing the processes of 74A and S69B to S74B, when the 50th variation display is started, the low probability / first KT state is terminated and the normal state (non-KT state) is entered, and steps 052IWS2010A to S2013A are executed. , S2010B to S2013B are executed, so that the right-handed display 26 is turned off when the 50th variation display is completed.

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS2014A). In this case, if the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 052IWS1129A of the first special symbol variation processing, it is forced as a stop symbol of the first special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of the variation. The out-of-target design is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step 052IWS2015A). If the first jackpot flag is set, CPU1
03 sets the jackpot start flag indicating that the jackpot starts (step 052I).
WS2016A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first jackpot flag (step 0).
52IWS2017A).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 0).
52IWS2018A), control is performed to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2019A). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027A.

Step 052 By executing the processes of IWS2018A and S2019A, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to be lit when a big hit is made in the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the big hit game, and the right side. The hitting indicator 26 is turned on.

In this example, after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the jackpot game is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. Therefore, right-handed at the timing when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41. The display 26 may be configured to start lighting.

When the first big hit flag is not set (N in step 052IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first small hit flag is set (step 052IWS2020A). When the first small hit flag is set, C for effect control
Control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the PU 120 (step 052IW).
S2021A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first small hit flag (step 05).
2IWS2022A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step 052IWS2026A). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027A.

In this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is inherently advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the small hit game. But,
As already explained, when a small hit is made in the variable display of the first special symbol, the small hit type is only the small hit A, and it is almost impossible to expect the game ball to win the special winning opening. Therefore, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right-handed display 26 is not lit and the right-handed lighting start designation command is not transmitted.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step 052IWS2027A).

In this example, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol, the right-handed notification that urges the player to launch the game ball to the right of the game area can be executed. There is. In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol, a launch promotion notification that urges the player to launch the game ball aiming at the passing gate 41 can be executed as a right-handed notification. You may be.

In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, the right-handed notification or launch promotion notification is not executed, and when the game ball wins the first start winning opening in that state, the right-handed notification or launch promotion notification is executed. (In this case, since the gate is waiting to pass through, even if the game ball wins in the first start winning opening, the variation display of the first special symbol is not started immediately, and the first holding memory is set). It may be configured as.

On the contrary, when the passage of the game ball at the passing gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is low (for example, low volume sound output or small screen display). Therefore, the player may be configured to perform a left-handed notification prompting the player to launch and operate the game ball to the left of the game area. On the other hand, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is high (for example, loud sound output or It may be configured to perform left-handed notification by (large screen display). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the launch. In particular, according to the above configuration, a player who accidentally launches a game ball to the right of the game area is given a slight left-handed notification in a mode in which the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is low. , For players who intentionally perform right-handed operations
It may be configured to give a left-handed notification according to a mode in which the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is high.
With such a configuration, it is possible to urge the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation to return to the left-handed operation from the clerk of the game store.

Further, in the above case, the left-handed notification may be performed when the number of detected game balls at the passing gate 41, the second starting winning opening, and the special winning opening reaches a certain number. In addition, the passage gate 4
In 1, when a game ball is detected multiple times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), a left-handed notification is given, and a specific number less than a predetermined number in the second start winning opening and the special winning opening. It may be configured to give a left-handed notification when (for example, one) or more game balls are detected.

In this feature unit 052IW, the demo display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied, but when the demo display is performed in the normal state, the passage gate 41, the second start winning opening, or the special winning opening is displayed. When the winning of the game ball is detected, the execution of the demo display that has been executed may be terminated and the left-handed notification may be given.

(2nd special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 10-21 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal processing in the second special symbol process processing. The state in which the second special symbol normal processing is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing. In addition, when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, it means that the second special symbol display device 4B does not display the variation of the second special symbol.

In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 052IWS50B). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (the value of the second reserved storage number).
Step 052IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage counter is confirmed. If the number of second reserved memories is 0, the second customer waiting demo display specification command is used for effect control C.
It is transmitted to PU120 (step 052IWS52B).

If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 has RAM1.
Each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer of 02 is read out and stored in the second random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 052IWS53B), and the second reserved storage. Decrease the value of the number by 1 (subtract the count value of the second reserved storage counter by 1) and shift the contents of each storage area (step 052IW).
S54B). That is, each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the second reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved storage number is always extracted is always the second reserved storage number = 1.
, 2, 3, 4 are in order. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 052I).
WS55B). In this example, by executing the process of step 052IWS55B, the setting value command is transmitted every time the fluctuation display is started. However, the setting change process (process of changing the set value) when the power is turned on. The setting value command is also sent when is executed.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS56B). The specific method of transmitting the background specification command is as follows in step 052IWS of the first special symbol normal processing.
It is the same as the process shown in 56A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is in progress (step 052IWS57B). Specifically, when the first jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is changing, step 052I without performing the processing after step 052IWS58B.
Move to WS69B. As a result, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly removing the wire is not limited to the above. For example, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress in step 052IWS57B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of order as a random number for hit determination is performed, and by shifting to step 052IWS59B, eventually at the start winning prize. It may be forcibly removed regardless of whether a random number for hit determination has been acquired.

Further, for example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step 052IWS57B, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as a random number for hit determination without performing the processing of steps 052IWS58B to S63B. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

If the jackpot of the first special symbol is not changing, the game control microcomputer 100
Reads a random number for hit determination from the second random number storage buffer (step 052IWS58B).
), The jackpot determination module is executed (step 052IWS59B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for hit determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step 052IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 052IWS61B). .. Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 2R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot based on the random number for determining the hit type (step 052IWS62B), and the jackpot type is stored (step 052IWS6).
3B), the process proceeds to step 052IWS69B.

If no big hit is made in step 052IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 052IWS6).
4B). In the small hit judgment module, a random number for hit judgment (a random number for small hit judgment may be used),
It is a program that decides to make a small hit if it matches a predetermined small hit judgment value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 052IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that the small hit will be made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 052IWS65B). Step 052IWS66B). Also,
The game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for determining the hit type (step 052IWS67B), and stores the small hit type (step 052IW).
S68B). In this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be small hit B or small hit C (see FIG. 10-6 (B)). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS69B.

Next, in the game control microcomputer 100, the value of the high base number counter is "0".
(Step 052IWS69B), and if it is "0", the process proceeds to step 052IWS75B. When the value of the high base count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the value of the high base count counter by "1" (step 052IWS70B). It is determined whether or not it has become "0" (step 052IWS71B). The value of the high base count counter is "0"
If not, the process proceeds to step 052IWS75B. When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step 052IWS72B), and shortens the variation display of the special symbol. The special figure time reduction flag indicating that the control is in progress is reset (step 052IWS73B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step 052IWS74B). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS75B.

Then, in step 052IWS75B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern setting process (step 052IWS75B). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step 052IWS75B is confirmed.

In step 052IWS59B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) shown in FIG. 10-18. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 10-18, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process is explained. However, in the second variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first steps 0.
Perform the same processing as the 52IWS1700A, and confirm whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set. If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state)
The game control microcomputer 100 selects the second special symbol variation pattern table for non-KT shown in FIG. 10-8 (C) as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 fluctuates according to whether or not the probability variation flag and the high base flag are set and the number of fluctuations. As a variation pattern table for determining a pattern, any second for KT shown in FIGS. 10-8 (D) to 10-9 (I).
Select the variable pattern table for special symbols. For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability / first KT state), the first variation is shown in FIG. 10-8 (D).
) Is selected for the second special symbol variation pattern table, and if it is the 2nd to 49th variation, FIG.
The second special symbol variation pattern table shown in −8 (E) is selected, and if it is the 50th variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-8 (F) is selected. Also, for example
If both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (high probability / first KT state), select the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10-9 (G) for the first variation. Then, if it is the second variation or later, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10-9 (H) is selected. Further, for example, if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off (in the high probability / second KT state), the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10-9 (I) is selected.

(2nd special symbol change processing)
FIG. 10-22 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 052IWS1120B). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not yet been transmitted.
And, based on the determination result of the jackpot type, one of the display result specification commands (display result 1 specified command, display result 2 specified command, display result 3 specified command, display result 5 specified command, display result 6 specified command, display result 7 Designated command) is output control CPU120
Control to transmit to (step 052IWS1121B).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second fluctuation time timer (step 052IWS11).
22B), when the second fluctuation time timer times out (step 052IWS1123B)
), Control to transmit the second symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 052IWS1130B).

When the second fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052I).
WS1125B). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. The first indicating that a big hit is made based on the variable display of the first special symbol.
It can be determined by checking whether or not the jackpot flag is set.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS1126B). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not the first small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol.
If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the process ends as it is.

If the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit (step 0).
52IWS1127B). It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined by checking, for example, whether or not the second big hit flag is set. If the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit type is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 2R probability variable jackpot (step 052IWS1128B). .. Whether or not it is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63B. 10R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot,
Or, if it is a 2R probability variation jackpot, the process ends as it is.

When the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS)
1125B Y) or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (step 052IWS112)
When the variation display of the second special symbol is being executed (Y in step 052IWS1127B), which is Y) of 6B and does not become any of 10R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, and 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, 2R normal jackpot). , Step 052IWS1128B N)
(Step 052IWS1129B), the CPU 103 controls the effect control CPU 120 to transmit a second forced symbol determination command. In this case, if the second big hit flag or the second small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the second big hit flag or the second small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 052IWS1130B).
).

By executing the processes of steps 052IWS1125B to S1129B, in this feature unit 052IW, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol. In this case, when the variable display of the second special symbol, which is a normal jackpot (2R normal jackpot in this example), is being executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and the first special symbol is stopped. And the second special symbol are prevented from causing a big hit or a small hit at the same time. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, if the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly missed, the decorative symbol is changed based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 052IWS1129B. As a display result, control is performed so that the out-of-order symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed.

In this example, the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the probability variation jackpot (in this example, the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, Or, if the variation display of the second special symbol that becomes the 2R probability variation jackpot) is being executed, the second special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y in step 052IWS1128B). In this case, the first special symbol Based on the fact that the fluctuation display of the symbol has become a small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step S126).
Shift to small hit games. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, step 052IWS1
When it is determined to be N at 120B, the processing of steps 052IWS1121B to S1130B is skipped, and the second fluctuation time timer of step 052IWS1122B is not updated.
Therefore, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol, which is a probability variation big hit, is being executed, the second variation time timer is during the small hit game. The update of the second special symbol is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is again changed to the bonus control normal process (step S12).
The value corresponding to 0) is updated, and the update of the second fluctuation time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being performed. If there is, the second special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see N in step 052IWS1127B). Therefore, even when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being executed, the second variation is performed during the small hit game. The update of the time timer is interrupted, the variation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small hit game is completed, the update of the second variation time timer is restarted.

By configuring as described above, in the normal state after the end of the first KT state (after the end of the reduced working hours state), the remaining second hold memory can be digested, and a big hit occurs at an unintended timing when the player is absent. Can be suppressed.

Further, a variable winning ball device for the first special symbol is provided below the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning opening), and a winning ball device for the second special symbol is provided on the right side of the game area. It is configured to provide a starting winning opening that is not a variable winning ball device, and is in the second KT state (small hit RUSH).
In the gaming machine configured to shift to the normal state via the time saving state of the first special symbol after the end, the configuration in which the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed may be applied as described above. In this case, as the fluctuation efficiency of the first special symbol increases, the frequency of small hits based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol also increases, but the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is forcibly missed accordingly. By increasing the frequency of this, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol based on the second hold memory in the normal state, and further suppress the occurrence of the jackpot at the unintended timing when the player is absent. Can be done.

(2nd special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-23 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol stop process. In the second special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 052IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, C
PU103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 052IWS).
2011B). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (
In addition to step 052IWS2012B), control is performed to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2013B).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS2014B). In this case, if the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 052IWS1129B of the second special symbol variation processing, it is forced as the stop symbol of the second special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of the variation. The out-of-target design is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second jackpot flag is set (step 052IWS2015B). If the second jackpot flag is set, CPU1
03 sets the jackpot start flag (step 052IWS2016B). Also, C
PU103 clears the second jackpot flag (step 052IWS2017B).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 0).
52IWS2018B) and control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2019B). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027B.

Step 052 By executing the processes of IWS2018B and S2019B, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to be lit when a big hit is made in the variable display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on.

When the second big hit flag is not set (N in step 052IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small hit flag is set (step 052IWS2020B). When the second small hit flag is set, C for effect control
Control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the PU 120 (step 052IW).
S2021B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second small hit flag (step 05).
2IWS2022B).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 052IWS2023B). If the special time reduction flag is not set (that is,
(If it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2024B), and also controls to send a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2024B). 052IWS2025B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step 052IWS2026B). And step 052IWS20
Move to 27B.

Step 052 By executing the processes of IWS2024B and S2025B, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to light when a small hit is made in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening)
Is provided on the right side of the game area, so that it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the small hit game, and the right-handed display 26 is turned on.

However, in this example, even if it is a small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, K
If it is in the T state, the right-handed indicator 26 should already be lit. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination process of step 052IWS2023B, the second step is performed during the KT state.
When a small hit occurs in the variable display of the special symbol, the process of starting the lighting of the right-handed display 26 or transmitting the right-handed lighting start designation command is not performed in duplicate.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step 052IWS2027B).

(Characteristic control normal processing)
FIG. 10-24 shows the accessory control normal process (step S120) in the accessory control process process.
) Is a flowchart showing. In the accessory control normal process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the jackpot start flag is set (step 052IWS2101).
.. If the jackpot start flag is not set, the process ends as it is.

If the jackpot start flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot start flag (step 052IWS2102). Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer before opening the big winning opening (step 052IWS2103), sets the opening pattern data for round 1 according to the big hit type (step 052IWS2104), and sets the round number counter indicating the number of big hit rounds to "1". "(Step 052IWS2105).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the gate passage waiting process (step 052IWS2106).

(Waiting for gate passage)
FIG. 10-25 shows a gate passage waiting process (step S12) in the accessory control process process.
It is a flowchart which shows 1). In the gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has been input (step 052IWS25).
01). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has not been input, the process ends as it is. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag, the high base flag, and the special time reduction flag if set, and clears the value of the high base count counter to 0 ( Step 052IWS2502). Then CPU10
In step 3, a jackpot start designation command is transmitted (step 052IWS2503), and the value of the accessory control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step 052IWS2).
504).

In this feature unit 052IW, the jackpot game is not started immediately when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the second special symbol by executing the gate passage waiting process, but the game is played through the passing gate 41. It is configured to shift to the jackpot game on condition that the ball has passed and is detected by the gate switch 21.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 10-26 shows the jackpot opening process (step S123) in the accessory control process process.
) Is a flowchart showing. In the process of opening the jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the first count switch 23 is in the ON state (step 052IWS24).
01). If the first count switch 23 is in the ON state, that is, if the game ball that has won the big prize opening is detected, the CPU 103 has a winning number for counting the number of game balls that have won the big prize opening. The value of the counter is added by 1 (step 052IWS2402). Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the large winning opening winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2403).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V area switch 052IW106 is in the ON state (step 052IWS2404). If the V area switch 052IW106 is in the ON state, that is, if a game ball that has entered the V area 052IW104 is detected, the CPU 103 sets a V winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered the V area 052IW104. (Step 052IWS2405).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the winning number counter is 10 (step 052IWS2406). If the value of the winning number counter is 10, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2409. If the value of the winning number counter is not 10, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the large winning opening (step 052IWS2407), and the opening time timer after the subtraction times out. It is confirmed whether or not (step 052IWS2408). If the open time timer has not timed out, the process ends as it is.

When the value of the winning number counter is 10 (Y in step 052IWS2406)
, Or when the open time timer times out (Y in step 052IWS2408)
The CPU 103 stops driving the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door to control the large winning opening to the closed state (step 052IWS2409). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit a display command after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 (step 0).
52IWS2410). Further, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the round number counter (
Step 052IWS2411).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the post-processing after opening the jackpot (step 052IWS2412).

(Big hit end processing)
FIG. 10-27 shows the jackpot end process (step S125) in the accessory control process process.
It is a flowchart which shows. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step 052IWS2200), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, proceeds to step 052IWS2202. When the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 tells the jackpot end display timer the time during which the jackpot end display is displayed on the image display device 5 (big hit end display time).
A value corresponding to the display time corresponding to (step 052IWS2201) is set, and the process ends.

In step 052IWS2202, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 052IWS2202). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 0).
52IWS2203). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has passed (Y in step 052IWS2203), the CPU
103 confirms whether or not the V winning flag is set (step 052IWS2).
204). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag (step 052IWS2205), sets the probability change flag, and shifts to the probability change state (high probability state) (step 052IWS2206).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (step 052IWS2207). Whether or not it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing or step 052IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the special figure time reduction flag and shifts to the KT state (step 05).
2IWS2208). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2215. In addition, 10R
In the case of a probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the high base flag is not set. Therefore, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, a high probability / low base state (high probability / first). It will be controlled to 2KT state).

If it is neither a 10R probability variation jackpot nor a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot (step 052IWS).
2209). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing or step 052IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot, CPU10
In step 3, the high base flag is set and the state shifts to the high base state (step 052IWS221).
0), and further set the special figure time reduction flag to shift to the KT state (step 052IWS2).
211). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2215. Therefore, in the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, it will be controlled to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state).

In the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot, only the high base flag is set, and the high base number counter is not set. In this case, since the high base number counter is reset to 0 when the jackpot game is started (step 052IWS25 of the gate passage waiting process).
(See 02), the value of the high base count counter remains 0. Therefore, after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot is completed, it is controlled to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the value of the high base count counter is 0 in the subsequent fluctuation display. Step 052IWS69A of the first special symbol normal processing and step 052I of the second special symbol normal processing
It is judged as Y by WS69B and step 052IWS70A or step 052IWS70B
The subtraction process of the high base count counter is not performed. Then, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

If it is not a 6R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 052IWS2212), and sets the special figure time reduction flag. To the KT state (step 052IWS2213). Further, the CPU 103 sets the high base number counter to "50".
"(Step 052IWS2214). Then step 052IWS22
Move to 15. Therefore, in the case of a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot, it is controlled to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step 052IWS2215).

(Small hit end processing)
FIG. 10-28 shows the small hit end process (step S128) in the accessory control process process.
It is a flowchart which shows. In the small hit end process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step 052IWS2300), and if the small hit end display timer is set, proceeds to step 052IWS2302. When the small hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 tells the small hit end display timer the time during which the small hit end display is displayed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time).
A value corresponding to the display time corresponding to (step 052IWS2301) is set, and the process ends.

In step 052IWS2302, the value of the small hit end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 052IWS2302). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 0).
52IWS2303). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has passed (Y in step 052IWS2303), the CPU
103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 052IWS).
2304). If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the right-handed display 26 is lit (step 05).
2IWS2305). If the right-handed display 26 is lit, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2306), and also transmits a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed (step 052IWS2307).

In this example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the non-KT state, the right-handed indicator 26 starts lighting at the start of the small hit game (step 052IWS2).
(Refer to 023B to S2025B), the processing of steps 052IWS2304 to S2307 is executed, so that the right-handed display 26 is turned on at the end of the small hit game.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step 052IWS2308).

(Transition of game state)
Here, the transition of the gaming state in the feature unit 052IW will be described. Figure 10-2
9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to transition the gaming state in the feature unit 052IW. First, in this feature unit 052IW, low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state))
In), the player performs a launch operation (left-handed) of the game ball aiming at the left side of the game area. Therefore, in the normal state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the first starting winning opening, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in a low probability / low base state, a 10R probability variable big hit, a 6R probability variable big hit, or a 6R normal big hit mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variation big hit occurs in a low probability / low base state, if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability / after the end of the big hit game It shifts to the low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (step 052IWS2204 to S2).
208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, 6R in low probability / low base state
When a probability variation jackpot occurs, if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, it shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends, and the next High probability / high base state is maintained until a jackpot occurs (step 052I
WS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, V during the jackpot game
If the game ball does not enter the area 052IW104, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs in a low probability / low base state, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game, and whether the next jackpot occurs. The low probability / high base state is maintained until the 50th variation display is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

After shifting to the KT state (high probability / high base state, low probability / high base state, high probability / low base state), in this feature portion 052IW, the player aims at the right side of the game area. And perform the firing operation (right-handed) of the game ball. Therefore, in the KT state, the start winning is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the KT state, a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, a 2R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot occurs mainly.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), the V region 05 during the jackpot game.
If a game ball enters 2IW104, it is in a high probability / low base state after the end of the big hit game (
It shifts to the high probability / second KT state) and maintains the high probability / low base state until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game ends. / Shifts to a high base state (high probability / first KT state) and maintains a high probability / high base state until the next big hit occurs (step 052IWS2204)
-S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, during the jackpot game, V area 052I
If the game ball does not enter W104, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, in this feature unit 052IW, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 6R probability variation jackpot is 50% in total (see FIG. 10-5), so that the probability is once high / high. In the base state, the high probability / high base state loops at a rate of 50%. Also, high probability /
When a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high base state (high probability / first KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game, and the next jackpot is The low-probability / high-base state is maintained until it occurs or the 50-fold variation display is completed (see steps 052IWS2212-S2214).

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), the V region 05 during the jackpot game.
If a game ball enters 2IW104, it is in a high probability / low base state after the end of the big hit game (
It shifts to the high probability / second KT state) and maintains the high probability / low base state until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game ends. / Shifts to a high base state (high probability / first KT state) and maintains a high probability / high base state until the next big hit occurs (step 052IWS2204)
-S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, during the jackpot game, V area 052I
If the game ball does not enter W104, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 fluctuation display is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214). In addition, this feature part 052I
In W, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 2R normal jackpot is 3
Since it is 5% (see FIGS. 10-5 (D) and (E)), once the low probability / high base state is reached, the low probability / high base state loops at a rate of 35%. When a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot occurs and the probability / high base state is reached, and then 50 fluctuation displays are completed without the next jackpot occurring, FIG. 10-29 shows. As shown, it shifts to a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) (steps 052IWS69A to S73).
A, see S69B to S73B).

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), the V region 05 during the jackpot game.
If a game ball enters 2IW104, it is in a high probability / low base state after the end of the big hit game (
It shifts to the high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In this feature unit 052IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot is 15% (FIG. 10-5 (FIG. 10-5).
(See D) and (E)), once the high probability / low base state is reached, the high probability / low base state loops at a rate of 15%. Also, high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state)
In the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot, if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, a high probability / high base state (high probability / 1st K) is achieved after the jackpot game is completed.
It shifts to the T state), and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 fluctuation display is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

In addition, in FIG. 10-29, in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the first
Although the case where the variable display of the special symbol is executed has been described, there is a possibility that the variable display of the second special symbol is executed at a low rate. In this case, if a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game,
It will shift to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). Also, 2R
When a normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high base state remains until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 fluctuation display is completed. Will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, if a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs,
If a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, a high probability / low base state (
It will shift to high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, if a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs,
If a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, a high probability / low base state (
It will shift to high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, if a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs,
If a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, a high probability / low base state (
It will shift to high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

(Normal symbol process processing)
Next, a normal symbol process process (step S29) executed by the game control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 10-30 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol process process. In the normal symbol process processing, the game control microcomputer 10
When 0 (specifically, CPU 103) detects that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 and the gate switch 21 is in the ON state (step 052IWS5111), the gate passing designation command is issued to the effect control CPU 120. Controls transmission (step 052)
IWS5112). Then, the CPU 103 performs a gate switch passing process (step 052).
IWS5113) is executed.

In the feature unit 052IW, when the process of steps 052IWS5111 to S5113 is executed and the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41 is detected, a gate passage designation command is transmitted. In this feature unit 052IW, the passing gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate and also plays a role of an operating area. Is it in a state of waiting for the passage of the gate after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed and before the jackpot game is started? Regardless of whether or not, the gate passage specification command is sent.

Then, the CPU 103 performs step 052IWS according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.
One of the processes shown in 5100 to S5104 is executed.

In addition, in this feature unit 052IW, when the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41 is detected in step 052IWS5111, the gate switch passing process of step 052IWS5113 is executed regardless of whether or not it is in the gate passage waiting state. Normally, the variable display of the symbol is executed, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed only when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 when it is not in the gate passage waiting state, and the normal symbol is executed even if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the gate passing state. It may be configured not to execute the variable display of.

Further, in this feature unit 052IW, the passing gate 41 is normally used as a gate for both the starting region and the operating region, but the special symbol process processing (see steps S25A and S25B) is normally performed in the timer interrupt processing. Design process processing (see step S26)
Since it is executed before, the passage of the game ball of the passing gate 41 as the operating region is detected, and then the passage of the game ball of the passing gate 41 as the normal starting region is detected. Therefore, the process for starting the jackpot game can be executed quickly.

Gate switch passage processing (step 052IWS5113): The CPU 103 is a gate passage storage counter (counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41).
It is confirmed whether or not the count value (the number of memory passing through the gate) has reached the maximum value (“4” in this example). If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by +1.
The LED of the normal figure hold indicator 25C is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 103 performs a process of extracting the value of the random number for determining the normal symbol hit and storing it in the storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of stored gates.

Normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100): The CPU 103 can start the fluctuation of the normal symbol (for example, the value of the normal symbol process flag is step 052I).
When the value indicates WS5100, specifically, it is variable based on the fact that the normal symbol display 20 does not display the variation of the normal symbol and the normal symbol display 20 hits and the symbol is derived and displayed. When the winning ball device 6B is not in the opening / closing operation), the value of the gate passing memory number is confirmed. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory counter is confirmed.
If the number of gate passing memories is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is the hit symbol). Then, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "1") indicating the normal symbol variation process (step 052IWS5101).

Normal symbol variation processing (step 052IWS5101): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time in the normal symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "2") indicating the normal symbol stop processing (step 052IWS5102).

Normal symbol stop processing (step 052IWS5102): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, confirms whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol. If it is not a hit symbol (if it is a missed symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is set to the normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100).
Is updated to a value indicating (specifically, "0"). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the time before opening the normal electric accessory is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is processed before opening the normal electric accessory (step 052).
Update to a value (specifically, "3") indicating IWS5103).

Pre-processing for opening the normal electric accessory (step 052IWS5103): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol process timer to the normal electric accessory operation time and timers. Is started, and the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "4") indicating the normal electric accessory operation process (step 052IWS5104).

Normal electric accessory operation process (step 052IWS5104): The CPU 103 measures the normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, the variable winning ball device 6B is closed. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "0") indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100).

(Normal pattern normal processing)
FIG. 10-31 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol normal process (step 052IWS5100). In the normal symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gate passing memory number is 0 by checking the count value of the gate passing memory number counter (step 052IWS5121). If the number of gate passage memories is 0 (step 052IWS)
5121 Y), the process ends as it is. If the gate-passing memory number is not 0 (N in step 052IWS5121), the CPU 103 reads out the normal symbol hit determination random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate-passing memory number = 1 (step 052IWS512).
2). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the gate passage storage counter by 1, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 052IWS5123). That is, the random value for normal symbol hit determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate-passing storage = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate-passing storage = n-1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the random values for normal symbol hit determination stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each gate passing memory number are always extracted is that the gate passing memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4 It is designed to match.

Next, the CPU 103 uses a normal symbol determination table for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol, performs a lottery process based on a random number (random number value for determining whether to hit a normal symbol), and determines whether or not to hit a normal symbol. (Step 052IWS5127). In addition, this feature part 0
In 52IW, in step 052IWS5127, the CPU 103 is uniformly 99 regardless of whether it is in the probabilistic state, the KT state, or the high base state.
It is decided that the probability of hitting a normal symbol is / 100.

In step 052IWS5127, when the read normal symbol hit determination random value is within the hit range (when it is a hit), the CPU 103 sets the hit symbol as a display result (step 052IWS5128), and proceeds to step 052IWS5130. Further, in step 052IWS5127, when the read normal symbol hit determination random value is not within the hit range (when it is out of the range), the CPU 103 sets the out-of-order symbol as the display result (step 052IWS5129), and proceeds to step 052IWS5130.

In step 052IWS5130, if the high base flag is set, the CPU 103 sets 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol process timer (
Step 052 Y, S5131 of IWS5130). If the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 1.0 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal symbol fluctuation time (N, in step 052IWS5130).
S5132).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (step 052IWS5101) (step 052IWS5133).

(Normal symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-32 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol stop process (step 052IWS5102). In the normal symbol stop process, the CPU 103 sets the value of the normal symbol process timer to -1 (step 052IWS3701). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 052IWS3702). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 052IWS3702), the process ends as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS3702), the CPU 103 determines whether the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (in step 052IWS5127). (Whether or not it was determined) is confirmed (step 052IWS3703). It should be noted that whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol is confirmed by, for example, setting the normal symbol hit determination flag when it is determined to be a hit in step 052IWS5127, and checking whether or not the flag is set. Can be done.

When it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a hit symbol but a missed symbol (N in step 052IWS3703), the CPU 103 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value indicating normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100) (step 052IWS5100). Specifically, it is updated to "0") (step 052IWS3708).

In step 052IWS3703, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (Y in step 052IWS3703), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 052IWS3704), and if it is set, That is, in the first KT state, 0.1 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step 052IWS3706). Further, when the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step 052IWS3705). ..

Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “3”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory opening preprocessing (step 052IWS5103) (step 0).
52IWS3707).

(Normal electric accessory opening pretreatment)
FIG. 10-33 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory opening pretreatment (step 052IWS5103). In the normal electric accessory release preprocessing, the CPU 103 sets the value of the normal symbol process timer to -1 (step 052IWS3801). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 052IWS3802). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 052IWS3802),
The process ends as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the time before opening the normal electric accessory has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS3802), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 052IWS3803). , That is, when it is in the first KT state, the normal electric accessory opening time is 5.
Set 5 seconds to the normal symbol process timer (step 052IWS3805). Also,
When the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 052IWS3804).

In this way, in this feature unit 052IW, 5.5 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the first KT state, and 0.2 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the normal state or the second KT state. By doing so, the first KT state is in a state in which it is easier to win a start prize in the second start winning opening than in the normal state or the second KT state. Therefore, the first KT state is configured so that the game ball is less likely to reach the special variable winning ball device 17 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 6B than in the normal state or the second KT state.

It should be noted that the control method for facilitating the start winning in the second starting winning opening when the gaming state is the first KT state is not limited to that shown in the feature unit 052IW. For example, in the case of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened many times as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state (for example, the variable winning ball device in the normal state or the second KT state). The number of times the 6B is opened may be set to 1 time, whereas the number of times the variable winning ball device 6B may be opened may be set to 2 times in the first KT state). By doing so, in the case of the first KT state, by increasing the number of times the variable winning ball device 6B is opened, it is possible to facilitate the starting winning of the second starting winning opening.

Further, for example, in the case of the first KT state, the control for lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B shown above and the variable winning ball device 6B as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state. It may be executed in combination with the control for increasing the number of times of opening.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state (step 052).
IWS3806). Specifically, the solenoid 81 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 6B.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “4”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory operation process (step 052IWS5104) (step 05).
2IWS3807).

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 10-34 to 10-37 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 052IWS611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. If the receive command is stored in the command receive buffer, the effect control CP
U120 reads the received command from the command receive buffer (step 052IWS).
612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 052IWS).
613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 052IWS614)
, The effect control CPU 0120 sets the set value indicated by the received set value command to the RAM1.
It is stored in the set value storage area formed in 22 (step 052IWS615).

If the received effect control command is a variable pattern command (step 052IWS6)
16) The effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 052IWS617).
). Then, the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step 052IWS61).
8).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step 052IWS6)
19) The effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 052IWS620).
).

If the received effect control command is one of the symbol confirmation command (1st symbol confirmation command, 2nd symbol confirmation command, 1st forced symbol confirmation command, 2nd forced symbol confirmation command) (step 052IWS621) ), The effect control CPU 120 sets the confirmation command reception flag corresponding to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 0).
52IWS622). For example, when the first symbol confirmation command is received, the first confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation command is received, the second confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first forced confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the second forced confirmation command reception flag is set.

If the received production control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 052IWS)
623), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start the display of the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 052IWS624). In addition, the effect control CPU 1
20 sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 052IWS625).
).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end specification command (step 052IWS)
626), the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the display of the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 052IWS627). In addition, the effect control CPU 1
20 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 052IWS628).
).

In this example, by executing the processes of steps 052IWS624 and S627, a right-handed display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the jackpot game.

In addition, for example, by changing the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display displayed during the big hit game, the set value suggestion effect suggesting the current set value may be executed. For example, when the right-handed display is started in step 052IWS624, the right-handed display of the white display color is normally started, but when the execution of the set value suggestion effect is decided, the set value "1" is set. If is, the right-handed display of the blue display color is started at a relatively high rate, and if the setting value is "2", the right-handed display of the green display color is started at a relatively high rate. , When the setting value is "3", the right-handed display of the yellow display color is started at a relatively high rate, and when the setting value is "4", the right of the orange display color is relatively high. When the setting value is "5", the right-handed display of the red display color is started at a relatively high rate, and when the setting value is "6", the right-handed display is started at a relatively high rate. Right-handed display of the rainbow-colored display color may be started.

Further, for example, it is configured to continuously execute the right-handed display even during the KT state after the big hit game ends, and the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display is changed and set at the timing of the end of the big hit game. It may be configured to perform a value suggestion effect.

Further, for example, in the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed and the normal state (
When shifting to the low probability / low base state), the left-handed display is configured to start, and the display mode (for example, display color) of the left-handed display is changed to execute the set value suggestion effect. It may be configured. When the control of the game state is switched in some form in this way, the set value suggestion effect may be configured to be executable.

If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step 052IWS)
629), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit start designation command reception flag (step 052IWS630).

If the received effect control command is a small hit end specification command (step 052IWS)
631), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit end designation command reception flag (step 052IWS632).

If the received production control command is a display command while the winning opening is open (step 052I)
WS633), the effect control CPU 120 resets (clears to 0) the value of the winning number counter for counting the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening during the round of the big hit game (clear to 0).
Step 052IWS634). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets the big winning opening opening flag that specifies that the big winning opening is being opened (the round period during the big hit game) (step 052IWS635).

In this example, by executing the process of step 052IWS634, the value of the winning number counter is cleared to 0 at the timing of receiving the large winning opening opening display command (timing to start the round), which is extremely rare. Even if an over-winning is detected during the interval period after the end of the round period, the value is counted in the winning number counter.

If the received production control command is a display command after opening the big winning opening (step 052I)
WS636), the effect control CPU 120 sets a flag after opening the large winning opening that specifies that it is an interval period after opening the large winning opening (step 052IWS637).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting start specification command (step 052I)
WS638), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start lighting the right-handed notification LED 37 (step 052IWS639).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting end specification command (step 052I)
WS640), the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed notification LED 37 (step 052IWS641).

If the received effect control command is a low-accuracy / non-KT background specification command (step 052)
IWS642), the effect control CPU 120 controls to display the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image (for example, a blue background image) according to the low probability / non-KT state (step 052IWS643). If the effect control CPU 120 is set, the effect control CPU 120 resets the first KT state flag indicating that it is in the first KT state (step 052IWS).
644). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 is a prize for counting the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning the big prize opening and the special winning opening during the big hit game and the high probability / second KT state. If the ball count counter is set, the value of the prize ball counter is reset (cleared to 0) (step 052IWS645).

In this example, a game ball wins in the big winning opening during a big hit game (except during a big hit game based on a 2R probability variable big hit or a 2R normal big hit), or a game is played in a special winning opening during a high probability / second KT state. When a ball wins a prize, the value of the prize ball counter is cumulatively updated (see steps 052IWS660 and S667), but by executing the process of step 052IWS645, the game state has a low probability / High base state (low probability / 1st KT state)
The value of the prize ball counter is cleared to 0 when the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed and the low probability / low base state is reached.

If the received effect control command is a low accuracy / first KT background specification command (step 05)
2IWS646), the effect control CPU 120 controls to display the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image (for example, a green background image) according to the low probability / first KT state (for example).
Step 052IWS647). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first KT state flag (step 052IWS648), and if set, the high probability state flag indicating that the state is in the high probability state and the second KT state indicating that the state is in the second KT state. Reset the 2KT status flag (step 052IWS649).

If the received effect control command is a high-accuracy / first KT background specification command (step 05)
2IWS650), the effect control CPU 120 controls to display the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image (for example, a yellow background image) according to the high probability / first KT state (for example).
Step 052IWS651). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the first KT state flag (step 052IWS652), and resets the second KT state flag if set (step 052IWS653).

If the received effect control command is a high-accuracy / second KT background specification command (step 05)
2IWS654), the effect control CPU 120 controls to display the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image (for example, a red background image) according to the high probability / second KT state (for example).
Step 052IWS655). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the second KT state flag (step 052IWS656), and resets the first KT state flag if set (step 052IWS657).

If the received production control command is a large prize opening prize designation command (step 052IW)
S658), the effect control CPU 120 is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or 6
R Confirm whether or not a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot is in progress (step 052IWS6)
59). Whether or not a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a jackpot game based on a 6R normal jackpot is in progress is determined by, for example, the effect control process flag value being the effect process during the jackpot (
Step S176) -It is confirmed whether or not the value indicates the ending effect processing (step S177), and the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area is the display result 2 designation command to the display result 4. It can be determined by checking whether it is a specified command.

During a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a jackpot game based on a 6R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 adds 15 to the value of the prize ball counter (step 0).
52IWS660). Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition (step 052I).
WS661). The prize ball number display is a display of the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning the big prize opening and the special winning opening during the big hit game and the high probability / second KT state.

Step 052 By executing the processes of IWS658 to S661, in this example,
The value of the prize ball counter and the prize ball number display are updated based on the occurrence of a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game based on the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, or the 6R normal jackpot. On the other hand, even during the big hit game, if a prize is made to the big prize opening during the big hit game based on the 2R probability variation big hit or the 2R normal big hit, the value of the prize ball counter is not updated and the prize ball is not updated. The number display is also not updated.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the over-winning suggestion effect process for determining and executing the over-winning suggestion effect (step 052IWS662). In addition, it should be noted
The "over-winning suggestion effect" is an effect that is executed at the timing when the over-winning to the large winning opening occurs and suggests the currently set value.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize ball number display suggestion effect process for determining and executing the prize ball number display suggestion effect (step 052IWS663). In the "Prize ball number display suggestion effect", the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning a prize in the big prize opening or the special winning opening during the big hit game or the high probability / second KT state is predetermined. Number (456 in this example, 5
It is an effect that is executed at the timing when the number reaches 55, 666, 2456, 2555, 2666) and suggests the currently set value.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize ball number emphasizing effect process for determining and executing the prize ball number emphasizing effect (step 052IWS664). In the "Prize ball number emphasis production", the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning a prize in the big prize opening or the special winning opening during the big hit game or the high probability / second KT state is a predetermined number. (In this example, 1000 pieces, 2000 pieces,
It is a production that emphasizes that the number has reached 3000, 4000, and 5000).

If the received production control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 052I)
WS665), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS666). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, during the high probability / second KT state), the effect control CPU 120 adds 10 to the value of the prize ball counter (step 052IWS667). In addition, CP for production control
The U120 updates the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the prize ball number counter after addition (step 052IWS668).

Step 052 By executing the process of IWS665-S668, in this example,
The value of the prize ball counter and the prize ball number display are updated based on the fact that a small hit occurs during the high probability / second KT state and a prize is entered in the special winning opening. On the other hand, even in the KT state, if a special prize is won during the high probability / first KT state or the low probability / first KT state, the value of the prize ball counter is not updated. The prize ball number display is also not updated (however, only the value of the prize ball counter is not updated, and the value of the prize ball counter is not reset).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the small hit winning suggestion effect process for determining and executing the small hit winning suggestion effect (step 052IWS669). In addition, the "small hit winning suggestion effect" is an effect that is executed at the timing when a small hit occurs during the high probability / second KT state and a prize is generated in the special winning opening, and suggests the currently set set value. ..

Next, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 052IWS663 and executes the prize ball number display suggestion effect process (step 052IWS663). Next, the effect control CPU
120 executes the prize ball number emphasizing effect processing (step 052IWS664).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120
A process of storing the received effect control command and setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command is executed (step 052IWS670). And step 05
Move to 2IWS611.

(Suggestion production processing at the time of over winning)
FIG. 10-38 is a flowchart showing the suggestion effect processing (step 052IWS662) at the time of over winning. In the suggestion effect processing at the time of over winning, the effect control CPU 120
First, 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter (step 052IWS301). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the winning number counter after addition is 11 or more (step 052IWS302). If the value of the winning number counter is 11 or more (that is, if an over-winning to the large winning opening has occurred), the effect control CPU 1
20 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the over-winning suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence / absence and type of the over-winning suggestion effect, and determines the presence / absence and type of the over-winning suggestion effect (step). 052IWS303).

FIG. 10-39 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the suggestion effect determination table at the time of over winning.
As shown in FIG. 10-39, in the over-winning suggestion effect determination table, there is no over-winning suggestion effect, over-winning suggestion effect A, over-winning suggestion effect B, over-winning suggestion effect C, and over-winning. Judgment values are assigned to the suggestion effect D, the suggestion effect E at the time of over winning, and the suggestion effect F at the time of over winning.

As shown in FIG. 10-39, in this example, when the game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening, the winning display (in this example, “+15”) is displayed in the normal display color (white in this example) on the image display device 5. (Character display) is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-39, when the "over-winning suggestion effect A" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the blue display color on the image display device 5, and the speaker 8L is displayed. , 8R outputs a winning sound of sound A different from the normal sound. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect B" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the green display color on the image display device 5, and the speakers 8L and 8R win a sound B different from the normal sound. Sound is output. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect C" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the yellow display color on the image display device 5, and the speakers 8L and 8R win a sound C different from the normal sound. Sound is output. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect D" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the orange display color on the image display device 5, and the speakers 8L and 8R win a sound D different from the normal sound. Sound is output. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect E" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the red display color on the image display device 5, and the speakers 8L and 8R win a sound E different from the normal sound. Sound is output. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect F" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the rainbow-colored display color on the image display device 5, and the sound F different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output.

As shown in FIG. 10-39, different determination values are assigned to the over-winning suggestion effect determination table depending on which of the set values "1" to "6" the current set value is. In step 052IWS303, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615) and specifies the current set value. Then, the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect at the time of over winning are determined based on the determination value corresponding to the specified set value.

As shown in FIG. 10-39, in this example, when the set value is “1”, the ratio of determining the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect A is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "2", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect B at the time of over winning is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "3", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect C at the time of over winning is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "4", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect D at the time of over winning is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "5", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect E at the time of over winning is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "6", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect F at the time of over winning is relatively high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-39, in this example, when the set value is "1", the ratio of determining the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect, which is the sum of the over-winning suggestion effects A to F, is determined. 10
% + 8% + 7% + 5% + 5% + 5% = 40%, and 45% when the set value is "2".
When the set value is "3", it is 50%, and when the set value is "4", it is 55%.
When the set value is "5", it is 60%, and when the set value is "6", it is 65%.
Is. As described above, in this example, since over-winning occurs relatively rarely, the ratio of determining the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect is relatively high as compared with the small hit-winning suggestion effect described later. There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect is determined in step 052IWS303 (step 052IWS304). If it is determined to execute the over-winning suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the winning display according to the type of the determined over-winning suggestion effect (
Step 052IWS305). For example, if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect A at the time of over-winning, the image display device 5 controls to display the winning display in a blue display color. Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls to output a winning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the type of the determined over-winning suggestion effect (step 052IWS306). For example, if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect A at the time of over winning, the winning sound of the sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, when the value of the winning number counter is 10 or less (N in step 052IWS302).
, Or when it is decided that there is no suggestion effect at the time of over winning (N in step 052IWS304)
), The effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the winning display in a normal display color (white in this example) (step 052IWS307). Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls to output the winning sound of the normal sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 052IWS308).

(Suggestion production processing at the time of small hit prize)
FIG. 10-40 is a flowchart showing a suggestion effect processing (step 052IWS669) at the time of winning a small hit. In the small hit winning suggestion effect processing, the effect control CPU 120
First, a lottery process is performed based on random numbers using the small hit winning suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence / absence and type of the small hit winning suggestion effect, and the presence / absence and type of the small hit winning suggestion effect are determined. (Step 052IWS321).

FIG. 10-41 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the suggestion effect determination table at the time of winning a small hit. As shown in FIG. 10-41, in the small hit winning suggestion effect determination table, there is no small hit winning suggestion effect, small hit winning suggestion effect A, small hit winning suggestion effect B, and small hit winning suggestion effect. C,
Judgment values are assigned to the small hit winning suggestion effect D, the small hit winning suggestion effect E, and the small hit winning suggestion effect F, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 10-41, in this example, when the game ball wins in the special winning opening, the winning display (in this example, "+10") is displayed in the normal display color (white in this example) on the image display device 5. "
(Character display) is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-41, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect A" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the blue display color on the image display device 5, and the speaker is displayed. A winning sound of sound A different from the normal sound is output from 8L and 8R. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect B" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the green display color on the image display device 5, and the sound B different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect C" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the yellow display color on the image display device 5, and the sound C different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect D" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the orange display color on the image display device 5, and the speaker 8L is displayed.
, 8R outputs a winning sound of sound D different from the normal sound. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect E" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the red display color on the image display device 5, and the sound E different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect F" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the rainbow-colored display color on the image display device 5, and the sound F different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound of is output.

As shown in FIG. 10-41, different judgment values are assigned to the small hit winning suggestion effect determination table depending on which of the set values "1" to "6" the current set value is. .. In step 052IWS321, the effect control CPU 120 uses the set value storage area (step 0).
(Refer to 52IWS615), the stored contents are confirmed, and the current set value is specified. Then, the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect at the time of winning a small hit is determined based on the determination value corresponding to the specified set value.

As shown in FIG. 10-41, in this example, when the set value is “1”, the ratio of determining the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect A is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "2", the ratio of determining the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect B is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "3", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect C at the time of winning a small hit is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "4", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect D at the time of winning a small hit is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "5", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect E at the time of winning a small hit is relatively high. Further, in this example, the set value "6"
In the case of, the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect F at the time of winning a small hit is relatively high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-41, in this example, when the set value is "1", the ratio of determining the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect A to F, which is the sum of the small hit winning suggestion effects A to F. Is 2% + 1
% + 1% + 1% = 5%, 6% when the set value is "2", 7% when the set value is "3", and 7% when the set value is "4". Is 8%, 9% when the set value is "5", and 10% when the set value is "6". As described above, in this example, the ratio of determining the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect is relatively low as compared with the over-winning suggestion effect already described.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect is determined in step 052IWS321 (step 052IWS322). If the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the winning display according to the type of the determined small hit winning suggestion effect (step). 052IWS323). For example, if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect A at the time of a small hit winning, the image display device 5 controls to display the winning display in a blue display color. Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls to output a winning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the type of the determined small hit winning suggestion effect (step 052IWS324). For example, if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect A at the time of a small hit winning, the winning sound of the sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, when it is decided that there is no suggestion effect at the time of winning a small hit (N in step 052IWS322)
The effect control CPU 120 is used in the image display device 5 to display normal display colors (in this example,
Control to display the winning display in white) (step 052IWS325). Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls to output the winning sound of the normal sound from the speakers 8L and 8R ().
Step 052IWS326).

It should be noted that the reliability of the set value suggestion may be different depending on whether the suggestion effect at the time of over winning is executed or the suggestion effect at the time of small hit winning is executed. For example, the over-winning suggestion effect F can be executed at any of the set values "1" to "6", but is executed at a relatively high rate when the set value is "6", whereas the small hit If the suggestion effect F at the time of winning is executed, the set value "6"
It may be configured to be determined to be. On the contrary, for example, the small hit winning suggestion effect F can be executed at any of the set values "1" to "6", but is executed at a relatively high rate when the set value is "6". On the other hand, if the suggestion effect F at the time of over winning is executed, the set value "6" may be determined.

Further, in this example, the over-winning suggestion effect and the small hit-winning suggestion effect make the display mode of the winning display (display color in this example) different from the usual one, and output a winning sound different from the usual one. The case where it is executed by the aspect is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example
By making only one of the winning display display mode (display color in this example) and the winning sound different from the usual mode, the over-winning suggestion effect and the small hit winning suggestion effect are executed. It may be configured. In addition, for example, by displaying the effect display at the timing of the occurrence of over winning or the occurrence of winning in the special winning opening, or by changing the display color of the lamp or LED, a suggestion effect at the time of over winning or a small hit winning It may be configured to perform a time suggestion effect.

(Prize ball number display suggestion production processing)
FIG. 10-42 is a flowchart showing the prize ball number display suggestion effect processing (step 052IWS663). In the prize ball number display suggestion effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 456 first (step 052IW).
S341). In this example, if a game ball wins in the big prize opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added by 15 in steps 052IWS3.
In 41, if the value of the prize ball counter is 465, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 456 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 456 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value "4" or more (step 052IWS342).
.. Whether or not the current set value is the set value "4" or more can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "4" or more, the effect control CPU 120 uses a prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion effect, and draws lots based on random numbers. The process is performed to determine the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion effect A (step 052IWS343).
Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

FIG. 10-43 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table. Figure 1
As shown in 0-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed, a character display such as "456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is set. It is suggested that the value is "4" or more. As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is determined with a probability of 3%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect A
Is executed only when the set value is the set value "4" or more, so the prize ball number display suggestion effect A
Is executed, it is confirmed that the set value is at least "4" or more.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 456 for the first time (step 052IWS)
N) of 341, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 555 first (step 052IWS344). In this example, if a game ball wins in the big prize opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added by 15. Therefore, in step 052IWS344, the effect is controlled. If the value of the prize ball counter is 555, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 555 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 555 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value "5" or more (step 052IWS345).
.. Whether or not the current set value is the set value "5" or more can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "5" or more, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table, and has or does not have the prize ball number display suggestion effect B. (Step 052IWS346). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed,
A character display such as "555 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, suggesting that the current set value is the set value "5" or more. As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, 2
The execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is determined with a probability of%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed only when the set value is the set value "5" or more. Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed, at least the set value "5" is executed. It will be confirmed that it is more than that.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 555 for the first time (step 052IWS)
N) of 344, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 666 first (step 052IWS347). In this example, if a game ball wins in the big prize opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added by 15. Therefore, in step 052IWS347, for effect control. If the value of the prize ball counter is 675, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 666 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 666 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value "6" (step 052IWS348). Whether or not the current set value is the set value "6" can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "6", the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the prize ball number display suggestion effect effect determination table, and determines the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion effect C. Determine (step 052IWS349). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed,
A character display such as "666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, suggesting that the current set value is the set value "6". As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is determined with a probability of 1%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed only when the set value is the set value "6". Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed, the set value "6" is used. It will be confirmed that there is.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 666 for the first time (step 052IWS)
N) of 347, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2456 first (step 052IWS350). In this example, 15 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the big winning opening during the big hit game, and 10 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the special winning opening during the high probability / second KT state. Is obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added in increments of 15 or 10. Therefore, in step 052IWS350, the effect control CPU 120 determines the prize ball if the value of the prize ball counter is 2460 or 2465. It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2456 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2456 first, the effect control CPU 120 will be pressed.
Check whether the current set value is set value "4" or more (step 052IWS351)
). Whether or not the current set value is the set value "4" or more can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is set value "4" or more, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the prize ball number display suggestion effect effect determination table, and has or does not have the prize ball number display suggestion effect D. Is determined (step 052IWS352). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed,
A character display such as "2456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, suggesting that the current set value is the set value "4" or more. As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example,
The execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is decided with a probability of 5%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed only when the set value is the set value "4" or more. Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed, the set value "4" is executed. It will be confirmed that the above is the case.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2456 for the first time (step 052IW)
N) of S350, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2555 first (step 052IWS353). In this example, 15 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the big winning opening during the big hit game, and 10 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the special winning opening during the high probability / second KT state. Is obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added in increments of 15 or 10. Therefore, in step 052IWS353, the effect control CPU 120
Determines that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2555 first if the value of the prize ball counter is 2555 or 2560.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2555 first, the effect control CPU 120 will be pressed.
Check if the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "5" (step 052IWS354)
). Whether or not the current set value is the set value "5" or more can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "5" or more, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the prize ball number display suggestion effect effect determination table, and has or does not have the prize ball number display suggestion effect E. (Step 052IWS355). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed,
A character display such as "2555 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, suggesting that the current set value is the set value "5" or more. As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example,
The execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is decided with a probability of 3%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed only when the set value is the set value "5" or more. Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed, the set value "5" is executed. It will be confirmed that the above is the case.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2555 for the first time (step 052IW)
N) of S353, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2666 first (step 052IWS356). In this example, 15 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the big winning opening during the big hit game, and 10 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the special winning opening during the high probability / second KT state. Is obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added in increments of 15 or 10. Therefore, in step 052IWS356, the effect control CPU 120
Determines that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2666 first if the value of the prize ball counter is 2670 or 2675.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2666 first, the effect control CPU 120 will be pressed.
It is confirmed whether or not the current set value is the set value "6" (step 052IWS357).
Whether or not the current set value is the set value "6" can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "6", the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the prize ball number display suggestion effect effect determination table, and determines the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion effect F. decide(
Step 052IWS358). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed,
A character display such as "2666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, suggesting that the current set value is the set value "6". As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, 2%
The execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is determined with the probability of. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed only when the set value is the set value "6", so that the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed.
Is executed, it is confirmed that the set value is "6".

Next, the effect control CPU 120 is set in steps 052IWS343, S346, S34.
It is confirmed whether or not the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect is decided in 9, S352, S355, and S358 (step 052IWS359). If the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to execute the determined type of prize ball number display suggestion effect (step 052IWS360). For example, prize ball number display suggestion effect A
If it is determined to execute the above, the image display device 5 controls to display a character display such as "456 OVER".

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-43, when viewed from the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to C executed during the big hit game, the period during the big hit game becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the execution probability of the prize ball number display suggestion effect decreases to 3%, 2%, and 1%, while the set value "4" or more is confirmed, the set value "5" or more is confirmed, and the set value " 6 ”The accuracy of confirmation and suggestion of set values is increasing. Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-43, when viewed in the prize ball number display suggestion effects D to F executed during the period during the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH), the small hit RUSH is in progress. As the period of the prize balls increases and the number of prize balls increases, the execution probability of the prize ball number display suggestion effect decreases to 5%, 3%, and 2%, while the set value "4" or more is confirmed and the set value. "5
The accuracy of confirming the above, and confirming the set value "6" and suggesting the set value is increasing.

Not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, as the period during the big hit game or the period during the small hit RUSH increases and the number of prize balls increases, the probability of executing the prize ball number display suggestion effect increases. It may be configured to go. Further, for example, as the period during the big hit game or the period during the small hit RUSH becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases, the accuracy of suggesting the set value may decrease.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-43, the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to C executed during the big hit game and the prize ball number display suggestion executed during the small hit RUSH period. Direction D to F
Although the case where the execution probability of the prize ball number display suggestion effect is different is shown in the above, not limited to such a mode, the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed with the same execution probability.

(Prize ball number emphasis production processing)
FIG. 10-44 is a flowchart showing the prize ball number emphasizing effect processing (step 052IWS664). In the prize ball number emphasis effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first sets the value of the prize ball counter to a threshold value of every 1000 (1000, 2000, 3000, 4000 in this example).
It is confirmed whether or not the first arrival at 5000) is reached (step 052IWS371). In this example, if a game ball wins in the big prize opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added by 15. Therefore, in step 052IWS371, the effect is controlled. For example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 1000 or 1005, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 1000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 2000 or 2005, the value of the prize ball counter is 200.
It is determined that 0 is reached first. Also, for example, the value of the prize ball counter is 3000 or 3.
If it is 005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 3000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 4000 or 4005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 4000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 5000 or 5005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 5000 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches the threshold value for every 1000 first, the effect control CPU 1
Reference numeral 20 denotes a prize ball number emphasizing effect determination table for determining the presence or absence of the prize ball number emphasizing effect.
A lottery process based on random numbers is performed to determine whether or not to emphasize the number of prize balls (step 052IW).
S372).

FIG. 10-45 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the prize ball number emphasizing effect determination table. Figure 10-
As shown in 45, in this example, when the value of the prize ball counter reaches 1000,
The execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect A is decided with a probability of 50%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect A is executed, a character display such as "1000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5.
Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect B is determined with a probability of 60%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect B is executed, a character display such as "2000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 3000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect C is determined with a probability of 70%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect C is executed, a character display such as "3000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 4000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect D is determined with a probability of 80%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect D is executed, "40" is displayed on the image display device 5.
A character display such as "00 OVER" is displayed. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 5000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect E is determined with a probability of 90%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect E is executed, the image display device 5 displays "5000 OVE".
A character display such as "R" is displayed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect is determined in step 052IWS372 (step 052IWS373). If the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to execute the determined type of prize ball number emphasizing effect (step 052IWS374). For example, if it is decided to execute the prize ball number emphasizing effect A, the image display device 5 displays "1000 O".
Controls the display of characters such as "VER".

In this example, when the number of prize balls reaches 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, and 5000, the prize ball number emphasizing effect can be executed. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, not only when the prize ball number emphasis effect can be executed in all of these cases, but also when the prize ball number reaches 1000, 2000, and 3000, the prize ball number emphasis effect can be executed. It may be configured. Also, for example, the number of prize balls is 600.
The prize ball number emphasizing effect may be configured to be feasible even when the number reaches 0 or 7000, and various modes can be considered.

As shown in FIGS. 10-44 and 10-45, the prize ball number emphasizing effect is different from the prize ball number display suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 10-42 and 10-43, and is irrelevant to the current set value. It is a production that is decided and executed. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, by changing the display mode of the prize ball number emphasizing effect, the prize ball number emphasizing effect may be configured to be feasible in a mode suggesting the current set value. For example, "1000 OVER" or "" with a display color different from the usual one.
By displaying a character display such as "2000 OVER", the current set value may be suggested.

(Variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 10-46 is a flowchart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (step 052IWS811). Whether or not the variation pattern command is received is determined by, for example, setting a variation pattern command reception flag indicating that the variation pattern command has been received when the variation pattern command is received in the command analysis process (step S75). Step 052IWS811
Then, it is sufficient to confirm whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set.

If the variation pattern command is received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 052I).
WS812). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the non-KT state), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 executes the variation display of the first special symbol. Is confirmed (step 052IWS813). Whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the first variation patterns # 01 to # 09. It can be determined by confirming whether or not. Unless it is the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (that is, the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol), the process is terminated as it is. When executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 12
0 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 052IWS815).

If the 1st KT state flag or the 2nd KT state flag is not set (ie,
(If it is in the KT state), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the case of executing the variation display of the second special symbol (step 052IWS814). Whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the second variation patterns # 01 to # 34. It can be determined by confirming whether or not. Unless it is the case to execute the variable display of the second special symbol (that is,
(If the variable display of the first special symbol is executed), the process is terminated as it is. When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 052IWS815).

By executing the process of steps 052IWS812 to S815, in the feature unit 052IW, in the non-KT state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the first special symbol. When it is executed and in the KT state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. In other words, even when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is in the KT state, or
Even when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not executed in the non-KT state.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 10-47 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (step 052IWS920). Whether or not to execute the variation display of the first special symbol is determined by, for example, that the variation pattern command stored in the variation pattern command storage area specifies the first variation patterns # 01 to # 09. It can be determined by confirming whether or not there is. When executing the variation display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation display this time is a small hit (step 052IWS921). Whether or not the variable display this time is a small hit is checked, for example, whether or not the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area is the display result 7 designation command. It can be judged by. If it is a small hit variation, the effect control CPU 120 determines a non-reach off symbol as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol (step 052IWS922).

As already explained, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, there is only a case where the small hit is A, and the game ball to the special winning opening during the small hit game. You can hardly expect a prize. Therefore, in this example, when the process of steps 052IWS920 to S922 is executed and the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained,
By forcibly stopping and displaying the non-reach out-of-reach symbol, the player is prevented from having excessive expectations.

When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed (N in step 052IWS920) or when it is not a small hit variation (N in step 052IWS921), the effect control CPU 120 stops the decorative symbol according to the variation display result. (Step 052IWS923)
.. In step 052IWS923, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the display result 1 designation command (when it is determined to be out of alignment), only the outlier symbol or the left and right decorative symbols in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols do not completely match are received. Determine the combination of matching out-of-reach symbols. Further, when the display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 10R probability variation jackpot is determined), the combination of the symbols aligned with the symbol "7" among the odd-numbered symbols on the left, middle, and right is determined. In addition, when the display result 3 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 6R probability variation jackpot is determined), the combination of the symbols in which the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are odd-numbered symbols other than "7" is determined. In addition, when the display result 5 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 2R probability variation jackpot is determined), the combination of symbols whose decorative symbol inside includes a special symbol (in this example, the symbol "R") is determined. .. In addition, when a display result 4 designation command or a display result 6 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot), a combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are even numbers. To determine. When the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), the combination of the decorative symbols of the small hit symbol (for example, "135") is determined.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation display this time is out of order (step 052IWS924). To check whether the variable display this time is out of order, for example, check whether the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area is the display result 1 designation command. Can be determined by. If there is no deviation fluctuation, the process proceeds to step 052IWS928 as it is. If it is out of alignment (Y in step 052IWS924), the effect control CPU 120 executes a set value suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the set value suggestion effect that suggests the currently set setting value. (Step 052IWS925).

In step 052IWS925, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the set value stored in the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). Then, the effect control CPU 120 uses a table corresponding to the specified set value as a set value suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence / absence and type of the set value suggestion effect, and performs a lottery process based on a random number to set. Determine the presence / absence and type of value suggestion effect.

FIG. 10-48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the set value suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-48, there is no set value suggestion effect in the set value suggestion effect determination table.
Judgment values are assigned to the set value suggestion effect A, the set value suggestion effect B, the set value suggestion effect C, the set value suggestion effect D, the set value suggestion effect E, and the set value suggestion effect F, respectively.

The set value suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 10-48, the set value “1” is used. In some cases, the execution rate is the highest. Further, the set value suggestion effect B is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a green display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 10-48, the set value “2”. The execution rate is the highest when it is.
Further, the set value suggestion effect C is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a yellow display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 10-48, the set value “3” The execution rate is the highest when it is. Further, the set value suggestion effect D is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in an orange display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 10-48, the set value “4” The execution rate is the highest when it is. Further, the set value suggestion effect E is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a red display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 10-48, the set value “5” The execution rate is the highest when it is. Further, the set value suggestion effect F is, for example,
This is an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a rainbow-colored display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 10-48, the execution rate is highest when the set value is “6”. ..

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS926). If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not the second KT state), the process proceeds to step 052IWS928 as it is. If the second KT status flag is set (Y in step 052IWS926),
That is, in the second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 is in the second KT state (small hit R).
The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect suggesting that USH) continues is executed (step 052IWS92).
7).

FIG. 10-49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-49, in the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table, there is no small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, and small hit R.
Judgment values are assigned to each of the USH continuation suggestion effect B. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined effect image in a blue display color on the image display device 5. Further, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined effect image in a red display color on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 10-49, in this example, when the set value is "1", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the set value is "2", the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is produced. The execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest when the setting value is "3", and the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest when the setting value is "4". Is the next highest, and when the set value is "5", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest, and when the setting value is "6", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest. It's getting low.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-49, the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest when the set value is "1", and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is when the set value is "6".
Execution rate is the highest.

In this example, the jackpot probability is the lowest when the set value is "1" and the jackpot probability is the highest when the set value is "6", but when the second KT state is in the state, the jackpot occurs. Since the second KT state may end as an opportunity, the setting value "1" is the setting state in which the second KT state is most likely to continue (the probability of continuation is high), and the setting value "6" is set. In some cases, it can be said that the second KT state is the setting state in which it is most difficult to continue (the degree of continuation expectation is low).
Therefore, in this example, when the set value is "1", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the set value is "6", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the lowest. Therefore, by executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, the second
It is possible to raise the expectation that the KT state (small hit RUSH) will continue.

As described above, the continuation expectation of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) is the expectation that the control period to the second KT state will be extended without the occurrence of a big hit.

Further, in this example, when the set value is "1", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest. Therefore, especially when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is executed, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is executed. It is possible to further increase the expectation that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) will continue.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the variation pattern of the decorative symbol to be used, the set value suggestion effect, and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect based on the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command. For the setting value suggestion effect and small hit RUSH
The process table according to the continuation suggestion effect is selected (step 052IWS928).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the process table selected in step 052IWS928 to the process timer and starts the process timer (step 052IWS929). Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect device (image display device 5, various lamps, speaker 8L) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1).
, 8R) (step 052IWS930). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a control signal (display control execution data) to the VDP in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14. In addition, the speaker 8L,
A control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13 in order to output the voice from the 8R.

When it is decided to execute the set value suggestion effect, the decorative symbol is executed by executing step 052IWS930 and the variable display effect process (step S172) according to the process table including the set value suggestion effect selected in step 052IWS928. The set value suggestion effect is executed while the fluctuation display of

If it is decided to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, step 052IWS
By executing step 052IWS930 and the variable display effect processing (step S172) according to the process table including the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect selected in 928, the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (during the out-of-order fluctuation in the second KT state). The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time in the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer and starts the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer (step 052IWS931). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process (step S172) during variable display (step 052IWS932).

(Variable display production processing)
FIG. 10-50 shows the variable display during effect processing (step S17) in the effect control process process.
It is a flowchart which shows 2). In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 12
For 0, first, the value of the process timer is subtracted by 1 (step 052IWS8101).
), The value of the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer is subtracted by 1 (step 052IWS8102). When the process timer times out (step 052IWS8103), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 052IWS8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step 052IWS8105).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS8106). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the non-KT state), the effect control CPU 120 has received the first symbol confirmation designation command (for example, the first symbol confirmation command). 1 Whether or not the confirmation command reception flag is set) is confirmed (step 052IWS8107). If the first symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control C
The PU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8110).

If the first symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the first forced symbol confirmation designation command (for example, whether the first forced confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 052IWS8108). If the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 052IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with an outlier symbol (step 052IWS8109). Then, the effect control CPU 120
The value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8110).

If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set in step 052IWS8106 (that is, if it is in the KT state), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the second symbol confirmation designation command (for example, the first 2 Whether or not the confirmation command reception flag is set) is confirmed (step 052IWS8111). If the second symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 052IWS8114).
).

If the second symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the second forced symbol confirmation designation command (for example, whether the second forced confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 052IWS8112). If the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 052IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with an outlier symbol (step 052IWS8113). Then, the effect control CPU 120
The value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8114).

If the first forced symbol confirmation command is not received in step 052IWS8108, or if the second forced symbol confirmation command is not received in step 052IWS8112, the effect control CPU 120 uses the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer. Checks if has timed out (step 052IWS8115). If the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer has timed out, the effect control CPU 120 switches to the process data for the standby effect (step 052IWS8116). Then, the effect control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 052IWS8117).

In this example, as described above, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a miss, a small hit, or a probability variation big hit, is being executed. In the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. In addition, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol, which is a miss, a small hit, or a probability variation big hit, is being executed, during the small hit game. , The update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. The fact that the decorative symbol variation time timer timed out in step 052IWS8115 without receiving any of the symbol confirmation designation commands means that
In this case, the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed. In this case, in this example, the processing of steps 052IWS8116 and S8117 is executed to switch to the standby effect, and then the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is restarted, and finally one special The standby effect is continued until the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is completed. The "standby effect" is, for example, an effect in which the image display device 5 puts the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right into a temporary stop state in a state of shaking fluctuation or slight fluctuation.

For example, in the image display device 5, when the fluctuation display of the system small symbol or the fourth symbol is also executed, the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the first special When the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed, the variable display of these system small symbols and the fourth special symbol is also continuously executed. Then, when the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is restarted and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finally stopped and displayed, these system small symbols and the fourth symbol are displayed. The fluctuation display is also stopped.

(Waiting processing per special figure)
10-51 and 10-52 are flowcharts showing a special figure hit waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process process. In the special symbol hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set (step 052IWS).
9701). If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, step 052IWS970
Move to 6. In the feature unit 052IW, when the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step 052IWS9705.
Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when the jackpot effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the jackpot symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the effect during the jackpot has not yet been executed. Therefore, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 052IWS9703 is performed. The process proceeds to step 052IWS9706 without execution.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set. (Step 052IWS9702). Stop symbol display flag 2
If is set, the process proceeds to step 052IWS9717. This feature part 052I
In W, when the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, step 052IW
The stop symbol display flag 2 is set in S9716. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when the small hit medium effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the small hit medium effect has not yet been executed. Therefore, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 052IWS9703 is displayed. The process proceeds to step 052IWS9717 without executing the process.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol (missing symbol, jackpot symbol) of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols being stopped and displayed on the image display device 5. , Small hit symbol) is controlled to be fixedly displayed (step 052IWS9703). When the first forced symbol confirmation command or the second forced symbol confirmation command is received and the process of replacing the second forced symbol confirmation command with the misaligned symbol is executed in steps 052IWS8109 and S8113, the effect control CP is executed in step 052IWS9703.
The U120 controls to confirm and display the outlier symbol.

When the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (Y in step 052IWS9704), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 052IWS9705).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received (step 052IWS9706). When the jackpot start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 052).
IWS9707).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the prize ball number display is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS9708). Unless the prize ball number display is being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 has a jackpot type of 10R probability variation jackpot, which is 6
Check whether it is a R probability variation jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot (step 052IWS9)
709). Whether or not the jackpot type is 10R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 6R normal jackpot is determined, for example, by the received display result specification command being the display result 2 specification command ~
Display result 4 Judgment can be made by confirming whether or not the command is a designated command. If it is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the prize ball number display (step 052IWS97).
10).

By executing the processes of steps 052IWS9708 to S9710, in this example, the display of the number of prize balls is started when the jackpot game based on the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, or the 6R normal jackpot is started. On the other hand, even if it is a big hit, the display of the number of prize balls is not started when the big hit game based on the 2R probability variation big hit or the 2R normal big hit is started.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the effect during the big hit (step 052IWS9711). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 052IWS9712), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component).
) Is executed (step 052IWS9713).

After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during the jackpot (step S176) (step 052IWS9714).

If the big hit symbol is not confirmed and displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (N in step 052IWS9704), and if the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (Y in step 052IWS9715), the effect control CPU 120 is stopped. The symbol display flag 2 is set (step 052IWS9716).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 052IWS9717). When the small hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 052).
IWS9718).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the small hit medium effect (step 052IWS9719). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 052IWS9720), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component).
) Is executed (step 052IWS9721).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process (step S174) (step 052IWS9722).

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (that is, when the missed symbol is displayed) (N in step 052IWS9704 and N in step 052IWS9715), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 052IWS9723).

(Ending production processing)
FIG. 10-53 is a flowchart showing an ending effect process (step S177) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step 052).
IWS951). The effect period measurement timer is set based on the completion of all rounds of the jackpot game in the jackpot effect process (see step S176).
Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step 052IWS952).

When the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step 052IWS952), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 052IW).
S953), production device (image display device 5, frame LED 9, frame LED 9, according to the content of process data n
A process for controlling the speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) is executed (step 052IWS954). For example, an effect of displaying the end of the jackpot or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 052IWS955), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 052IWS956). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step 052IWS957).

If the production period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step 052IWS952),
The effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot game to be completed this time is a jackpot game based on a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot (step 052IWS958). Whether or not the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 6R normal jackpot is determined is, for example, whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 3 designation command or the display result 4 designation command. Can be determined by checking. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to end the display of the prize ball number display (step 052IWS959).

Step 052 By executing the processes of IWS958 to S959, in this example,
When a jackpot game based on a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot is executed, the prize ball number display is displayed during the jackpot game, and the prize ball number display is deleted when the jackpot game is completed. The prize ball number display is not displayed during the high probability / first KT state or the low probability / first KT state after the end.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot game to be completed this time is a jackpot game based on the 2R probability variation jackpot (step 052IWS960). Whether or not it is a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 5 designation command. If it is a 2R probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the prize ball number display is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS961). If the prize ball number display is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the prize ball number display (step 052IWS962).

Step 052 By executing the process of IWS960 to S962, in this example,
When a jackpot game based on a 2R probability variation jackpot is executed, the prize ball number display is not displayed during the jackpot game (however, in this example, the prize ball number display is displayed even before the 2R probability variation jackpot. If so, the prize ball number display is continuously displayed, but the display is not updated), and the prize ball number display is displayed during the high probability / second KT state after the end of the big hit game.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 052IWS963).

(Production example)
Next, an effect mode of the effect executed by the feature unit 052IW will be described. First, an effect mode of the set value suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 10-54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode of the set value suggestion effect. In this example, it is possible to execute the setting value suggestion effect in the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of alignment. As shown in FIG. 10-54 (A), the image display device 5
In, when the variable display of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right is being executed, when the execution timing of the set value suggestion effect is reached, as shown in FIGS. 10-54 (B1) to (B3), the variable display of the decorative symbol is being displayed. The set value suggestion effect is executed.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-54 (B1) to (B3), the set value suggestion effect is executed by displaying the predetermined character image 052IW001,052IW002,052IW003 on the image display device 5. In this case, for example, when executing the set value suggestion effect A, as shown in FIG. 10-54 (B1), it is set by displaying a predetermined character image 052IW001 in a blue display color on the image display device 5. The value suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, when the set value suggestion effect C is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-54 (B2), the image display device 5 has a predetermined character image 052IW00 in a yellow display color.
The set value suggestion effect is executed according to the mode of displaying 2. Further, for example, the setting value suggestion effect E
When the above is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-54 (B3), the set value suggestion effect is executed by displaying the predetermined character image 052IW003 in the red display color on the image display device 5.

In the example shown in FIGS. 10-54, the case where the set value suggestion effect A, the set value suggestion effect C, and the set value suggestion effect E are executed is shown, but for example, when the set value suggestion effect B is executed. Is displayed with a predetermined character image in a green display color, a predetermined character image is displayed with an orange display color when the set value suggestion effect D is executed, and a rainbow is displayed when the set value suggestion effect F is executed. A predetermined character image is displayed in a color display color.

In this example, which setting value is currently set for the player depending on whether a character image having a different display color is displayed and the setting value suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of alignment. You can have a sense of expectation for it.

Next, the production mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 10-55 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. In this example, the second K
Small hit RUS in the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of the T state (small hit RUSH)
H It is possible to execute a continuous suggestion effect.

In this example, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (A), for example, the image display device 5 displays a character display 052IW004 such as "small hit RUSH", and the second KT state. It is recognizable that it is inside. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (A), when the image display device 5 is executing the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols during the second KT state, the execution timing of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. Then, Fig. 10-5
As shown in 5 (B1) to (B3), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-55 (B1) and 10-55 (B2), the small hit RUSH is configured to display a predetermined effect image 052IW005,052IW006 on the image display device 5.
The continuation suggestion effect is executed. In this example, the predetermined production image 052IW005,052
A case where an image of a racing car is displayed is shown as IW006. in this case,
For example, when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (B1), the small hit is displayed in the image display device 5 in a blue display color to display a predetermined effect image 052IW005. The RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. Also, for example, small hit RU
When the SH continuation suggestion effect B is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (B2), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is produced by displaying a predetermined effect image 052IW005 in a red display color on the image display device 5. Is executed.

In this example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed by executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect during the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of the second KT state, or the effect image of any display color is displayed to suggest the small hit RUSH continuation. Depending on whether or not the effect is executed, the player can be expected to continue the second KT state (small hit RUSH).

Next, the display mode of the right-handed notification will be described. FIG. 10-56 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display mode of the right-handed notification. In this example, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a big hit is performed, the jackpot game is in progress. As shown in FIG. 10-56 (1), the right-handed display 26 is turned on by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) (see steps 052IWS2018A and S2018B). Further, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (1), the right-handed lighting notification LED 37 is turned on by the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS).
See 2019A, S2019B, S639). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (1), the effect control CPU 120 causes a right-handed display 05 on the display screen of the image display device 5.
2IW007 is displayed (see step 052IWS624).

Further, in this example, when a small hit is obtained in the variable display of the second special symbol, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (2) during the small hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on by the CPU 103) (step 052IWS2).
See 024B). In addition, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, FIG.
As shown in 0-56 (2), the right-handed notification LED3 is operated by the effect control CPU 120.
7 is lit (see steps 052IWS2025B, S639). However, unlike during the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (2), the right-handed display 052IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

On the other hand, in this example, when a small hit is obtained in the variable display of the first special symbol, FIG. 10-56 (
As shown in 3), during the small hit game, the right-handed display 26 is lit and the right-handed notification LED is displayed.
No. 37 is not lit, and the right-handed display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5
Is not displayed either.

Next, the production modes of the over-winning suggestion effect, the small hit winning suggestion effect, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect will be described. 10-57 and 10-58 are explanatory views for explaining the production modes of the over-winning suggestion effect, the small hit winning suggestion effect, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect. In FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, the display screens change in the order of (A), (B), (C), and so on. Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, a case where the jackpot game state is controlled based on the 10R probability variation jackpot is shown.

As shown in FIG. 10-57 (A), during the big hit game, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "Big hit!" And the number of rounds such as "Round 2". The prize ball number display 052IW008 is displayed. In addition, when a normal prize (a prize that is not an over prize) occurs in the big prize opening during the big hit game, the prize is displayed in the normal display color (white in this example) as shown in FIG. 10-57 (B). 052IW009 (In this example, "+15"
(Character display) is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see steps 052IWS307 and S308).

Next, it is assumed that an over-winning occurs during the jackpot game, and the execution of the suggestion effect at the time of over-winning is decided based on the occurrence of the over-winning. In this case, FIG. 10-57 (
As shown in C), the winning display 052IW according to the type of suggestive effect at the time of over winning
010 (in this example, the character display of "+15") is displayed, and the speakers 8L and 8R
Therefore, a winning sound is output according to the type of suggestion effect at the time of over winning (step 0).
52 IWS305, S306). For example, when the over-winning suggestion effect A is executed, the winning display is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and the winning sound of the sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, it is assumed that the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is determined based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 456 and the number of prize balls reaches 456. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-57 (D), the image display device 5 displays characters such as "456 OVER" 052IW01.
1 is displayed, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed (see step 052IWS360).
..

In this example, the case where the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed is shown. However, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is decided, the image display device 5 displays "555". O
A character display such as "VER" is displayed, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect C, the image display device 5 displays "666".
A character display such as "OVER" is displayed, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-58 (E), when the jackpot game is completed, the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / second KT state after the jackpot game is completed. Further, when controlled to the high probability / second KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-58 (F), a character display such as "Small hit RUSH in progress!" Is displayed, and the prize ball number display 052IW008 continues. Is displayed.

Next, during the high probability / second KT state, a small hit occurs and a game ball wins the special winning opening, but if it is not decided to execute the suggestion effect at the time of the small hit winning, FIG. 10-58. As shown in (F), the winning display 052IW012 (in this example, white) in the normal display color (white in this example).
(Character display of "+10") is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see steps 052IWS325 and S326).

Next, during the high probability / second KT state, a small hit occurs and a game ball wins in the special winning opening, and a suggestion effect at the time of small hit winning is generated based on the winning of the game ball in the special winning opening. It is assumed that the execution of is decided. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-58 (G), the winning display 052IW013 (in this example, the character display of "+10") is displayed according to the type of the determined small hit winning suggestion effect, and the speaker. From 8L and 8R, a winning sound corresponding to the type of the determined small hit winning suggestion effect is output (see steps 052IWS323 and S324).
For example, when the small hit winning suggestion effect A is executed, the winning display is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and the winning sound of the sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, it is assumed that the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is determined based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 2666 during the high probability / second KT state and the number of prize balls reaches 2666. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-58 (H), in the image display device 5, "2666 OVER"
, Etc. 052IW014 is displayed, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed (see step 052IWS360).

In this example, the case where the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed is shown. However, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is decided, the image display device 5 “2456”.
A character display such as "OVER" is displayed, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect E, the image display device 5 displays "25".
A character display such as "55 OVER" is displayed, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, although the illustration is omitted, for example, the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect A is determined based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 1000. In that case, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as "1000 OVER", and the prize ball number emphasizing effect A is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect B is determined based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 2000, the image display device 5 displays "
A character display such as "2000 OVER" is displayed, and the prize ball number emphasizing effect B is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect C is decided based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 3000, a character display such as "3000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasis effect C is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect D is decided based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 4000, a character display such as "4000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasizing effect D is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect E is decided based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 5000, a character display such as "5000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasizing effect E is executed.

In this example, the number of prize balls is 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555,
Or, depending on the fact that 2666 pieces have been reached (in other words, the total of the game values given by the small hits during the big hit game or the high probability / second KT state), the prize ball number display suggestion effect A ~ Although the case where F is executed is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example
Depending on the number of small hits that occurred during the high probability / second KT state and the number of executions of the variation display executed during the high probability / second KT state, the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F are executed at different selection ratios. It may be configured to do so, and various aspects are conceivable.

Next, the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol will be described. FIG. 10-59 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit, the variable display of the first special symbol is a probable variable jackpot (10R in this example).
In the case of a jackpot fluctuation that results in a probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot), FIG. 10-59 (Fig. 10-59)
As shown in A), even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, step 052IWS1120A, Step 052 See Y in IWS1128A).

On the other hand, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation that is a normal jackpot (6R normal jackpot in this example), the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 10-59 (B). When this is done, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as an off symbol (step 0).
52 IWS1128A N, see step 052IWS1129A).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol that is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-59 (C). Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, step 052IWS1120A, Step 052 See N in IWS1127A).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit, the variable display of the second special symbol is a probable variable jackpot (10R in this example).
In the case of a jackpot fluctuation that is a probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot), as shown in FIG. 10-59 (D), even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation of the second special symbol The display continues. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1).
120B, see Y in step 052IWS1128B).

On the other hand, when the variation display of the second special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation that is a normal jackpot (2R normal jackpot in this example), the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 10-59 (E). When this is done, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as an off symbol (step 0)
52 IWS1128B N, see step 052IWS1129B).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-59 (F), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, step 052IWS1120B, Step 052 See N in IWS1127B).

The control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed is not limited to the mode shown in this example. Hereinafter, a modified example of the control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed will be described.

(Modification example 1)
FIG. 10-60 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first modification. In FIGS. 10-60, steps 052IWS1120A-S
The processing of 1127A is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 10-19, but in the first modification, the determination processing of step 052IWS1128A shown in FIG. 10-19 does not exist.

In the first modification, if the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU
The 103 directly proceeds to the process of step S1129A, and controls to transmit the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A).
.. In addition, in FIG. 10-60, the process of step 052IWS1130A is shown in FIG. 10-1.
It is the same as the process shown in 9.

FIG. 10-61 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation processing in the first modification. In FIG. 10-61, the processing of steps 052IWS1120B to S1127B is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 10-22, but in the modified example 1, the determination processing of step 052IWS1128B shown in FIG. 10-22 does not exist. ..

In the first modification, if the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU
The 103 directly proceeds to the process of step S1129B, and controls to transmit the second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129B).
.. In addition, in FIG. 10-61, the process of step 052IWS1130B is shown in FIG. 10-2.
It is the same as the process shown in 2.

FIG. 10-62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the first modification.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the fluctuation display of the first special symbol a jackpot fluctuation that becomes a probability variation jackpot? As shown in FIG. 10-62 (A), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly missed, regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is a normal jackpot. Stop is displayed (N of step 052IWS1127A, step 052IWS112
See 9A).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol that is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-62 (B), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, step 052IWS1120A, Step 052 See N in IWS1127A).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the fluctuation display of the second special symbol a jackpot fluctuation that becomes a probability variation jackpot? As shown in FIG. 10-62 (C), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly missed, regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is a normal jackpot. Stop is displayed (N of step 052IWS1127B, step 052IWS112
See 9B).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol which is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-62 (D). Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, step 052IWS1120B, Step 052 See N in IWS1127B).

(Modification 2)
FIG. 10-63 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the second modification. In FIGS. 10-63, steps 052IWS1120A-S
The processing of 1126A is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 10-19, but in the modified example 2, the processing of step 052IWS1127C is included instead of the determination processing of steps 052IWS1127A and S1128A shown in FIG. 10-19. ..

In the second modification, if the variation display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A). In FIG. 10-63, the process of step 052IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19.

FIG. 10-64 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation processing in the second modification. In FIG. 10-64, the processing of steps 052IWS1120B to S1126B is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 10-22, but in the modified example 2, the determination processing of steps 052IWS1127B and S1128B shown in FIG. Instead, step 052I
Includes processing of WS1127D.

In the second modification, if the variation display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129B). In addition, in FIG. 10-64, the process of step 052IWS1130B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-22.

FIG. 10-65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modified example 2.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the fluctuation display of the first special symbol a jackpot fluctuation that becomes a probability variation jackpot? As shown in FIG. 10-65 (A), even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continued regardless of whether the large hit fluctuation is usually a big hit. In particular,
During the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, step 052IWS1120A, Step 052IWS1
See Y in 127C).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol that becomes a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-65 (B), When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see step 052IWS1127C N, step 052IWS1129A).
..

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the fluctuation display of the second special symbol a jackpot fluctuation that becomes a probability variation jackpot? As shown in FIG. 10-65 (C), the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is usually a jackpot. In particular,
During the small hit game, the update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, step 052IWS1120B, Step 052IWS1
See Y in 127D).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol which is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-65 (D). When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see step 052IWS1127D N, step 052IWS1129B).
..

Further, as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol, other than those shown in the modification 1 and the modification 2, for example, the deviation If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the forced loss is stopped, while the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that is a small hit is performed. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation may be continued.

Further, for example, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol which is the 10R probability variation jackpot, the small hit symbol is forcibly stopped and stopped, while the 2R probability variation jackpot is obtained. If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation may be continued.

Further, for example, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the normal state (low probability / low base state), the fluctuation display of the second special symbol being executed is off and fluctuates. Either the small hit fluctuation or the big hit fluctuation may be configured to stop forcibly. With such a configuration, in this example, when the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed in the low probability / high base state, the transition to the low probability / low base state is performed (see FIG. 10-29).
The second hold memory is 1 to 4 when the variable display of 0 times is completed and the state shifts to the low probability / low base state.
When there is a second hold memory that becomes a big hit in the accumulated pieces, it is possible to prevent a big hit at an unintended timing by forcibly stopping the game. Further, in particular, in a game machine configured to be controllable to a KT state as in this example, a normal state (low probability /
By performing a right-handed operation in the low base state), the second start winning opening, which is easy to start winning, is made to start winning, and the first starting winning opening is made to start winning while the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. 1 It is also possible to have a strategy that allows the variable display of special symbols to be performed, which is effective as a preventive measure for such a strategy.

As described above, various modes can be considered as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed.

(Modification 3)
Further, the feature unit 052IW controls to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol by the same control in the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol. Although the case (see FIG. 10-59) is shown, different controls may be used. Figure 10-
66 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation processing in the modified example 3. In the modified example 3, the first special symbol variation process is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19. In FIGS. 10-66, the processing of steps 052IWS1120B to S1125B is shown in FIG.
It is the same as those processes shown in -22, but in the modified example 3, the determination process of steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B shown in FIG. 10-22 does not exist. Therefore, modification 3
Then, unless the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (step 0).
52IWS1125B N), CPU103 ends the process as it is.

FIG. 10-67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modified example 3.

As shown in FIGS. 10-67 (A) and 10-67 (C), in the modified example 3, a small hit is displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a miss, a small hit, or a probability variation large hit. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, as in FIGS. 10-59 (A) and 10-59 (C), the variation display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-67 (D) and (F), the small hit symbol is stopped in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol which is a miss, a small hit, or a probabilistic big hit. If displayed, FIGS. 10-59 (D), (F)
Similarly, even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-67 (B), in the modified example 3, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which is usually a big hit. In the same manner as in FIG. 10-59 (B), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as an off symbol.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-67 (E), in the modified example 3, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol which is usually a big hit. In, unlike FIG. 10-59 (E), the variation display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-67, in the modified example 3, the variation display of the special symbol is forcibly removed and forced by the symbol when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. The control to display the stop is different.

In the third modification, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, which is a normal jackpot, the small hit symbol is forcibly stopped and stopped, while the normal jackpot is normally hit. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display is continued, but it is limited to such a mode. Absent. For example, conversely, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, which is a normal jackpot, the fluctuation display is continued, while the normal jackpot is displayed. If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, it may be configured to forcibly stop. Also, for example, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol which is a big hit (regardless of whether it is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot), the forced loss is lost. On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit (regardless of whether it is a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot), it fluctuates. It may be configured to continue the display. In this way, the control for forced loss stop may be different between the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in some form.

(Modification example 4)
FIG. 10-68 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the modified example 4. In FIGS. 10-68, steps 052IWS1120A-S
The processing of 1128A is similar to those processing shown in FIG. 10-19.

In the fourth modification, when the variation display of the first special symbol that does not become either a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot (that is, a 6R normal jackpot) is being executed in step 052IWS1128A, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag. It is confirmed whether or not it is set (step 052IWS1131A). If the probability change flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probability change state), the process ends as it is. If the probability change flag is set (that is, in the probability change state), the CPU 103 controls to send the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A). The process of step 052IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19.

In the fourth modification, when the determination process of step 052IWS1131A is executed, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which is usually a big hit. The variation display of the first special symbol is not uniformly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol, but the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol when the probability change state is in progress. On the other hand, even during the variable display of the first special symbol, which is usually a big hit, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, unless it is in the probability variation state.

FIG. 10-69 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation processing in the modified example 4. In FIG. 10-69, the processes of steps 052IWS1120B to S1128B are similar to those processes shown in FIGS. 10-22.

In the fourth modification, step 052IWS1128B does not result in any of 10R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, and 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, 2R normal jackpot).
When the variation display of the special symbol is being executed, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 052IWS1131B). If the probability change flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probability change state), the process ends as it is. If the probability change flag is set (that is, if it is in the probability change state), the CPU 103 is C for effect control.
Control is performed to send the second forced symbol confirmation specification command to the PU 120 (step 052IW).
S1129B). The process of step 052IWS1130B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-22.

In the fourth modification, when the determination process of step 052IWS1131B is executed, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol which is usually a big hit. The variation display of the second special symbol is not uniformly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol, but the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol when the probability change state is in progress. On the other hand, even during the variable display of the second special symbol, which is usually a big hit, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, unless it is in the probability variation state.

In the modified example 4, whether or not the probability change flag is set (whether or not it is in the probability change state).
The case where the control for forcibly stopping and displaying the display with the out-of-order symbol is performed is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to control to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol depending on whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set. Also, for example, high probability /
Only in the low base state (high probability flag is on, high base flag is off), the control to forcibly stop and display the off symbol may be performed. In some way like that
Anything may be used as long as it is configured to control the stop display with a symbol that is forcibly removed according to the current game state.

In addition, when the control is configured to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol only in the high probability / low base state as described above, it is possible to prevent a normal big hit in the variable display of one of the identification information. It is possible to prevent the second KT state (small hit RUSH) from being interrupted.

As described above, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to set one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") having different advantages for the player. is there. In addition, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is different from the advantageous state. It is possible to control a special state (for example, a KT state) in which value is easily given. Then, the setting suggestion effect (for example, the small hit winning suggestion effect) can be executed in response to the passage of the game medium (for example, the game ball) through the specific area (for example, the special winning opening).
Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect.

Specifically, in this example, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit winning based on the fact that the game ball wins in the special winning opening during the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH). However, during the small hit RUSH, the winning frequency to the special winning opening is particularly high, so it is possible to pay attention to the setting suggestion effect (in this example, the suggestion effect at the time of the small hit prize), and improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect. be able to.

In this example, a setting suggestion effect (in this example, a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize) is executed based on the fact that the game ball wins a special winning opening as a specific area. I can't be limited. For example, even if the setting suggestion effect can be executed based on the starting winning opening (winning ball device 6A, variable winning ball device 6B), the general winning opening 10, and the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening as a specific area. Good. Further, as a specific area, the setting suggestion effect may be configured to be executable based on the entry of the game ball into the out port. Also, for example, the passage gate 4 as a specific area
The setting suggestion effect may be made executable based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gates such as 1.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to set one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") having different advantages for the player. In addition, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is different from the advantageous state. It is possible to control a special state (for example, a KT state) in which value is easily given. Further, the setting suggestion effect (for example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect) can be executed, and the ease of executing the setting suggestion effect differs depending on the length of the period controlled to the special state (for example, FIG. 10-43). As shown in the above, when the number of prize balls reaches 456, the prize ball number display suggestion effect A can be executed with a 3% probability, and when the number of prize balls reaches 555, the prize balls have a 2% probability. The number display suggestion effect B can be executed, and when the number of prize balls reaches 666, the prize ball number display suggestion effect C can be executed with a 1% probability, and when the number of prize balls reaches 2456, 5 % Probability suggestion of displaying the number of prize balls D
When the number of prize balls reaches 2555, there is a 3% chance that the prize ball number display suggestion effect E can be executed, and when the number of prize balls reaches 2666, there is a 2% chance that the prize will be awarded. The number of balls display suggestion effect F can be executed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect.

In this example, the number of prize balls is 456 or the number of prize balls is set as "the length of the period controlled by the special state".
It shows a case where the prize ball number display suggestion effect is executed at the timing when 555, 666, 2456, 2555, and 2666 are reached (in other words, the period until a certain game value is given). However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the "length of the period controlled by the special state" is the length of the period controlled by the advantageous state (in this example, the jackpot game state), or
It may be the length of the period controlled by the special state (in this example, the small hit game state), or it may be the length of the total period of these.

When the length of the period controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) is used as the "length of the period controlled to the special state", the length of the period from the fanfare to the ending of the jackpot game is used. Alternatively, the length of the period of only the round game during the big hit game may be used. In this case, for example, the longer the period from the fanfare to the ending of the big hit game, the higher the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed.
Further, for example, in the case of a big hit with a small number of rounds during the big hit game, the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than the big hit with a large number of rounds.

Further, for example, as "the length of the period controlled by the special state", the number of small hits generated during the high probability / second KT state and the number of executions of the variation display executed during the high probability / second KT state are used. Depending on the situation, the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed. In this case, for example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate as the number of small hits increases, or the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate as the number of executions of the variable display increases. .. Further, for example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a high rate at the timing when the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH) ends, and various as "the length of the period controlled by the special state". Is conceivable.

In general, in a game machine, the number of prize balls reaches a certain number and "XXXXXX OVER"
When displaying such as, "1000 OVER" or "1000 OVER" of the prize ball number emphasizing effect shown in this example
It is displayed in units that are limited to some extent, such as displaying in units of 1000 prize balls, such as "2000 OVER". On the other hand, the prize ball number display suggestion effect shown in this example is a timing different from the usual timing when the number of prize balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, 2666. Since it is executed in, it is possible to expect a high setting while giving a sense of discomfort to the occurrence timing of the prize ball number display suggestion effect, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state). Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the small hit game state). Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). Further, the judgment values include a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a variable display display result, and a special display result as a variable display display result. Is included as a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. In addition, a plurality of set values having different numbers of specific determination values (for example, set values "1" to "6"
It can be set to any of the setting values of "). Further, the number of special determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, appropriate playability can be realized.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect in response to the control to the special state (for example, a small hit occurs during the high probability / second KT state and the game ball wins the special winning opening. Based on what you have done, it is possible to perform a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize and a suggestion effect of displaying the number of prize balls). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the control to the special state.

In this example, the setting suggestion effect (in this example, the small hit winning suggestion effect and the prize ball number display suggestion effect) is executed based on the game ball winning in the special winning opening. , Not limited to such aspects. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at the start of the small hit game during the small hit fluctuation or when the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to the open state. Further, for example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed by changing the small hit notification mode when a small hit occurs. In this way, any form may be used as long as the setting suggestion effect is executed in response to the control of the small hit.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 17) are played when the game is controlled in an advantageous state and when the game is controlled in a special state. The medium (for example, a game ball) can be controlled into an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) and a difficult-to-enter or impossible-entry non-easy state (for example, a closed state). Further, the setting suggestion effect can be executed in response to the variable means being controlled to the easy-to-enter state (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 17 are opened, and the size is large. Based on the fact that a game ball has been won in the winning opening or the special winning opening, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize or a suggestion effect of displaying the number of prize balls). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the control of the variable means.

In this example, when the setting suggestion effect (in this example, the small hit prize suggestion effect and the prize ball number display suggestion effect) is executed based on the game ball winning in the large prize opening or the special prize opening. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to be in the open state and the opening effect is executed, the setting suggestion effect is executed by changing the effect mode of the opening effect. It may be configured as follows. It suffices that the setting suggestion effect is executed in response to the fact that the variable means is controlled to the easy-to-enter state in some form.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, when the control of the game state is switched (for example, at the start or end of the big hit game, the low probability / first KT state is changed to the normal state (low probability / low base state).
When transitioning to (for example), the setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, step 052IWS6).
The display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display is changed at 24). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the switching of the control of the gaming state.

In this example, "when the control of the game state is switched" is set at the start or end of the jackpot game, or when shifting from the low probability / first KT state to the normal state (low probability / low base state). Although the case where the suggestion effect is configured to be feasible is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the production period when shifting to the jackpot game during the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH), or the transition from the jackpot game to the high base state (high probability / first KT state or low probability / first KT state). The setting suggestion effect may be configured to be feasible during the effect period. Further, for example, a gaming machine configured to shift to a high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH) based on executing a predetermined number of fluctuation displays during a high base state or a predetermined number of small hits. In the effect period when shifting from the high base state to the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH), the setting suggestion effect may be configured to be executable, and various as "when the control of the game state is switched". Is conceivable.

Further, in this example, the case where the setting suggestion effect is executed by changing the display mode of the right-handed display or the left-handed display is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed by changing the effect of the fanfare effect at the start of the big hit and the effect of the ending effect at the end of the big hit, and various modes can be considered.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, according to the number of times of control to the special state in the special state, the total of the game values given by the special state in the special state, or the number of times of executing the variable display in the special state. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect with different selection ratios (for example, the number of prize balls is 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666.
Depending on the number of pieces reached, the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F are executed at different selection ratios. Alternatively, for example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect A has a different selection ratio depending on the number of small hits that occurred during the high probability / second KT state and the number of executions of the variable display executed during the high probability / second KT state. ~
It may be configured to execute F. ). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the number of times of control to the special state, the total number of game values, or the number of times of execution of the variable display.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, as a special state, an advantageous special state (for example, the second K)
It is possible to control the T state) and the disadvantageous special state (for example, the first KT state) which is disadvantageous to the player as compared with the advantageous special state. Further, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect by different selection ratios when the game medium passes through the specific area during the advantageous special state and when the game medium passes through the specific area during the disadvantageous special state (for example). Only when a small hit is made and a game ball wins in the special winning opening during the second KT state, the small hit winning suggestion effect and the prize ball number display suggestion effect can be executed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the type of special state.

In this example, a case is shown in which a small hit winning suggestion effect and a prize ball number display suggestion effect can be executed only when a game ball wins a special prize opening during the second KT state. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, even if a game ball wins in the special winning opening during the first KT state, a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize or a suggestion effect for displaying the number of prize balls can be executed, and the game ball is inserted in the special winning opening during the second KT state. It is now possible to execute a small hit winning suggestion effect and a prize ball number display suggestion effect at different rates depending on whether It may be configured. Further, for example, even when an irregular game ball is won in the special winning opening during the non-KT state, a small hit winning suggestion effect or a prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed. ..

In the case of the above configuration, if a prize is awarded to the special winning opening in the 1st KT state (high base state) or an irregular winning occurs, or if a winning is generated in the special winning opening during the 2nd KT state. In comparison with, the small hit winning suggestion effect and the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a high rate, or the small hit winning suggestion effect and the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be performed at a low rate. It may be configured to run.

In this feature unit 052IW, the value of the prize ball counter and the number of prize balls are displayed during the big hit game based on the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, and the 6R normal jackpot and during the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH). Is updated, and the value of the prize ball counter is not updated during the jackpot game based on the 2R probability variation hit and the 2R normal jackpot and during the high base state (high probability / 1st KT state, low probability / 1st KT state). (The prize ball counter is not reset), and in principle, the prize ball number display is hidden, and the 50 times fluctuation display is completed in the low probability / first KT state to the normal state (low probability / low base state). The case where the value of the prize ball counter is controlled to be reset at the time of transition is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. The value of the prize ball counter may be updated even during the big hit game based on the 2R probability variation big hit or the 2R normal big hit.

In addition, in this example, by being configured as described above, for example, high probability / second K
After ending the T state (small hit RUSH) and shifting to the high base state (high probability / first KT state, low probability / first KT state), a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs during the high base state. When the probability shifts to the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH) again, the value of the prize ball counter is updated and the prize ball number display is displayed while inheriting the number of prize balls in the previous small hit RUSH. can do.

In addition, not limited to the mode of displaying the number of prize balls as shown in this example, for example, when a 10R probability variation big hit occurs and the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH) is entered, the high probability / second KT state (Small hit RUSH) may be set as one section and the big hit game immediately before the section may be set as one section, and the total number of prize balls in the section may be totaled and the total value may be displayed. Further, for example, the setting suggestion effect suggesting the current set value may be executed by changing the display mode (display color in this example) of the aggregated value.

Further, in this feature unit 052IW, the current set value is set to the set value "1" as the "setting suggestion effect".
The case where the small hit winning suggestion effect or the prize ball number display suggestion effect is executed in the mode suggesting any of "6" is not limited to such a mode. For example, instead of suggesting the current setting value, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in a manner of suggesting whether or not the setting change has been made to change the setting value when the power is turned on to the game machine. Good. As such, the "setting suggestion effect" may be any form of suggestion regarding the setting.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel. , When a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and the variable display display result is special. When the display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed, it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Further, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probabilistic jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and the first specific display result is derived and displayed. It is more advantageous for the player than the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, it is controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game is completed). Further, while the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is the variable display corresponding to the first specific display result, the special display result is displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. The display result of the variable display of one of the identification information is not derived and displayed (for example, the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the first special symbol or the first special symbol or the first is not displayed. 2 The variable display of special symbols is continuously executed)
.. Further, during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information. Based on the derivation display, the variable display of the identification information of one of them is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is an outlier symbol). Forcibly stopped and displayed). Therefore, it is possible to realize control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

Specifically, when the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold of one of the identification information results in a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) even though the transition to the second KT state (small hit RUSH) or probability variation state has occurred. The second KT state (small hit RUSH) or the probabilistic state will end immediately, and there is a risk that the interest in the game will decline. On the other hand, if the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold of the identification information on one side is forcibly forcibly removed and the symbol is stopped and displayed (forced off), even the variable display that is a probable change jackpot is forcibly removed. As a result, the game value given to the player in the advantageous state (big hit game state) is reduced, which is not preferable. Therefore, in this feature unit 052IW, while the fluctuation display that is a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) is forcibly removed, the fluctuation display that is a probability variation jackpot is extended (interruption of measurement of fluctuation time). , While suppressing the decrease in the game value given to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In this example, as an aspect of "not stopping the variable display of one of the identification information", the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed. Has been shown, but is not limited to such a mode. For example
Even if it is configured to suspend (pause) the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and resume the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that was interrupted after the end of the small hit game. Good. Anything that does not completely stop the variable display in some form is sufficient.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to control a special state (for example, a second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) due to the special state is easily given. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value is easily given by the special state.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, it is a state different from the advantageous state and is a non-specific state (
For example, it is possible to control a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a low probability state). Further, the first specific display result is controlled to a specific state based on the derivation display (for example, the probability change state is controlled after the end of the big hit game based on the probability change big hit), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed. Based on this, it is controlled to a non-specific state (for example, it is not controlled to a probabilistic state after the end of a big hit game based on a normal big hit). Therefore, it is possible to realize control considering whether or not it is controlled to a specific state.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, it is a state different from the advantageous state and is a non-specific state (
For example, it is possible to control a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a low probability state). Also, when controlled in an advantageous state, a specific area (
For example, it is possible to control a specific state based on the passage of a game medium (for example, a game ball) through the V region 052IW104). Then, when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the game medium passes through the specific area at a higher rate when the second specific display result is derived and displayed, as compared with the case where the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (See Fig. 10-11). Therefore, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the special display result can be derived and displayed regardless of whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (). See FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Further, the first identification is based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result in the variable display of the first identification information. The variable display of information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (see FIG. 10-67 (B)). Further, when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result in the variable display of the second identification information, the second identification information is displayed. Control is not performed to derive and display the variable display of the above with a predetermined display result (see FIG. 10-67 (E)). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control considering whether the first identification information is the variable display or the second identification information is the variable display.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, it is a state different from the advantageous state and is a non-specific state (
For example, it is possible to control a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a low probability state). Further, the variable display executing means is a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, and is a variable display corresponding to the second specific display result when controlled to the specific state. Based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with the predetermined display result (FIGS. 10-68 and 10-). 69). Further, when controlled to the non-specific state, during execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the other identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (see FIGS. 10-68 and 10-69). ). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of whether or not the control is performed in a specific state.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is based on the fact that the game medium (for example, the game ball) has entered the first start area (for example, the first start winning opening). ) Can be variably displayed, and the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is variably displayed based on the entry of the game medium into the second starting area (for example, the second starting winning opening). It is possible. Further, a variable means (for example, a special variable prize) that can be changed into a first state in which the game medium can enter (for example, an open state) and a second state in which the game medium cannot enter or cannot enter (for example, a closed state). A ball device 17) is provided. Further, after the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is executed, an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state).
And a special state having a lower advantage than the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state) can be controlled, and the variable means is controlled to the first state when the special state is controlled. Also,
The first starting area is provided so that the game medium moving on a predetermined path (for example, the left area of the game area) can enter the moving path in which the game medium can move, and the variable means is a specific path among the moving paths. A game medium that moves (for example, the area to the right of the game area) is provided so as to be accessible. In addition, a specific notification for promoting the launch of the game medium to a specific route (for example, FIG. 10-56 (1).
), (Right-handed notification shown in (2)) can be executed, and when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and then controlled to a special state, the specific notification is not executed (for example, FIG. 10-56 (for example, FIG. 10-56). 3
)reference). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the promotion of the launch of the game medium.

Specifically, as shown in the feature unit 052IW, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, and the small hit type on the first special symbol side can be executed. It is configured so that the winning ratio (advantage) to the special winning opening is lower than the small hit type on the 2nd special symbol side, and when the small hit is made in the variable display of the 1st special symbol, the 2nd special If the variable display of the symbol is forcibly removed and stopped, if the right-handed notification is executed for the small hit on the first special symbol side with a low winning rate (advantage), it is practically Although it is almost impossible to expect a prize in the special winning opening, the player wastes the game ball, and on the contrary, a disadvantageous launch promotion notification is performed, which is not preferable. Therefore, in this example, the right-handed notification is executed for the small hit on the second special symbol side, while the right-handed notification is not executed for the small hit on the first special symbol side. , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages due to wasteful hitting by the player, and it is possible to realize appropriate notification.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the first reserved storage means (for example, the first reserved storage buffer) that can store the information related to the variable display of the first identification information as the reserved storage and the variable display of the second identification information. The information is provided as a second hold storage means (for example, a second hold storage buffer) that can be stored as hold storage. In addition, the display result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second
When a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the identification information, it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) and display the variable display of the first identification information. Special display result as the result or the display result of the variable display of the second identification information (
For example, it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) when the small hit symbol) is derived and displayed. Further, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which the frequency at which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information becomes the special display result is increased. Further, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed as the display result of one of the variable displays when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel. As the display result of the other variable display, a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) different from the specific display result and the special display result is derived and displayed. Therefore, the variable display can be forcibly terminated, and the reserved memory can be smoothly digested.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, a predetermined value can be given when the special state is controlled (for example, 10 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening). It is possible to give a value higher than a predetermined value when controlled to an advantageous state (for example, 15 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of a game ball to the large winning opening). Further, as the specific notification, the first specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 shown in FIGS. 10-56 (1) and (2)) and the first specific notification are more visible. It is possible to execute a highly likely second specific notification (for example, the display of the right-handed display 052IW007 shown in FIG. 10-56 (1)). In addition, when controlled to an advantageous state, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are executed (
(See FIG. 10-56 (1)), when the variable display of the second identification information is executed and then controlled to a special state, the first specific notification is executed and the second specific notification is not executed (FIG. 10-56). (2)
reference). Therefore, it is possible to realize the notification corresponding to the value that can be given.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Further, when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and then controlled to the special state, a higher ratio is more advantageous than when the variable display of the second identification information is executed and then controlled to the special state. It is controlled to a special state of a low degree (for example, small hit A). Further, when the variable display of the second identification information is executed and then the special state is controlled, the specific notification is executed (see FIGS. 10-56 (2) and (3)). Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification in consideration of the player's advantage.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to execute a variable display effect (for example, variable display of a decorative pattern) at least corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information. In addition, it is possible to execute a variable display effect in a common mode depending on whether the state is controlled by the special state or not (they are not controlled by the special state).
For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, the non-reach off symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's recognition of being controlled to a special state after the variable display of the first identification information is executed. In addition, the reserved memory stored by the second reserved storage means can be smoothly digested.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, a delay means for delaying the movement of the game medium on the upstream side of the variable means in the specific route (for example, a regulation piece provided in the variable winning ball device 6B).
To be equipped. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second identification information from being targeted at the timing when the control to the special state is executed after the variable display of the second identification information is executed at the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to strengthen the capture measures against the game machine.

The delay means is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 provided on the right side of the game area, a passage member for moving the game ball so as to meander to the left and right is provided as a delay means. You may.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the effect is produced based on the game control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) and the information from the game control means. Effect control means to control (for example, effect control CPU 120
) And. Further, the game control means controls the execution of the notification by the notification means (for example, the right-handed display 26) that performs a predetermined notification. Further, the effect control means executes a specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed notification LED 37) in response to the notification by the notification means. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification while reducing the processing load of the effect control means.

In this example, right-handed notification is executed during the jackpot game regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Cases are shown, but not limited to such aspects. For example, a special variable winning ball device (left large winning opening) is provided on the left side of the game area, and a special variable winning ball device (right large winning opening) is also provided on the right side of the game area. If a big hit is made by the variable display of the symbol, the left big winning opening is opened during the big hit game, and if a big hit is made by the variable display of the second special symbol, the right big winning opening is opened during the big hit game. When applied to a game machine configured as described above, if a big hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, a right-handed notification is executed during the big hit game, while the variable display of the first special symbol is used. If a big hit occurs, the right-handed notification may not be executed during the big hit game. Further, in the case of such a configuration, if a jackpot is obtained in the variable display of the first special symbol, the left-handed notification may be executed during the jackpot game. That is, the specific notification executing means may be configured to execute the specific notification when the variable means (in this example, the right-handed winning opening) is controlled to an advantageous state of the type to be controlled. With such a configuration, when a big hit is obtained in the variable display of the first special symbol, a left-handed notification is executed during the big-hit game to prevent the player from accidentally performing a right-handed operation. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player.

Further, in this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, a case where right-handed notification is executed even in the KT state is shown. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, when the second start winning opening is applied to a game machine provided on the left side of the game area, the right-handed notification is not executed during the KT state, the high base state, or the time saving state. May be good.

Further, in this example, when the right-handed notification is executed by displaying the right-handed display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 in addition to lighting the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 only during the big hit game. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, even in the second KT state (during small hit RUSH), when the first variation display after the end of the big hit game is executed, the image is in addition to the lighting of the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37. The right-handed notification may be executed by displaying the right-handed display 052IW007 on the display screen of the display device 5. Alternatively, in this case, for example, during the ending period at the end of the big hit game, the right-handed display 052IW007 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 in addition to lighting the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37. It may be configured to execute the beating notification.

Further, in this example, the right-handed display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, in addition to the relatively large size right-handed display 052IW007 as shown in FIG. 10-56 (1), the image display device 5 displays a symbol display (for example, a right-pointing triangle display) indicating right-handedness. May be configured to enable right-handed notification.

Further, the method of small hit control is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a plurality of special variable winning ball devices are provided, and the special variable winning ball device (special winning opening) to be opened is configured to be different depending on the small hit type, and the variable display of the first special symbol indicates a small hit. The selection ratio of the small hit type may be different depending on whether the case is a small hit or a small hit is obtained by the variable display of the second special symbol. In this case, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, it is easy to select the small hit type (or the small hit type in the open mode with a low winning rate) opened by the special variable winning ball device having a small number of prize balls. , When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the small hit type (or the small hit type in the open mode with a high winning rate) opened by the special variable winning ball device having a large number of prize balls can be easily selected. It may be configured as.

Further, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol, a right-handed notification is given during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-56 (2)), and the variation display of the first special symbol is performed. In the case where a small hit occurs, the right-handed notification is not performed during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-56 (3)), but when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol. May be configured so that right-handed notification may not be performed. For example, if a small hit occurs when the second special symbol variation display is executed in a situation where a left-handed operation should be performed in a normal state, the right-handed notification is not performed during the small hit game. You may.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) which is advantageous for the player. Is. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Is. In addition, using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination),
Determine the display result of the variable display. Further, it is possible to control a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable change state) and a specific state (for example, a probable change state) that is more likely to be controlled in an advantageous state than the non-specific state.
Further, the judgment values include a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a variable display display result, and a special display result as a variable display display result. Is included as a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. In addition, a plurality of set values (for example, set value "1") having different numbers of specific determination values
It can be set to any of the setting values of "" to "6"). Further, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value, and is common when controlled in the non-specific state and when controlled in the specific state (FIGS. 10-3 and 10). See -4). Therefore, appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, if the lottery probability other than the jackpot winning probability and the type distribution change depending on the set value, the difference in the degree of advantage (difference in ball ejection performance) becomes too remarkable depending on the set value, and the gambling may become excessively high. There is. Therefore, in this feature unit 052IW, by making the number of special judgment values common regardless of the set value (the small hit winning probability is common), it is possible to prevent the difference in the degree of advantage from becoming excessively large depending on the set value. However, it prevents the gambling from becoming excessively high.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). Can be executed in parallel). Further, it is possible to control the display result of the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the frequency of becoming a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is increased. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability in a game machine that can be controlled to a special state.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, as a special state, the first special state (for example, the first K)
It is possible to control a T state) and a second special state (for example, a second KT state) having a higher advantage than the first special state. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability in the game machine that can be controlled to the second special state.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to execute a special suggestion effect (for example, a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 10-55) corresponding to the advantage of the special state. Therefore, by suggesting the advantage of the special state, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, a predetermined display result (for example, a missed symbol) different from the specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) and the special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived as the variable display display result. When the variable display to be displayed is executed, the set value suggestion effect suggesting the set value (for example, the set value suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 10-54) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the set value suggestion effect.

In this example, the case where the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect and the set value suggestion effect are executed in the variable display that is out of the way is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect or the set value suggestion effect during the big hit game or the small hit game, and various aspects can be considered.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Further, the type of the special state is determined by using the special type determination value (for example, the small hit type determination value) for determining the type of the special state. Further, the number of special type determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-6). Therefore, more appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, in this feature unit 052IW, the number of special type determination values is common regardless of the set value (the distribution of small hit types is common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage is excessive depending on the set value. It prevents it from growing and prevents it from becoming excessively gambling.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the case where the small hit type allocation is the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set is shown. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, the small hit type determination ratio may be different depending on which of the set values "1" to "6", and the advantage may be different depending on the set value.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 2R normal jackpot). In addition, the type of advantageous state is determined by using the advantageous type determination value (for example, the jackpot type determination value) for determining the type of advantageous state. Further, the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-5). Therefore, more appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, in this feature unit 052IW, the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (the distribution of the jackpot type is common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage is excessively large depending on the set value. It prevents it from becoming excessively high in gambling.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-5, the case where the jackpot type allocation is the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set is shown. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, the determination ratio of the jackpot type may be different depending on which of the set values "1" to "6", and the advantage may be different depending on the set value.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the variable display mode is determined by using the variable display mode determination value (for example, the variable pattern determination value) for determining the variable display mode. Further, the number of variable display mode determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-10). Therefore, more appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, in the feature unit 052IW, the number of variable display mode determination values is common regardless of the set value (the distribution of the fluctuation pattern is common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage is excessive depending on the set value. It prevents it from growing and prevents it from becoming excessively gambling.

In particular, if the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value, the period from one small hit control to the next small hit control will change, and even if the small hit winning probability is common, it is advantageous in factors other than the big hit lottery. It is not preferable because the degree (difference in ball ejection performance) is greatly different, but in this feature unit 052IW, by making the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern common regardless of the set value,
We try to prevent such problems from occurring.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-10, the case where the fluctuation pattern allocation is the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set is shown. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, the fluctuation efficiency is set to be different depending on the set value by making the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern different depending on which of the set values "1" to "6" and providing a difference in the fluctuation time. It may be configured so that the advantage varies depending on the value.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) which is advantageous for the player. Is. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Is. In addition, using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination),
Determine the display result of the variable display. Further, the determination value includes a specific determination value for determining to derive and display a specific display result as a display result of variable display (for example, a determination value for jackpot determination).
And a special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for small hit judgment) for deciding to derive and display the special display result as the display result of the variable display, and the specific display result and the special display result as the display result of the variable display. A predetermined determination value (for example, a determination value for determination of loss) for determining that the predetermined display result is different from the above is included. In addition, multiple setting values with different numbers of specific judgment values (
For example, it can be set to any of the set values "1" to "6"). Further, the number of special determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values, and the number of the predetermined determination values differs depending on the set values (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value and improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to control a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable change state) and a specific state (for example, a probable change state) which is more likely to be controlled to be more advantageous than the non-specific state.
Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination value corresponding to the specific state of all the set values (FIG. 10-3).
And see Figure 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value in the specific state.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). It can be executed in parallel with the variable display). Further, the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is larger than the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and the second identification information in the specific state can be displayed in a variable manner. The corresponding determination value includes a predetermined determination value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value using the display result of the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to control the display result of the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which the frequency of the special display result is increased. Further, when a variable display that is controlled to a special state and a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) is derived and displayed is executed, a set value suggestion effect that suggests a set value (for example, the setting shown in FIGS. 10-54) Value suggestion effect) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the set value suggestion effect.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). Further, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state) which is advantageous for the player. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state)
Is controllable. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). Further, the judgment values include a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a variable display display result, and a special display result as a variable display display result. Is included as a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Further, a plurality of set values (for example, set value "1"" having different numbers of specific determination values
It can be set to any of the setting values of ~ "6"). Further, among the judgment values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information, the number of special judgment values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-4), and the judgment corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information. The number of special judgment values differs between the value and the judgment value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the game while realizing appropriate game playability.

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148127), the degree of advantage of the variable display display result with respect to the control of deriving and displaying (forced loss stop) the variable display of the identification information with a predetermined display result. It was not possible to realize control in consideration of. Therefore, this feature unit 052
The IW also has the characteristic configurations of the gaming machines shown below (means A1) to (means A6) for the purpose of providing a gaming machine capable of realizing control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display. It is disclosed.

(Means A1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and has a variable display of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and a second identification information (for example, a second special symbol). A variable display execution means (for example, a portion for executing steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) capable of executing the variable display of the symbol) in parallel, and a display of the variable display. As a result, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, an advantageous state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) Specifically, the CPU
A special state (for example, a small hit game) different from the advantageous state when the special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display (the part where steps S122 to S125 are executed) in 103). Step S126 in the special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) that can be controlled by the state).
The variable display executing means is special in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information. Based on the derivation display of the display result, the update of the first control (for example, the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer) that does not derive and display the display result of the variable display of the identification information of one of them is interrupted, and the second A second control (for example, out of order) in which the variable display of one special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed) and the variable display of one of the identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) It is possible to display and stop the symbol (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol), and in the variable display of one of the identification information. Which of the first control and the second control is executed differs depending on the display result derived and displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines the determination result in steps 052IWS1128A and S1128B. Step 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, S1130B are executed according to the above. , S1130B. For example, in the second modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B according to the determination results of steps 052IWS1130C and S1130D.) It is characterized by that. According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

(Means A2) In means A1, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) due to a special state is likely to be given. Specifically, step 052 in CPU103)
It may be configured to include a portion that executes IWS2208). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value due to the special state is easily given.

(Means A3) In the means A1 or the means A2, the specific display result includes the first specific display result (means A3).
For example, there is a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), which is a state different from the advantageous state and becomes an advantageous state as compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). Specific state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) that can be controlled to a specific state that is easy to control (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)).
The specific state control means is provided with a portion for executing step 052IWS2206 in
The first specific display result is controlled to a specific state based on the derivation display (for example, the probability change state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed. It may be configured to be controlled to a non-specific state based on the original state (for example, it is not controlled to a probabilistic state after the end of a big hit game based on a normal big hit). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not it is controlled to a specific state.

(Means A4) In any of the means A1 to the means A3, the specific display result is the first.
There is a specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), which is a state different from the advantageous state and compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). Specific state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, specifically) that can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is easily controlled to an advantageous state.
The specific state control means includes a specific region (for example, a V region 052IW1) when the specific state control means is controlled in an advantageous state, including a portion that executes step 052IWS2206 in the CPU 103).
04) can be controlled to a specific state based on the passage of the game medium (for example, a game ball) (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)).
Executes steps 052IWS2404, S2405, S2204 to S2206)
, When the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the game medium passes through the specific area at a higher rate when the second specific display result is derived and displayed, as compared with the case where the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is long. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), it is usually based on the jackpot. In the jackpot game, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 may be extremely short.) According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

(Means A5) In any of the means A1 to the means A4, the specific display result is the first.
There are a specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed when the first specific display result is derived and displayed. The advantage for the player is higher than that (for example, it is controlled to the probabilistic state after the big hit game is completed), and the variable display executing means is a case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and a case where the second identification information is variable. In any case of executing the display, the special display result can be derived and displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS64A and S64B. -3, see Fig. 10-4.), While the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of the first identification information, is being executed, the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information. Based on the above, the variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, in the modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is N in step 052IWS1128A. When step 052IWS1129A, S1130A is executed. FIG. 10-67 (B).
)reference. ), If the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result in the variable display of the second identification information, the second identification information The variable display of the above is not controlled to be derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, in the modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) does not perform the processing of steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B. 10-66, Fig. 10-6
See 7 (E). ) May be configured. According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control considering whether the first identification information is the variable display or the second identification information is the variable display.

(Means A6) In any of the means A1 to the means A5, the specific display result is the first.
There are a specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed when the first specific display result is derived and displayed. It has a higher advantage for the player (for example, it is controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game ends), and is a state different from the advantageous state and compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). Specific state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, C) that can be controlled to a specific state that is easily controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)).
PU103) includes a portion that executes step 052IWS2206), and the variable display executing means is a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information when controlled to a specific state. During execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result,
Based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with the predetermined display result (for example, in the modification 4, the game control microcomputer 100 (Specifically, CPU 103) is step 052I.
When WS1131A, S1131B is Y Step 052IWS1129A, S1130
Execute A. See FIGS. 10-68 and 10-69. ), When the variable display is controlled to the non-specific state, the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result is being executed. When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the one identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (for example, in the modification 4, for game control. Microcomputer 100
(Specifically, CPU 103) is N in steps 052IWS1131A and S1131B.
At this time, the process does not proceed to steps 052IWS1129A and S1129B. See FIGS. 10-68 and 10-69. ) May be configured. According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of whether or not the control is performed in a specific state.

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148127), the degree of advantage of the variable display display result with respect to the control of deriving and displaying (forced loss stop) the variable display of the identification information with a predetermined display result. It was not possible to realize control in consideration of. Therefore, this feature unit 052
The IW also has the characteristic configurations of the gaming machines shown below (means B1) to (means B6) for the purpose of providing a gaming machine capable of realizing control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display. It is disclosed.

(Means B1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and has a variable display of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and a second identification information (for example, a second special symbol). A variable display execution means (for example, a portion for executing steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) capable of executing the variable display of the symbol) in parallel, and a display of the variable display. As a result, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, an advantageous state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) Specifically, the CPU
A special state (for example, a small hit game) different from the advantageous state when the special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display (the part where steps S122 to S125 are executed) in 103). Step S126 in the special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) that can be controlled by the state).
The variable display executing means is provided with (a part for executing S128), and the special display result is obtained regardless of whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS64A and S64B. FIG. 10-3, FIG.
See Figure 10-4. ), The identification of one of the first identification information and the second identification information based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display of the identification information. The first control that does not derive and display the display result of the variable display of information (for example,
The update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed), and the variable display of the identification information of one of them is predeterminedly displayed. The second control (for example, the out-of-order symbol is displayed and stopped) (for example, the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the out-of-order symbol) It is possible to execute the first control and the second control depending on the display result derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information (for example, the game control microcomputer 100). (Specifically, CPU 103) is step 052.
Step 052IWS1129A, depending on the determination result of IWS1128A, S1128B,
Execute S1130A, S1129B, S1130B. For example, in the first modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is in step 052.
Step 052IWS1129A, depending on the determination result of IWS1127A, S1127B,
Execute S1130A, S1129B, S1130B. For example, in the second modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is in step 052.
Step 052IWS1129A, depending on the determination result of IWS1130C, S1130D,
Execute S1130A, S1129B, S1130B. ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

(Means B2) In means B1, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) due to a special state is easily given. Specifically, step 052 in CPU103)
It may be configured to include a portion that executes IWS2208). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value due to the special state is easily given.

(Means B3) In the means B1 or the means B2, the specific display result includes the first specific display result (means B3).
For example, there is a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), which is a state different from the advantageous state and becomes an advantageous state as compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). Specific state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) that can be controlled to a specific state that is easy to control (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)).
The specific state control means is provided with a portion for executing step 052IWS2206 in
The first specific display result is controlled to a specific state based on the derivation display (for example, the probability change state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed. It may be configured to be controlled to a non-specific state based on the original state (for example, it is not controlled to a probabilistic state after the end of a big hit game based on a normal big hit). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not it is controlled to a specific state.

(Means B4) In any one of means B1 to B3, the specific display result is the first
There is a specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), which is a state different from the advantageous state and compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). Specific state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, specifically) that can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is easily controlled to an advantageous state.
The specific state control means includes a specific region (for example, a V region 052IW1) when the specific state control means is controlled in an advantageous state, including a portion that executes step 052IWS2206 in the CPU 103).
04) can be controlled to a specific state based on the passage of the game medium (for example, a game ball) (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)).
Executes steps 052IWS2404, S2405, S2204 to S2206)
, When the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the game medium passes through the specific area at a higher rate when the second specific display result is derived and displayed, as compared with the case where the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is long. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), it is usually based on the jackpot. In the jackpot game, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 may be extremely short.) According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

(Means B5) In any one of means B1 to B4, the specific display result is the first
There are a specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed when the first specific display result is derived and displayed. The variable display executing means is a variable display of the first identification information and corresponds to the second specific display result, which is more advantageous to the player (for example, is controlled to the probabilistic state after the big hit game is completed). During the execution of the variable display, the variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of the second identification information (for example, in the modification 3 Game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)
Is N in step 052IWS1128A, and steps 052IWS1129A, S1
Execute 130A. See FIG. 10-67 (B). ), If the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result in the variable display of the second identification information, the second identification information Control is not performed to derive and display the variable display of
Specifically, the CPU 103) does not perform the processes of steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B. See FIGS. 10-66 and 10-67 (E). ) May be configured.
According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control considering whether the first identification information is the variable display or the second identification information is the variable display.

(Means B6) In any one of means B1 to B5, the specific display result is the first
There are a specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed when the first specific display result is derived and displayed. It has a higher advantage for the player (for example, it is controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game ends), and is a state different from the advantageous state and compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). Specific state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, C) that can be controlled to a specific state that is easily controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)).
PU103) includes a portion that executes step 052IWS2206), and the variable display executing means is a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information when controlled to a specific state. During execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result,
Based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with the predetermined display result (for example, in the modification 4, the game control microcomputer 100 (Specifically, CPU 103) is step 052I.
When WS1131A, S1131B is Y Step 052IWS1129A, S1130
Execute A. See FIGS. 10-68 and 10-69. ), When the variable display is controlled to the non-specific state, the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result is being executed. When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the one identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (for example, in the modification 4, for game control. Microcomputer 100
(Specifically, CPU 103) is N in steps 052IWS1131A and S1131B.
At this time, the process does not proceed to steps 052IWS1129A and S1129B. See FIGS. 10-68 and 10-69. ) May be configured. According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of whether or not the control is performed in a specific state.

The configuration shown by the feature unit 052IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration shown by the feature unit 21TM to form a game machine. For example, a configuration in which the set value shown in the feature unit 21TM can be changed is applied to the feature unit 052IW to enable the set value suggestion effect, or the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect can be executed. , Right-handed notification can be executed, over-winning suggestion effect can be executed, small hit winning suggestion effect can be executed, and prize ball number display suggestion effect can be executed. You may do it. Further, for example, a configuration in which the set value indicated by the feature unit 21TM can be changed is applied to the feature unit 052IW, and a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol while the variation display of one special symbol is being executed. In that case, the variable display of one of the special symbols may be forcibly stopped and displayed or the variable display may be continued by the symbol.

Further, when the configuration shown in the feature unit 021TM is applied, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the setting value may be suggested by changing the mode of the ending effect.
In this case, for example, in the ending effect, a mode transition notification including a small hit RUSH or a chance mode may be executed, a card forgetting prevention notification such as a prepaid card may be executed, or a maker logo display may be displayed. It is configured to suggest the set value by configuring and changing the mode transition notification, the card forgetting prevention notification, the display mode of the maker logo display, and the display mode of the image to be displayed at the same time. You may.

Patent documents (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-033787) and patent documents (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010)
-By combining the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 200902), it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect in a game that is configured to be controllable in a special state. However, it is not possible to sufficiently improve the interest of the game simply by executing the setting suggestion effect in the game configured to be controllable in a special state. Therefore, the present feature unit 052IW is shown below for the purpose of providing a game machine capable of improving the interest of the setting suggestion effect (means C).
The characteristic configurations of the gaming machines shown in 1) to (means C7) are also disclosed.

(Means C1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is capable of playing a game, and is set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") having different advantages for the player. Steps S122 to S125 in the game control microcomputer 100, which is a game machine that can be set to a value and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, are executed. Part) and a special state control means (for example, a part for executing steps S126 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is different from the advantageous state. , Step 052I in the special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling the special state (for example, the KT state) in which the game value is easily given by the special state.
The part that executes WS2208, S2210, S2211, S2212, S2213) and
A setting suggestion effect execution means (for example, a setting suggestion effect execution means (for example, a small hit prize suggestion effect) that can be executed in response to the passage of a game medium (for example, a game ball) through a specific area (for example, a special winning opening). For example, it is characterized in that it is provided with (a portion for executing 052IWS323 and S324) in the effect control CPU 120. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect.

(Means C2) In the means C1, the advantageous state control means can control the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot gaming state) when the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. Yes, the special state control means controls a special state (for example, a small hit game state) when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable display display result. Display result determination means for determining the display result of the variable display by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). (For example, a portion for executing steps 026IWS59A, S64A, S59B, S64B in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided, and the determination value is used to determine to derive and display a specific display result as a variable display display result. The specific judgment value (for example, the judgment value for big hit judgment) and the special judgment value for determining to derive and display the special display result as the display result of the variable display (for example, the judgment value for small hit judgment) Multiple set values that are included and have different numbers of specific judgment values (for example, set values "1" to "6")
Setting means that can be set to any of the set values (for example, a portion that executes steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620 in the game control microcomputer 100).
The number of special determination values may be the same regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). According to such a configuration, appropriate playability can be realized.

(Means C3) In the means C1 or the means C2, the setting suggestion effect executing means can execute the setting suggestion effect in response to the control to the special state (for example, a small hit during the high probability / second KT state). Based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize or a suggestion effect of displaying the number of prize balls). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the control to the special state.

(Means C4) In any of means C1 to C3, when controlled in an advantageous state and controlled in a special state, variable means (for example, special variable winning ball device 7, special variable winning). A variable means capable of controlling the ball device 17) into an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) in which a game medium (for example, a game ball) can easily enter and an easy-to-enter state (for example, a closed state) in which the game medium (for example, a game ball) is difficult or impossible to enter. A control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S122 to S124, S126, S127 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided, and the setting suggestion effect execution means corresponds to the fact that the variable means is controlled in an easy-to-enter state. , It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 17 are opened, and the game ball is won in the large winning opening or the special winning opening. Therefore, it may be configured so that the suggestion effect at the time of winning a small hit and the suggestion effect of displaying the number of prize balls can be executed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the control of the variable means.

(Means C5) In any of the means C1 to the means C4, the setting suggestion effect executing means is usually when the control of the game state is switched (for example, at the start or end of the big hit game, from the low probability / first KT state). It is configured so that the setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display is changed in step 052IWS624) when shifting to the state (low probability / low base state). May be. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the switching of the control of the gaming state.

(Means C6) In any of the means C1 to the means C5, the setting suggestion effect executing means controls the number of times to control the special state in the special state, the total game value given by the special state in the special state, or Depending on the number of times the variable display is executed in the special state, the setting suggestion effect can be executed with different selection ratios (for example, the number of prize balls is 456, 555, 6).
Depending on the number of 66, 2456, 2555, or 2666 reached, the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F are executed at different selection ratios. Alternatively, for example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect A has a different selection ratio depending on the number of small hits generated during the high probability / second KT state and the number of executions of the variation display executed during the high probability / second KT state. It may be configured to execute ~ F.
) May be configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the number of times of control to the special state, the total number of game values, or the number of times of execution of the variable display.

(Means C7) In any one of the means C1 to the means C6, the special state control means is disadvantageous to the player as a special state as compared with the advantageous special state (for example, the second KT state) and the advantageous special state. It is possible to control to a disadvantageous special state (for example, the first KT state), and the setting suggestion effect executing means plays a specific area when the game medium passes through the specific area during the advantageous special state and during the disadvantageous special state. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect with different selection ratios depending on when the medium passes (for example, only when the game ball wins a small hit in the special winning opening during the second KT state, the suggestion at the time of the small hit winning is made. It may be configured to perform an effect or a prize ball number display suggestion effect). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the type of special state.

(Explanation of feature section 020SH)
Next, a game machine related to the feature unit 020SH will be described. The gaming machine according to the feature unit 020SH is a gaming machine capable of playing a game. In this embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game will be described as an example.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 020SH includes a game state control means, a variable display execution means, a pre-start determination means, a hold storage means, a setting means, and an effect execution means. The game state control means, the variable display execution means, the pre-start determination means, the hold storage means, and the setting means are realized by, for example, the CPU 103 of the main board 11. The effect execution means is realized by, for example, the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12.

The game state control means controls the game state. The game state control means can be controlled into an advantageous state, a special state, a special state, and a non-special state. The advantageous state is an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, for example, a jackpot gaming state. The special state is a gaming state different from the advantageous state, for example, a small hit gaming state.

The special state is a state that is easily controlled by the special state, for example, the second KT state. The second KT state is a game state in which small hits are likely to occur, and a game state in which a game ball is likely to win a prize in the special winning opening. The non-special state is a gaming state in which it is more difficult to control the special state than the special state, and is, for example, the first KT state. The first KT state is a game state in which small hits are likely to occur, but it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening. The 2nd KT
Comparing the state and the first KT state, the frequency of small hits may be the same, but the second
In the KT state, the time controlled by the small hit game (for example, the opening time) is longer, so that the small hit game is more likely to be controlled.

In the gaming machine according to the feature unit 020SH, the advantageous state and the special state are states in which variable display (also referred to as "variable display") is not performed. Specifically, the state in which the variable display is not performed is a state in which identification information (big hit symbol) indicating an advantageous state is derived and displayed, and the identification information is stopped and displayed, or identification information (small) indicating a special state. The winning symbol) is derived and displayed, and the identification information is stopped and displayed. For example, in a configuration in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel at the same time, the state in which the variable display is not performed is one of the symbols (
(Special symbol) is in the stop display in which the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is derived and displayed.
For the other symbol, the case where the variable display is interrupted is also included.

Further, in the gaming machine related to the feature unit 020SH, the effect executing means is in a special state (second KT).
When controlled to a special state (small hit game state) in the state), it is possible to execute a special effect corresponding to the control of the special state. When controlled to a special state in a special state (second KT state), a game ball is likely to win a prize in the special winning opening. Therefore, the effect executing means executes, for example, a special effect for notifying the small hit game.

On the other hand, when the effect executing means is controlled to a special state in the non-special state (first KT state), it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that is different from the special effect and suggests a content advantageous to the player. .. Even if the special state is controlled in the non-special state (first KT state), the game ball rarely wins in the special winning opening. Therefore, in the non-special state, the effect executing means does not execute the special effect.

The suggestion effect is, for example, a hold change suggestion effect based on the look-ahead determination, a set value suggestion effect, a probability change notification effect, and the like, as will be described later. However, the suggestion effect is not limited to these, and may be, for example, today's maximum number of consecutive villas in pachinko game machine 1, total variable display number, total number of prize balls, etc., or in explanation of the content of effect in pachinko game machine 1. There may be. Further, the content that is advantageous to the player, which is suggested by the suggestion effect, may be any information that the player wants to know in playing the game, and for example, the content that suggests that the player is in a disadvantageous state ( For example, suggestion that it is a low setting value) is also included.

Further, in the gaming machine related to the feature unit 020SH, the effect executing means can perform the variable display of the decorative identification information in response to the variable display of the identification information. The decorative identification information is, for example, a decorative pattern. Further, when the effect executing means is controlled to the special state in the special state, the effect executing means displays the special display result as the display result of the decoration identification information. The special display result is, for example, a combination of decorative symbols indicating small hits (for example, "1, 3, 5"). When the effect executing means is controlled to the special state in the special state, a specific character indicating that the special state is controlled may be displayed.

Further, when the effect executing means is controlled to the special state in the non-special state, the effect executing means displays a predetermined display result different from the special display result as the display result of the decoration identification information. The predetermined display result is, for example, a combination of decorative symbols indicating loss. The combination of lost symbols may be randomly determined for each variable display.

Further, in the gaming machine related to the feature unit 020SH, the pre-start determination means determines whether or not the variable display that has not yet been started has a display result indicating that the display result of the variable display is controlled to an advantageous state. To do. The determination made by the pre-start determination means is, for example, a look-ahead determination, specifically, a determination having the same contents as the various determinations made when starting the variable display, and a determination made before the various timings. is there. The various determinations include, for example, a jackpot determination, a jackpot type determination, a fluctuation pattern determination, and the like.

The effect executing means can execute a suggestion effect that gives a suggestion regarding the pre-start determination means. The suggestion regarding the pre-start determination means is, for example, a suggestion of an effect performed based on the determination result of the look-ahead determination.

Further, in the gaming machine related to the feature unit 020SH, the hold storage means stores the information related to the variable display as the hold storage information. The hold storage information is, for example, information that has been determined by the pre-start determination means, but may include information that has not been determined. The effect executing means displays the hold storage information stored in the hold storage means as a hold display. For example, the effect executing means holds and displays the hold storage information in a display mode according to the determination result by the pre-start determination means. The display mode of the hold display includes a normal display mode and a special display mode having a higher expectation than the normal display mode.

In addition, the effect executing means can execute an action effect acting on the hold display in the suggestion effect. Specifically, the effect executing means can execute an action effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display may change as the hold change suggestion effect. For example, the action effect is an effect of clarifying the hold display of the target that may change and performing some action on the hold display of the target. Specifically, the action effect is, for example, an effect in which an object hits the hold display of the target, or an effect in which lightning strikes the hold display of the target. In the gaming machine according to the feature unit 020SH, there are times when the display mode of the hold display changes and times when the display mode of the hold display does not change. An effect in which the action effect is performed and the display mode of the hold display does not change is a so-called Gase effect (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “Gase hold change suggestion effect”). The suggestion effect for suggesting the pre-start determination means is not limited to the hold change suggestion effect. For example, when the hold storage information determined to be a big hit is stored, or the SP that becomes a loss (
When the hold storage information determined to be a look-ahead variation pattern of the super) reach is stored, a background image or a character image suggesting that the hold storage information with a high expectation of a big hit is stored is displayed. It may be used as a production.

Further, in the gaming machine related to the feature unit 020SH, the setting means can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. The set value is a plurality of values set corresponding to the winning probability of the jackpot, and is, for example, a value set to any one of "1" to "6". The effect execution means is a suggestion effect that gives suggestions regarding the setting means (hereinafter, ""
"Set value suggestion effect") can be executed. The set value suggestion effect is an effect of causing the player to guess the set value, for example, by using the background image or the character image. The set value suggestion effect may be an effect indicating the set value itself. In the feature unit 020SH, the set value suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when the set value is higher than when the set value is low.

Further, in the gaming machine related to the feature unit 020SH, the non-special state includes the first non-special state.
There is a second non-special state, which is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than the first non-special state. The first non-special state is a non-probability change state (low probability state), for example, a low probability / first KT state. 2nd
The non-special state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), for example, a high probability / first KT state.
The effect executing means can execute a common effect when it is controlled in the first non-special state and when it is controlled in the second non-special state. The common effect is, for example, an effect controlled by a common effect mode (“chance time mode” in the embodiment according to the feature unit 020SH). The effect mode is, for example, an effect in which a specific effect image different from the usual one, a specific BGM, or the like is executed over one or a plurality of variable displays. The effect image referred to here is, for example, a background image, a character image, a hold image, an active display image, an interface image, a decorative pattern image of a display mode, and the like.

Further, the suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the second non-special state is controlled (hereinafter, may be referred to as "probability change suggestion effect"). The probability change suggestion effect is, for example, an effect of displaying an image (for example, a specific background image, a specific character image, a character image, etc.) that suggests that the second non-special state is controlled.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the feature unit 020SH, the effect executing means can execute a plurality of types of suggestive effects having different modes as the suggestive effects. As described above, the plurality of types of suggestion effects include a hold change suggestion effect, a set value suggestion effect, and a probability change suggestion effect. In addition, there are a plurality of types of suggestion effects for each suggestion effect. For example, in the case of a hold change suggestion effect, there may be an effect in which the hold display is likely to change and an effect in which the hold display is unlikely to change.
Further, for example, in the case of the setting value suggestion effect, there are a mode suggesting that the setting value is likely to be high, a mode suggesting that the setting value is likely to be low, and the like. Further, in the case of the probabilistic change suggestion effect, there are a mode suggesting that the probability of being controlled in the probabilistic state is high, and a mode suggesting that the possibility of being controlled in the probabilistic state is low.

In the feature unit 020SH, the degree of advantage of the content suggested to the player differs depending on which type of suggestion effect is executed. For example, in the set value suggestion effect, when the set value suggestion effect suggesting that the setting is high is executed, the set value suggestion effect suggesting that the setting is likely to be low is performed. It is more advantageous for the player than when it is broken. Further, for example, in the probability change suggestion effect, when the probability change suggestion effect suggesting that the probability of being controlled to the probability change state is high is executed, it is suggested that the possibility of being controlled to the probability change state is low. This is more advantageous for the player than when the probability change suggestion effect of the aspect is executed.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the feature unit 020SH, the variable display executing means can execute the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel. Feature part 020SH
The gaming machine according to the above is provided with a first variable winning means. The first variable winning means is, for example, a variable winning ball device 6B (see FIG. 1) having a second starting winning opening. The first variable winning means has a first state (open state) in which the game medium easily passes through the starting area and a second state in which the game medium does not easily pass through the starting area.
It can be changed to a state (closed state).

The game state control means can control the first variable winning means into a predetermined state in which the first variable winning means is likely to change to the first state. The predetermined state is, for example, a non-special state, specifically, a first KT state (a game state in which a small hit game in which a game ball hardly wins is repeatedly executed). The effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect when it is controlled to a special state in a predetermined state.

Further, the gaming machine according to the feature unit 020SH includes a second variable winning means. The second variable winning means is, for example, a special variable winning ball device 17 (see FIG. 1) having a special winning opening for small hits. The second variable winning means can be changed into a winning easy state (open state) in which the game ball is easy to win and a winning difficult state (closed state) in which the game ball is difficult to win. The second variable winning means can be changed to a winning easy state in a special state (small hit game state). The effect executing means executes the suggestion effect in response to the change of the second variable winning means to the winning easy state. In particular,
For example, the effect executing means executes the suggestion effect in accordance with the opening timing of the second variable winning means.

Further, in the game machine according to the feature unit 020SH, when the effect executing means is controlled to the special state (small hit) in the special state (for example, the second KT state), the game medium has passed through the special area. It is possible to execute a predetermined effect corresponding to the passage of a special area of the game medium. Specifically, the special area is an area through which the game ball that has won the special variable winning ball device 7 passes (
For example, V region and discharge region). The game ball that has passed through the special area is detected by the second count switch 24 provided in the special winning opening. As a result, the prize balls are paid out. The predetermined effect is, for example, an effect showing a prize in the special variable winning ball device 7, or an effect of adding the number of prize balls paid out by the winning.

Further, when the effect executing means is controlled to the special state in the non-special state (for example, the first KT state), the effect executing means does not execute the predetermined effect regardless of whether or not the game medium has passed through the special area. Specifically, when the effect executing means is controlled to the special state in the non-special state, the effect executing means executes the suggestion effect without executing the predetermined effect.

(Regarding the game state and transition of the production mode after the big hit game in the feature unit 020SH)
Next, with reference to FIG. 11-1, the transition of the gaming state after the big hit game in the feature unit 020SH and the transition of the effect mode according to the gaming state will be described. FIG. 11-1 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the game state and the effect mode after the big hit game according to the feature unit 020SH. As shown in FIG. 11-1, in the feature unit 020SH, in the normal state (low probability / low base state), the normal mode is controlled. Also, in the high probability / low base state, the small hit RU
It is controlled to SH mode. Further, in the high probability / high base state and the low probability / high base state, the channel time mode is controlled. That is, in the high probability / high base state and the low probability / high base state, a common effect is executed.

Further, as for the effect during the big hit game, a common effect may be executed depending on whether the big hit game based on the 6R probability variation big hit is executed or the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit is executed. That is, it is sufficient that the combination of the common decorative symbols is stopped and displayed for the 6R probability variation jackpot and the 6R normal jackpot, and the common jackpot effect is executed even during each jackpot game.
As a result, whether the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot was executed (whether it is controlled to the high probability / high base state) or the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot was executed (to the low probability / high base state). It is possible to prevent the player from discriminating whether it is controlled).

In the feature unit 020SH, in the KT state (first KT state and second KT state), the normal jackpot determined in the jackpot type determination is not determined to be a 6R normal jackpot in principle, but is determined to be a 2R normal jackpot. Therefore, when the 2R jackpot game is executed in the KT state, the player knows that the transition to the low probability / high base state has occurred or the low probability / high base state has been continued. Therefore, when the jackpot game based on the 2R normal jackpot is executed in the KT state, an effect of notifying the low probability / high base state (a separately prepared jackpot effect or effect mode) may be executed.

Further, when the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot is executed in the KT state, the player knows that the transition to the high probability / high base state has occurred or the high probability / high base state has been continued. .. Therefore, when the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot is executed in the KT state, an effect of notifying the high probability / high base state (a separately prepared jackpot effect or effect mode) may be executed. In other words, the chance time mode may be controlled only in the so-called first hit case, that is, the transition from the normal state to the high probability / high base state or the transition to the low probability / high base state. It may be limited to the case where.

In the jackpot type determination, the 6R normal jackpot may be determined without determining the 2R normal jackpot. As a result, in the KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot is executed and the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot is executed, and by performing a common effect, any type of jackpot game is performed. Was executed (
It is possible to prevent the player from discriminating whether it is controlled to a high probability / high base state or a low probability / high base state).

(Example of effect mode setting process related to feature unit 020SH)
Next, an example of the effect mode setting process related to the feature unit 020SH will be described with reference to FIG. 11-2. FIG. 11-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect mode setting process related to the feature unit 020SH. The effect mode setting process is a process executed in the special figure hit wait process of S173 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 11-2, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received (step 020SHS11). When the jackpot start designation command (first jackpot start designation command or second jackpot start designation command) is received (step 020SHS11: YES), that is, when a jackpot occurs, the effect control CP
U120 determines whether or not it is a probabilistic jackpot (step 020SHS12). When it is not a probabilistic jackpot (step 020SHS12: NO), that is, when it is a 2R normal jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines to control the effect mode to the chance time mode (step 020SHS14). Ends a series of processes. In the case of a 2R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 may determine an effect mode (separately prepared effect mode) for notifying a low probability / high base state.

On the other hand, in step 020SHS12, when it is a probability variation jackpot (step 020S).
HS12: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot (step 020SHS13). 6R Probability change jackpot (step 020SHS13)
: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines to control the effect mode to the chance time mode by shifting to step 020SHS14. That is, the effect control CPU 120 executes a common effect (chance mode) in the case of the normal jackpot and the case of the 6R probability variation jackpot. On the other hand, when it is not a 6R probability variation jackpot (step 020SHS1)
3: NO), the effect control CPU 120 decides to control the effect mode to the small hit RUSH mode (step 020SHS15), and ends a series of processes.

When the jackpot start designation command has not been received in step 020SHS11 (
Step 020SHS11: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 020SHS16). When the small hit start designation command is received (step 020SHS16: YES), the effect control CPU 12
0 ends a series of processes. On the other hand, when the small hit start designation command has not been received (step 020SHS16: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed (step 020SHS17). In step 020SHS17, the effect control CPU 120 does not receive the command designating to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, and the reception waiting time of the command (““” in step 020SHS17
Determine whether or not (corresponding to the "predetermined period") has passed.

In step 020SHS17, when the predetermined period has not passed (step 020).
SHS17: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. When the predetermined period has elapsed (step 020SHS17: YES), that is, when it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing", the effect control CPU 120 has the value of the effect high base number counter "0". It is determined whether or not (step 020SHS18). When the value of the high base count counter for production is "0" (step 020SHS18: YES)
, The effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. When the value of the production high base number counter is not "0" (step 020SHS18: NO), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts the value of the production high base number counter by "1" (step 020SHS19).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the effect high base number counter has become “0” (step 020SHS20). When the value of the high base number counter for production is not "0" (step 020SHS20: NO), the production control CPU 12
0 ends a series of processes. On the other hand, when the value of the effect high base count counter becomes "0" (step 020SHS20: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines to control the effect mode to the normal mode (step 020SHS21), and a series of series End the process.

In the effect mode setting process shown in FIG. 11-2, it is common when the process of steps 020SHS12 to 14 controls the high probability / high base state or the low probability / high base state after the jackpot game is executed. It is controlled by the chance time mode, which is a production. For this reason,
It is possible to prevent the player from being able to determine whether the control is in the high probability / high base state or in the low probability / high base state.

(Example of variable display compatible display control processing related to feature unit 020SH)
Next, an example of the variable display compatible display (hold display and active display) control process related to the feature unit 020SH will be described with reference to FIG. 11-3. FIG. 11-3 shows the feature unit 020SH.
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display correspondence display control processing which concerns on. The variable display compatible display control process is a process executed in the look-ahead notice setting process of S161 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the start winning designation command is received (step 020SHS31). When the start prize designation command (first valid start prize designation command or second valid start prize designation command) has not been received (step 020SHS31: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. When the start prize designation command is received (step 020SHS31: YES), the initial color which is the display mode at the start of the hold display is determined (step 020SHS32).
), The final color which is the final display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display and active display) is determined (step 020SHS33). In the determination of the initial color and the determination of the final color, the initial color determination table and the final color determination table described below are used.

(Initial color determination table and final color determination table for variable display compatible display)
FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an initial color determination table and a final color determination table of the variable display compatible display. In FIG. 11-4, (A) shows an initial color determination table, and (B).
) Indicates the final color determination table. In (A), the display mode indicates a display mode when the variable display compatible display (hold display) is started. Further, in (B), the display mode indicates the display mode of the variable display compatible display (active display) to be finally displayed.

In the feature unit 020SH, the display mode of the variable display compatible display is such that the variable display is being executed, the variable display is started (so-called hold shift), or the small hit game is being executed in the chance time mode. It can change at the timing of change. In (A) and (B), four types of display modes are shown: "red", "green", "blue", and "gray". The display mode of "ash" is a normal display mode. Further, the display modes of "red", "green" and "blue" are special display modes different from the normal display modes.

Further, in (A) and (B), the fluctuation pattern indicates any one of "big hit", "SP (super) reach loss", and "other loss". Here, in the feature unit 020SH, the production mainly in the chance time mode (high probability / high base state or low probability / high base state) will be described. Therefore, in FIG. 11-4, the high probability / high base The variation patterns used in the state or the low probability / high base state (variation patterns shown in FIGS. 10-8 (E) and 10-9 (H)) will be described as an example.

The fluctuation pattern of the "big hit" is, for example, the second fluctuation pattern # 13, which has a fluctuation time of 2 minutes.
It is # 28. In the second fluctuation patterns # 13 and # 28, the decorative symbol indicating the big hit is stopped and displayed after the SP reach. The fluctuation pattern of "SP reach loss" is, for example, the fluctuation time of 2.
The second variation pattern of the minute is # 09, # 12, # 24, # 27. Second fluctuation pattern # 0
In 9, # 12, # 24, and # 27, the decorative design indicating the loss is stopped and displayed after the SP reach. The fluctuation pattern of "other loss" is, for example, a second fluctuation time of 1 second or 5 seconds.
The fluctuation patterns are # 07, # 08, # 22, and # 23.

In addition, the "other loss" fluctuation pattern is the second fluctuation pattern # 10, # 11, # 25, # which is selected when the fluctuation time is 1 second or 5 seconds and it is determined to be a small hit. 26
including. Second fluctuation pattern # 07, # 08, # 22, # 2 with fluctuation time of 1 second or 5 seconds
In 3 and the second variation patterns # 10, # 11, # 25, and # 26, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not change to the SP reach mode, and the fixed decorative symbol of the combination of loss is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the second fluctuation pattern # 07, # 08, # 22, # 23 and the second fluctuation pattern # 10, # 11, # 25, # 26 in which the fluctuation time is 1 second or 5 seconds, the normal reach effect is produced. It may be performed and the definite decorative symbol of the combination of the loss in the reach mode may be stopped and displayed.

As shown in (B), in the case of the "big hit" fluctuation pattern, the final color display mode is "red".
Is most likely to be selected, then "green" is most likely to be selected, then "blue" is most likely to be selected, and "ash" is the least likely to be selected. Further, as shown in (B), in the case of the fluctuation pattern of "SP reach loss", "green" is most likely to be selected, then "red" is most likely to be selected, and then "blue" is the final color display mode. It is easy to select, and "ash" is the most difficult to select. Further, as shown in (B), in the case of the fluctuation pattern of "other loss",
As for the display mode of the final color, "ash" is most likely to be selected, then "blue" is most likely to be selected, then "green" is most likely to be selected, and "red" is most difficult to select. Therefore, when the jackpot expectation of the display mode is expressed by an inequality sign, it becomes "red">"green">"blue">"gray".

On the other hand, as shown in (A), in any variation pattern, "gray" is most likely to be selected, then "blue" is most likely to be selected, and then "green" is selected as the initial color display mode. It is easy to do, and "red" is the most difficult to select. As a result, it is possible to gradually change from a display mode having a low expectation to a display mode having a high expectation at the timing of changing the display mode. Comparing (A) and (B) with respect to the fluctuation patterns of "other losses", (B) has a higher expectation of display modes ("blue" and "green").
Is easier to select. As a result, even in the case of the fluctuation pattern of "other loss", it is possible to gradually change from the display mode with low expectation to the display mode with high expectation. Further, in the feature unit 020SH, the display mode is changed to a display mode with a low degree of expectation, that is, the so-called effect is prevented from falling.

Returning to FIG. 11-3, when the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial color and the final color, it compares the expected degree of the determined initial color and the display mode of the final color, and is more final than the expected degree of the display mode of the initial color. It is determined whether or not the degree of expectation of the color display mode is high (step 020SHS34). When the degree of expectation indicated by the final color display mode is lower than the degree of expectation indicated by the initial color display mode (step 020SHS34: NO), the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display compatible display according to the initial color display mode. (Step 020SHS37). If the expectation level indicated by the final color display mode is lower than the expectation level indicated by the initial color display mode, and if a change effect for changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display is performed, the effect is reduced. Therefore, by shifting to step 020SHS37, the change effect is not performed.

On the other hand, in step 020SHS34, when the degree of expectation indicated by the final color display mode is higher than the degree of expectation indicated by the initial color display mode (step 020SHS34: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the final color display mode. , Store in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 122 (step 020SHS35).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets a change flag indicating that a change effect for changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display is performed (step 020SHS36). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display compatible display (hold display) according to the display mode of the initial color (step 020SHS37), and ends a series of processes.

(An example of suggestion effect execution processing performed by the effect control CPU 120 when controlled to a small hit game state)
Next, an example of the suggestion effect execution process performed by the effect control CPU 120 when the small hit game state is controlled will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-5 and 11-6. Figure 11-5
And FIG. 11-6 shows the effect control CPU 120 when the small hit game state is controlled.
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the suggestion effect execution processing performed by. 11-5 and 11-
The suggestion effect execution process shown in 6 is a process executed in the special figure hit wait process of S173 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 11-5, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 020SHS51). When the small hit start designation command has not been received (step 020SHS51: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. When the small hit start designation command is received (step 020SHS5)
1: YES), it is determined whether or not the effect mode is controlled to the chance time mode (first KT state) (step 020SHS52). When the effect mode is controlled to the chance time mode (step 020SHS52: YES), the effect control CPU 120 is
Determine whether the production mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode (step 020)
SHS53).

When the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode (step 020SHS53)
: YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets to execute the effect (effect for notifying the small hit) according to the small hit RUSH mode (step 020SHS54), and ends a series of processes. On the other hand, when the effect mode is not controlled to the small hit RUSH mode (step 020SHS53: NO), that is, when the effect mode is controlled to the normal mode, the effect control CPU 120 produces an effect (loss) according to the normal mode. Production: Make a setting (step 020SHS55) to execute (continuously display the decorative pattern stopped and displayed by the combination of loss), and end a series of processing.

In step 020SHS52, when the effect mode is controlled to the chance time mode (step 020SHS52: YES), the effect control CPU 120 is set with a change flag indicating that a change effect for changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display is performed. It is determined whether or not the flag has been set (step 020SHS56). When the change flag is not set (step 020SHS56: NO), the effect control CPU 120 is set to step 020S.
Move to HS63. On the other hand, when the change flag is set (step 020SHS)
56: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display mode of the hold display at the present time is the final color (step 020SHS57).

When the display mode of the hold display at the present time is the final color (step 020SHS57: YE)
S), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 020SHS63. On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold display at the present time is not the final color (step 020SHS57: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of the hold change suggestion effect (step 020SHS5).
8). In determining the presence or absence of the hold change suggestion effect, the hold change suggestion effect determination table described below is used.

FIG. 11-7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a determination table for various suggestion effects. Figure 11-7 (
A) shows a pending change suggestion effect determination table. The hold change suggestion effect determination table is a table for determining either "with hold change suggestion effect" or "without hold change suggestion effect". "With hold change suggestion effect" is after performing the hold change suggestion effect (
For example, at the start of the next variable display), it is shown that a series of change effects in which the display mode of the hold display changes is performed. "No hold change suggestion effect" indicates that the hold change suggestion effect is not performed and the display mode of the hold display does not change (the change effect is not performed).

In FIG. 11-7 (A), the determination ratio of "with pending change suggestion effect" is higher than the determination ratio of "without pending change suggestion effect". Therefore, in the small hit game state, when the hold display has not changed to the display mode of the final color, the hold change suggestion effect is likely to be performed. It should be noted that the display mode of the hold display is changed to a display mode in which the display mode of the hold display being displayed shows a higher degree of expectation by performing the hold change suggestion effect. Specifically, for example, if the display mode of the hold display at the present time is "gray", it changes to "blue", and if the display mode of the hold display at the present time is "blue", it changes to "green". I will do it.

The display mode of the hold display after the change is not limited to the display mode in which the expectation level is increased by one step, and may be a display mode in which the expectation level is increased by two levels or a display mode in which the expectation level is increased by three levels. Good. Specifically, the display mode for changing the display mode of the hold display may be a display mode that is less than or equal to the expected degree indicated by the final color. For example, when there are a plurality of display modes up to the display mode of the final color. (For example, when the initial color is "gray" and the final color is "red"), one of multiple display modes ("blue", "green", "red") is determined. You may try to do it.

Further, in the embodiment related to the feature unit 020SH, whether or not to perform a change effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display is determined, for example, when the variable display or the small hit game is executed.
It was decided to decide each time, but it is not limited to this. For example, a scenario (story) indicating the timing of performing the change effect up to the final color may be determined in advance, and whether or not to perform the change effect may be determined by referring to the scenario. In addition, by including the transition of the display mode in the scenario, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform the change effect and the color after the change by referring to the scenario.

Returning to FIG. 11-5, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the hold change suggestion effect (step 020SHS59). When the pending change suggestion effect is not performed (step 020)
SHS59: NO), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 020SHS63. On the other hand, when performing the hold change suggestion effect (step 020SHS59: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display mode after the change of the hold display is the final color (step 020SHS60). Specifically, in step 020SHS60, the effect control CP
The U120 refers to the display mode of the final color stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 122, and determines whether or not the display mode of the hold display after the change is the final color.

When the display mode of the hold display after the change is not the final color (step 020SHS60: NO)
), The effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 020SHS62. On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold display after the change is the final color (step 020SHS60: YES), the effect control CPU 120 resets the change flag (step 020SHS61). Then, the effect control CPU 120 makes settings for executing the hold change suggestion effect (step 020SHS62), and ends a series of processes. An example of the pending change suggestion effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 11-10, but is a series of effects including a first fanning effect, a second fanning effect, and an action effect.

In FIG. 11-6, in step 020SHS64, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of the set value suggestion effect (step 020SHS63). In determining the presence or absence of the set value suggestion effect, the set value suggestion effect determination table described below is used.

FIG. 11-7 (B) shows a set value suggestion effect determination table. The set value suggestion effect determination table is a table for determining the presence / absence of the set value suggestion effect and the type of the set value suggestion effect for each set value. In FIG. 11-7 (B), the “set value” indicates any of “1” to “6”.

In addition, the "type" of the setting value suggestion effect is "odd number setting suggestion" which suggests that the setting value is an odd number setting, "even number setting suggestion" which suggests that the setting value is an even number setting, and the setting value. Is "4
"Suggested to be 4 or more set values" and "Suggested to be 4 or more" are shown. The effect of "suggesting odd number setting" is an effect that can be determined when the set value is an odd number (any of "1", "3", and "5"). The effect of "suggesting even number setting" is an effect that can be determined when the set value is an even number (any of "2", "4", and "6"). The effect of "suggesting a set value of 4 or more" has a set value of 4 or more (
It is a production that can be determined in the case of "4", "5", or "6").

Further, the set value suggestion effect has a different effect mode for each type, for example, the background image is different. The background image is, for example, an image showing the morning in the case of the "odd number setting suggestion" effect, and an image showing the daytime in the case of the "even number setting suggestion" effect, and the "setting value 4 or more suggestion" effect. If,
It is an image showing the night.

As shown in the set value suggestion effect determination table, "no set value suggestion effect" is determined at the highest ratio regardless of whether the "set value" is "1" to "6". As a result, it is possible to prevent the set value suggestion effect from being performed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from easily guessing the set value.

Further, the effect of the "odd number setting suggestion" is determined at a higher rate as the "setting value" becomes higher as "1", "3", and "5". Therefore, it can be suggested that there is a high possibility that the set value is "5" by producing the "odd number setting suggestion" effect. Similarly, the effect of "even number setting suggestion" increases as the "setting value" becomes "2", "4", and "6".
Determined at a high rate. Therefore, it can be suggested that there is a high possibility that the set value is "6" by producing the "even number setting suggestion" effect. Further, the effect of "suggesting a set value of 4 or more" is determined at a higher rate as the "set value" becomes higher as "4", "5", and "6". For this reason, the setting value is set to "Suggestion of 4 or more setting values".
It can be suggested that there is a high possibility that it is "6".

Returning to FIG. 11-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the set value suggestion effect as a result of determining the presence / absence of the set value suggestion effect in step 020SHS63 (step 020SHS64). When performing a set value suggestion effect (step 020SHS64: YES)
, The effect control CPU 120 makes settings for executing the set value suggestion effect (step 0).
20SHS65), a series of processes is completed. As for the setting value suggestion effect, for an example,
As will be described later with reference to FIG. 11-12, this is a series of productions including the first fanning effect and the second fanning effect. On the other hand, when the set value suggestion effect is not performed (step 020SHS64: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of the probabilistic arousal effect (step 020SHS66). In determining the presence or absence of the probabilistic effect, the probabilistic effect determination table described below is used.

FIG. 11-7 (C) shows a probability change suggestion effect determination table. The probability change suggestion effect determination table is a table for determining the presence / absence of the probability change suggestion effect and the type of the probability change suggestion effect for each of the high probability state and the low probability state. In FIG. 11-7 (C), the "probability state" is a "high probability" which is a probabilistic state (high probability / high base state) and a "low probability change" which is a non-probability state (low probability / high base state). Indicates one of. In addition, the types of probabilistic suggestion effects are "high probability suggestion", which suggests that there is a high probability of being in a high probability state, and "high probability suggestion", which is lower than "high probability suggestion". There are three types, "suggesting a possibility" that suggests "probability" and "suggesting a low probability" that suggests that the possibility of being in a high probability state is lower than "suggesting a possibility".

As shown in the probability change suggestion effect determination table, the "probability state" is "high probability" and "low probability".
In any case, "no probabilistic suggestion effect" is determined at the highest rate. This will
It is possible to prevent the probability change suggestion effect from being performed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from easily guessing whether the player is controlled to the high probability state or the low probability state. ..

In addition, as shown in the probability change suggestion effect determination table, when the "probability state" is "high probability", the rate at which "no probability change suggestion effect" is determined is lower than in the case of "low probability". That is, the ratio of determining any kind of probability change suggestion effect is high. As a result, it can be suggested that there is a high possibility that the probability change state is controlled by the probability change suggestion effect itself.

In addition, when the "probability state" is "high probability", the effect of "suggesting high possibility" is most likely to be determined, followed by the effect of "suggesting medium possibility", which suggests "small possibility". Is the most difficult to determine. In addition, when the "probability state" is "low probability", the effect of "suggesting low possibility" is most likely to be determined, followed by the effect of "suggesting medium possibility", which suggests "high possibility". Is the most difficult to determine. As a result, it can be suggested that there is a high possibility that the state is controlled to a high probability state when the effect of "suggesting high probability" is performed. Also, if the effect of "suggesting the possibility" is performed, is it controlled to a high probability state?
It is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the control is in a low probability state. In addition, it can be suggested that there is a high possibility that the state is controlled to a low probability state when the effect of "suggesting low probability" is performed.

Returning to FIG. 11-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the probability change suggestion effect as a result of determining the presence / absence of the probability change suggestion effect in step 020SHS66 (step 02).
0SHS67). When performing the probability change suggestion effect (step 020SHS68: YES), the effect control CPU 120 makes a setting for executing the probability change suggestion effect (step 020SH).
S69), the series of processes is completed. The details of the probabilistic suggestion effect are shown in Fig. 11-13.
As will be described later using the above, it is a series of productions including the first fanning effect and the second fanning effect. on the other hand,
When the probability change suggestion effect is not performed (step 020SHS68: NO), the effect control CPU1
20 determines whether or not all the final colors of the hold storage being displayed on hold are determined to be gray (
Step 020SHS69). Specifically, in step 020SHS69, the effect control CPU 120 sets the final color of the hold storage being displayed by referring to the display mode of the final color of each hold storage stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 122. Judge whether all are decided to be gray.

When all the final colors of the hold storage being displayed on hold are not determined to be gray (step 020S)
HS69: NO), that is, when at least one of the reserved storages in the hold display is determined to be the special display mode, the effect control CPU 120 performs the first fanning effect ((FIG. 11-10) (FIG. 11-10). Make settings to execute (see C)) (step 020SHS73).
Ends a series of processes. On the other hand, when the final color of the hold storage during the hold display is all determined to be gray (step 020SHS69: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of the Gase hold change suggestion effect (step 020SHS70). Gase hold change suggestion production
It is a hold change suggestion effect that is executed even though the display mode of the hold display does not change.
As a result, it is a series of productions in which the pending change suggestion production becomes a disappointing production. In determining the presence or absence of the Gase hold change suggestion effect, the Gase hold change suggestion effect determination table described below is used.

FIG. 11-7 (D) shows a Gase hold change suggestion effect determination table. The Gase hold change suggestion effect determination table is a table for determining either "Gase hold change suggestion effect" or "Gase hold change suggestion effect not present". "Gase hold change suggestion production"
Indicates that the display mode of the hold display does not change after the hold change suggestion effect is performed (for example, at the start of the next variable display). "No Gase hold change suggestion effect" indicates that the hold change suggestion effect is not performed and the display mode of the hold display does not change (the change effect is not performed).

The decision rate of "with Gase hold change suggestion effect" is higher than the decision rate of "without Gase hold change suggestion effect". Therefore, in the small hit game state, the production can be made lively by the effect of suggesting a change on hold.

In the feature unit 020SH, the Gase hold change suggestion effect is executed as the Gase effect, but the Gase setting value suggestion effect that is not performed by pretending to be the set value suggestion effect may be executed. It may be possible to execute a suggestion effect that does not pretend to be a suggestion effect.

Returning to FIG. 11-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines in step 020SHS70 whether or not to perform the Gase hold change suggestion effect, and as a result, determines whether or not to perform the Gase hold change suggestion effect (step 020SHS71). When performing a change suggestion effect on hold (step 020S)
HS71: YES), the effect control CPU 120 makes settings for executing the Gase hold change suggestion effect (step 020SHS72), and ends a series of processes. The Gase hold change suggestion effect will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 11-11, but is a series of effects including a first fanning effect, a second fanning effect, and an action effect. On the other hand, when the Gase hold change suggestion effect is not performed (step 020SHS71: NO), the effect control CPU 120 is set to step 020.
Move to SHS74.

Due to the above processing, during chance time mode (high probability / high base state or low probability /
In the small hit game state in the high base state), the hold change suggestion effect, the set value suggestion effect,
And any of the probabilistic suggestion effects can be executed.

(Example of change effect execution processing of variable display compatible display performed by the effect control CPU 120 during variable display)
Next, an example of the change effect execution process of the variable display compatible display performed by the effect control CPU 120 during the variable display will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-8. FIG. 11-8 is a flowchart showing an example of a change effect execution process of the variable display compatible display performed by the effect control CPU 120 during the variable display. The variable display compatible display change effect execution process shown in FIG. 11-8 is a process executed in the variable display start waiting process of S171 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 11-8, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a change flag indicating that a change effect for changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display is set is set (step 020SHS101). If the change flag is not set (step 020SH)
S101: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. On the other hand, when the change flag is set (step 020SHS101: YES), the effect control CPU
The 120 determines whether or not the display mode of the variable display compatible display at the present time is the final color (step 020SHS102).

When the display mode of the variable display compatible display at the present time is the final color (step 020SHS1)
02: YES), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. On the other hand, when the display mode of the variable display compatible display at the present time is not the final color (step 020SHS102: NO).
), The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the target variable display compatible display is the active display (step 020SHS103). When the target variable display compatible display is the active display (step 020SHS103: YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the active display to forcibly execute the final color display mode (step 020SHS107). ).

Here, in step 020SHS107, the display mode of the active display changes from the current display mode to the display mode of the final color, so that the display mode may change to a display mode in which the degree of expectation is one step higher. It may change to a display mode in which the degree is increased by two or more steps. On the other hand, when the target variable display compatible display is not the active display (step 020SH).
S103: NO), it is determined whether or not to change the display mode of the hold display (step 020).
SHS104). The rate of determining to change the display mode of the hold display is, for example, the decision rate of changing the hold display with the hold change suggestion effect during the small hit game (FIG. 11-7 (A).
) Shows the determination ratio of the pending change suggestion effect: 70/100), but may be different.

Then, when the effect control CPU 120 does not change the display mode of the hold display as a result of the determination in step 020SHS104 (step 020SHS105: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. On the other hand, when changing the display mode of the hold display (
Step 020SHS105: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display mode after the change of the hold display is the final color (step 020SHS106). Specifically, in step 020SHS106, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the display mode of the final color stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 122, and whether or not the display mode of the hold display after the change is the final color. To judge.

When the display mode of the hold display after the change is the final color (step 020SHS106: YE)
S), the hold display is set to execute a change effect for changing the display mode of the final color (step 020SHS107). Then, the effect control CPU 120 resets the change flag (step 020SHS108) and ends a series of processes. Step 02
In 0SHS106, when the display mode of the hold display after the change is not the final color (step 020SHS106: NO), the effect control CPU 120 performs a change effect of changing the display mode of the hold display to a display mode having a higher expectation. Make settings for execution (step 02)
0SHS109), a series of processes is completed.

It should be noted that the change effect of changing the display mode of the hold display during the variable display and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display with the hold change suggestion effect during the small hit game are different effects. Specifically, in the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display during the variable display, the hold change suggestion effect is not performed.

(Example of transition of production screen in small hit RUSH mode)
Next, an example of the transition of the effect screen in the small hit RUSH mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-9. In addition, in FIG. 11-9, in the small hit RUSH mode (high probability / second
The transition of the effect screen when the small hit game is executed during (in the KT state) is shown. FIG. 11-9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the effect screen in the small hit RUSH mode.

FIG. 11-9 (A) shows a variable display in the small hit RUSH mode. Specifically, the decorative symbol 020SH200 and the small symbol 020SH201 are variably displayed on the image display device 5. In the small hit RUSH mode, only the small symbol 020SH201 may be displayed without displaying the decorative symbol 020SH200. In displaying the screen shown in (A), the effect control CPU 120 has a display result and a variation pattern (for example, the second variation pattern # 32 in FIG. 10-9) specified by the effect control command received from the main board 11.
) And the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect and various advance notice effects, and the execution of various effects such as the effect mode according to the game state. The presence / absence, its mode, the execution start timing, etc. are determined, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed based on the determination result.

Further, in (A), the total prize ball number display 020SH204 is displayed. Total prize ball number display 0
20SH204 indicates the total number of prize balls in the consecutive chan including the small hit RUSH mode. Also,(
In A), a notification image including the characters "right-handed" is displayed in the upper right of the display area of the image display device 5 as a notification image corresponding to the right-handed notification. In addition, this broadcast image may include an image showing an arrow pointing to the right in order to encourage right-handed striking. Further, in FIG. 11-9, the hold display and the active display are not displayed, but these may be displayed. In the screen shown in (A), when the variable display stop timing is reached, the screen transitions to the screen in (B).

FIG. 11-9 (B) shows a screen at the time of stopping the fluctuation when it is determined that the small hit is a small hit during the small hit RUSH mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a small hit notification image 020SH202 indicating a small hit, and stops at a definite symbol "1, 3, 5" in which the small symbol 020SH201 is a combination indicating a small hit game. It is displayed. In displaying the screen shown in (B), the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a decorative pattern 020SH2 from the effect control pattern.
Corresponding to the fact that the end code indicating the end of the variable display of 00 (and the small symbol 020SH201) has been read, or that a command has been received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol 020SH200 should be stopped and displayed. , The final decorative symbol 020SH200, which is the display result of the decorative symbol 020SH200, is stopped and displayed. In (B), when the symbol confirmation period elapses, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (C).

FIG. 11-9 (C) shows a screen during the small hit game in the small hit determination in the small hit RUSH mode. Specifically, when there is a prize in the special winning opening in the small hit game state, the image display device 5 displays the winning effect image 020SH203 indicating the number of prize balls (for example, 10 balls).
Is displayed. Further, the total prize ball number display 020SH204 shows a number added by 10 balls as compared with (B) of FIG. 11-9.

FIG. 11-9 (D) shows a screen at the time of winning a prize in the special winning opening of the second ball during the small hit game. In the small hit game state, if there is a prize in the special winning opening of the second ball, the image display device 5
In addition, a prize effect image 020SH203 (for example, 10 balls) showing the number of prize balls (for example, 10 balls)
A total of two images) are displayed. Further, the total prize ball number display 020SH204 shows a number added by 10 balls as compared with (C) of FIG. 11-9. The same applies to the third and subsequent balls, and when there is a prize in the special winning opening, the image display device 5 further displays the winning effect image 020S.
H203 is additionally displayed.

In displaying the screens shown in (C) and (D), if the effect control CPU 120 receives the special winning opening winning designation command (effect control command) and the second KT state flag is set (that is,). , High probability / in the second KT state), 10 is added to the value of the prize ball counter, and the winning effect image 020SH203 is displayed on the image display device 5. When the small hit game is completed, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (E), and the next variable display is started.

As shown in FIG. 11-9, when it is determined to execute the small hit game in the small hit determination in the small hit RUSH mode, the small hit notification image 020SH202 and the small symbol 020SH201 showing the small hit are stopped and displayed. During the small hit game, the winning effect image 020SH203 is displayed according to the winning of the special winning opening. That is, high probability / second KT
In the state, when the small hit game state is controlled, the small hit notification image 020SH202, the small symbol 020SH201, and the winning effect image 020SH203 corresponding to the control of the small hit game state are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the small hit game in the small hit RUSH mode.

(Example of transition of suggestion production in chance time mode)
Next, an example of the suggestion effect in the chance time mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-10 to 11-13. In addition, in FIGS. 11-10 to 11-13, the transition of the effect screen when the small hit game is executed during the chance time mode (high probability / first KT state or low probability / first KT state) is shown. Shown. In the description of FIGS. 11-10 to 11-13, the same contents as those described with reference to FIGS. 11-9 are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

(An example of the transition of the effect that changes the display mode of the hold display during the chance time mode)
FIG. 11-10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display during the chance time mode. FIG. 11-11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a transition of the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display during the chance time mode. In addition, FIG. 11-1
0 and FIGS. 11-11 (A) to (E) show similar screens.

(A) of FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11 show a variable display in the chance time mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 includes a decorative symbol 020SH200 and a small symbol 0.
20SH201 is variably displayed. Further, the image display device 5 displays an active display 020SH205 and a hold display 020SH206 as variable display compatible displays. In the chance time mode, only the small symbol 020SH201 may be displayed without displaying the decorative symbol 020SH200. In (A), the variable display compatible display is
Both show a normal display mode (eg, "ash").

In displaying the screen shown in (A), the effect control CPU 120 has a display result or a variation pattern (for example, FIG. 10-) specified by an effect control command received from the main board 11.
The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed based on the second variation pattern # 11 of 8 or the second variation pattern # 26) of FIG. 10-9 or the gaming state. Further, in displaying the variable display compatible display, the effect control CPU 120 determines, for example, the display mode of the variable display compatible display based on the determination result of the look-ahead notice effect, and is variable in the display mode according to the result of the determination. Display correspondence Display the display. On the screen shown in (A), when the variable display stop timing comes, (B)
Transition to the screen of.

11-10 and 11-11 (B) show a screen at the time of suspension of fluctuation when it is determined that the small hit is a small hit in the small hit determination in the chance time mode. Specifically, although the image display device 5 is determined to be a small hit, a prize ball cannot be expected. Therefore, both the decorative symbol 020SH200 and the small hit notification image 020SH202 are symbols showing a combination of loss. It is stopped and displayed at, and the small hit notification image 020SH202 (Fig. 11-1).
0 (see (B)) is not displayed. In (B), when the symbol confirmation period has passed, (
Transition to the screen shown in C).

11-10 and 11-11 (C) show a screen during a small hit game in the chance time mode (fanning effect 1: step 1). Specifically, in the small hit game state in the chance time mode, the first fanning effect image 020SH211 suggesting that the suggestion effect (hold change suggestion effect, set value suggestion effect, and probability change suggestion effect) may be performed. Is displayed. The first fanning effect image 020SH211 is, for example, an image showing that a character appears. In addition, the decorative pattern 020SH200 is erased, and the small hit notification image 020S
H202 is stopped and displayed as it is with a symbol indicating a combination of loss. In the small hit game state in the chance time mode, the special winning opening is rarely won. Further, even if the special winning opening is won in the small hit game state in the chance time mode, the winning effect image 020SH203 shown in FIG. 11-9 (C) is not displayed.

11-10 and 11-11 (D) show a screen during a small hit game in the chance time mode (fanning effect 2: step 2). Specifically, the image display device 5 is equipped with (C.
The second fanning effect image 0 suggesting that a suggestion effect (one of the pending change suggestion effect, the set value suggestion effect, and the probability change suggestion effect) may be performed rather than the fanning effect 1 of).
20SH212 is displayed. The second fanning effect image 020SH212 is an image developed from the first fanning effect image 020SH211 and is, for example, an image in which the character operates (an image in which the character wields a sword).

(E) of FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11 show a pending change suggestion effect, specifically,
The screen during the small hit game in the chance time mode (action effect: step 3) is shown. Specifically, the action effect image 020SH213 is displayed on the image display device 5. The action effect image 020SH213 is an image obtained by developing the second fanning effect image 020SH212. For example, the character acts on the hold display 020SH206 (the sword acts on the hold display 020SH).
It is an image (contacting 206).

FIG. 11-10 (F) shows a change in the hold display in the chance time mode (step 4).
) Is shown. Specifically, in the image display device 5, the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 changes to a display mode with a high degree of expectation (for example, from "ash") at the timing of the hold shift 020SH214 when the variable display of the decorative symbol 020SH200 is started. (Changed to "blue") is displayed.
That is, as shown in (E), the action effect image 020SH213 in the small hit game state.
Acted on the hold display 020SH206, so that in FIG. 11-10 (F),
A series of change effects are performed in which the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 is changed. In FIG. 11-10, the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 is changed when the next variable display is started after the small hit game is completed, but the display mode is not limited to this, for example, a small hit. During the game (before the start of the next variable display), the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 may be changed.

On the other hand, FIG. 11-11 (F) shows a Gase effect (Gase hold change suggestion effect) in which the display mode of the hold display in the chance time mode does not change. Specifically, the decorative pattern 020SH
It shows the case where the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 does not change to the display mode of high expectation even at the timing of the hold shift 020SH214 when the variable display of 200 is started. That is, as shown in (E), although the action effect image 020SH213 (image showing the bow and arrow) acted on the hold display 020SH206 in the small hit game state, the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 in (F) of FIG. 11-11. Will not change (the production will not develop).

As shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11, when it is determined that the small hit game is executed in the small hit determination in the chance time mode in the feature unit 020SH, the decorative symbol 020SH200 and the small hit notification image 020SH202 Are all stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a combination of losses, and it is possible to execute a hold change suggestion effect (display of the action effect image 020SH213) suggesting a content advantageous to the player during the small hit game. Also,
By the hold change suggestion effect or the Gase hold change suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11, it is possible to expect a change in the display mode of the hold display, and it is controlled to the small hit game state in the chance time mode. You can make effective use of the period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

In addition, in (C) of FIG. 11-11, although the first fanning effect image 020SH211 is displayed, the second fanning effect image 020SH212 shown in (D) and the action effect image 020SH213 shown in (E) are not displayed. In some cases. Further, in (D), there is a case where the second fanning effect image 020SH212 is displayed, but the action effect image 020SH213 is not displayed. Further, in (E), the action effect image 020S
In some cases, H213 does not act on the hold display 020SH206 (for example, an effect of displaying an image in which a character flies at the upper left of the image display device 5).

In addition, the first fanning effect image 020SH211 and the second fanning effect image 020SH212,
For each image (or at least one of the images) with the action effect image 020SH213, a plurality of display modes are prepared, and the hold display 020 is set according to these display modes.
The ease of changing the display mode of SH206 may be different. Specifically, for each image, a display mode that is easily determined when the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 changes, and a display mode that is easily determined when the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 does not change.
You just have to prepare. Further, the display mode of the hold display 020SH 206 may be changed without displaying the action effect image 020SH213, that is, without performing the hold change suggestion effect.

(Example of transition of setting value suggestion effect in chance time mode)
FIG. 11-12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a set value suggestion effect in the chance time mode. In addition, (A) to (D) of FIG. 11-12 are (A) to FIG. 11-10 and FIG.
Since it is the same as A) to (D), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 11-12 (E) shows a screen (set value suggestion effect) during the small hit game in the chance time mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a set value suggestion image 020SH220 whose background image indicates night. Set value suggestion image The night background image in 020SH220 is an image suggesting that the set value is 4 or more (see (B) in FIG. 11-7).
..

FIG. 11-12 (F) shows that the small hit game has ended and the next variable display has been performed. In the set value suggestion effect shown in FIG. 11-12, the set value suggestion image 020SH220 is displayed within the period controlled by the small hit game state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the following Even after the start of the variable display, the set value suggestion image 020SH220 may be continuously displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-12, in the feature unit 020SH, when it is determined in the small hit determination in the chance time mode that the small hit game is to be executed, the decorative symbol 020SH2
Both 00 and the small hit notification image 020SH202 are stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a combination of loss, and the set value suggestion image 020SH220 is displayed during the small hit game. That is, in the feature unit 020SH, when the small hit game state is controlled in the high probability / first KT state or the low probability / first KT state, the set value suggestion effect (set value suggestion) suggesting the content advantageous to the player. Image 020SH220 display) can be executed. FIG. 11
By the set value suggestion effect shown in -12, the period controlled by the small hit game state in the chance time mode can be effectively utilized, and the interest can be improved.

In addition, in the set value suggestion effect, there is a case where the disappointment effect is performed in the same manner as the hold change suggestion effect. Specifically, in FIG. 11-12 (C), although the first fanning effect image 020SH211 is displayed, the second fanning effect image 020SH212 shown in (D) may not be displayed. Further, in (D), there is a case where the second fanning effect image 020SH212 is displayed, but the set value suggestion image 020SH220 is not displayed.

In addition, the first fanning effect image 020SH211 and the second fanning effect image 020SH212,
A plurality of display modes are prepared for each image (or at least one of the images) with the action effect image 020SH213, and the ease with which the set value suggestion effect is executed differs depending on these display modes. You may be. Specifically, for each image, a display mode that is easily determined when the set value suggestion effect is executed and a display mode that is easily determined when the set value suggestion effect is not executed may be prepared.

(An example of the transition of the probability change suggestion effect in the chance time mode)
FIG. 11-13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a probability change suggestion effect in the chance time mode. 11-13 (A) to (D) are shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-10 (A).
)-(D), the description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 11-13 (E) shows a screen (probability change suggestion effect) during a small hit game in the chance time mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a probability change suggestion image 020SH230 in which three characters appear. The probability change suggestion image 020SH230 in which three characters appear is an image showing that there is a high possibility that the character is controlled to a high probability state (see (C) in FIG. 11-7).

FIG. 11-13 (F) shows that the small hit game has ended and the next variable display has been performed. In the probability variation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 11-13, the probability variation suggestion image 020SH230 is displayed within the period controlled by the small hit game state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the following variable display is performed. The probability change suggestion image 020SH230 may be continuously displayed even after the start of.

As shown in FIG. 11-13, in the feature unit 020SH, when it is determined in the small hit determination in the chance time mode that the small hit game is to be executed, the decorative symbol 020SH2
Both 00 and the small hit notification image 020SH202 are stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a combination of loss, and the probability change suggestion image 020SH230 is displayed during the small hit game.
That is, in the feature unit 020SH, when controlled to the small hit gaming state in the high probability / first KT state or the low probability / first KT state, the probability variation suggestion effect (probability variation suggestion image 020SH230) suggesting the content advantageous to the player. Display) can be executed. By the probability change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 11-13, the period controlled by the small hit game state in the chance time mode can be effectively utilized, and the interest can be improved.

In addition, in the probabilistic change suggestion effect, there is a case where the disappointment effect is performed in the same manner as the hold change suggestion effect. Specifically, in FIG. 11-13 (C), there is a case where the first fanning effect image 020SH211 is displayed, but the second fanning effect image 020SH212 shown in (D) is not displayed. Further, in (D), there is a case where the second fanning effect image 020SH212 is displayed, but the probability change suggestion image 020SH230 is not displayed.

In addition, the first fanning effect image 020SH211 and the second fanning effect image 020SH212,
A plurality of display modes are prepared for each image (or at least one of the images) with the action effect image 020SH213, and the easiness of executing the probabilistic effect is different depending on these display modes. You may. Specifically, for each image, a display mode that is easily determined when the probability variation suggestion effect is executed and a display mode that is easily determined when the probability variation suggestion effect is not executed may be prepared.

Each suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 to 11-13 can improve the interest in the small hit game state in the chance time mode. Specifically, in the chance time mode in which the variable display of 1.5 seconds is continuously executed, the small hit game is executed even if the small hit game exceeding 1.8 seconds is executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize this, and it is possible to make it appear that the game is proceeding smoothly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable that the game may have stopped during the small hit game in the first KT state, and in the first KT state, a light game (with a good tempo). , A pleasant game) can be realized.

(About the small hit opening timing and the execution timing of various suggestion effects)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 11-14, the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17 in the small hit game and the execution timing of various suggestion effects will be described. FIG. 11-14 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the small hit opening timing and the execution timing of various suggestion effects. FIG. 11
In -14, the variable display of the special symbol (second special symbol) determined to be a small hit in the small hit determination and the small hit game (opening of the special variable winning ball device 17) executed thereafter are shown.

First, the variable display of the special symbol and the small hit game will be described. As shown in FIGS. 11-14, in the first KT state, the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. The variable display time (variation time) of the second special symbol in the first KT state is 1 second if the second reserved storage number is "1 or more" (second variation pattern # 11 in FIG. 10-8, or FIG. 10). -9 is the second fluctuation pattern # 26), and if the second reserved storage number is “0”, it is 5 seconds (the second fluctuation pattern # 10 in FIG. 10-8 or the second in FIG. 10-9). Fluctuation pattern # 25). When the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, the second special symbol (for example, a small hit symbol) is confirmed and displayed until the symbol confirmation period (also referred to as the symbol confirmation period) of 0.5 seconds elapses.

Then, when the symbol determination period elapses, it is controlled to the small hit game state. The small hit game state includes a fanfare period of 0.1 seconds, a predetermined opening period, and a small hit ending period. Specifically, in the small hit game state, after the small hit fanfare period of 0.1 seconds has elapsed, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened, and when a predetermined opening period (for example, 1.8 seconds) elapses,
The special variable winning ball device 17 closes and shifts to the small hit ending period. When the small hit ending period elapses, the next variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Next, the execution timing of the hold change suggestion effect (including the Gase hold change suggestion effect) will be described. As shown in FIGS. 11-14, when the small hit fanfare period has elapsed and the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17 is reached, the first fanfare effect (first fanfare image 0 in FIG. 11-10) is reached.
20SH211 display), 2nd fanning effect (2nd fanning effect image 020SH212 display),
And the action effect (display of the image in which the action effect image 020SH213 is in contact with the hold display 020SH206) is performed. Then, when the hold display is changed (in the case of the hold change suggestion effect), the hold display changes at the timing when the next variable display of the second special symbol is executed (the timing of the hold shift). On the other hand, in the case of the Gase hold change suggestion effect, the hold display does not change at the timing when the next variable display of the second special symbol is executed (the timing of the hold shift), and the current display mode of the hold display is maintained.

In this way, in the feature unit 020SH, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display is performed over the small hit game and the variable display. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine the transition from the small hit game state to the state in which the variable display is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear that the game is proceeding smoothly, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game.

Next, the set value suggestion effect and the probability change suggestion effect will be described. In the description of FIGS. 11-14, the set value suggestion effect and the probability change suggestion effect are referred to as “set value suggestion effect, etc.”. FIG. 11
As shown in -14, when the small hit fanfare period elapses and the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17 comes, the first fanfare effect (for example, the first fanfare effect image 020S in FIG. 11-12) is reached.
(Display of H211), second fanning effect (display of second fanning effect image 020SH212), set value suggestion effect (display of set value suggestion image 020SH220, etc.) are performed. The set value suggestion effect and the like are executed until, for example, the closing timing of the special variable winning ball device 17.

In this way, in the feature unit 020SH, the set value suggestion effect and the like are performed corresponding to the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17. Therefore, it is difficult to pay attention to the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17, and it is possible to pay attention to the setting value suggestion effect and the like. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the small hit game in which the game ball hardly wins, and it is possible to make it appear that the game is proceeding smoothly. In addition, the period controlled by the small hit game state can be effectively utilized by the set value suggestion effect or the like, and the interest during the small hit game can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 020SH, each suggestion effect is started at the timing of the opening start of the special variable winning ball device 17. Therefore, since each suggestion effect can be started immediately after the transition to the small hit game state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the small hit game is being executed, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the small hit game is being executed. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

It should be noted that the timing at which each suggestion effect is executed may be any timing corresponding to the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17, and specifically, the timing including the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17. Good. For example, the start timing of each suggestion effect is not limited to the timing of opening start of the special variable winning ball device 17, and may be the timing during the small hit fanfare period. As a result, these effects can be started at the earliest timing after the transition to the small hit game state, so that it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to recognize that the small hit game is being executed.

In addition, the start timing of each suggestion effect may be the timing during the symbol confirmation period.
It may be the timing during the variable display of the second special symbol. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to discriminate the transition from the state in which the variable display is executed to the small hit game state. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear that the game is proceeding smoothly, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game.

Further, the end timing of the set value suggestion effect and the like is not limited to the closing timing of the special variable winning ball device 17, and may be the timing during the small hit ending period. As a result, these effects can be executed until the end of the small hit game state, so that the period controlled by the small hit game state can be more effectively utilized.

Further, the end timing of each suggestion effect may be the timing during the variable display of the next second special symbol. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to discriminate the transition from the small hit game state to the state in which the variable display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear that the game is proceeding smoothly, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game.

As described above, in the above-described embodiment, the interest of the game can be improved. Here, I would like to make a concrete supplement on the improvement of interest. In the first KT state, for example, a shortening variation (1 second variation) and a small hit game (decorative symbol stops at a lost symbol) are repeatedly executed. If no special effect is performed in the small hit game state, it seems as if the progress of the game is stopped in the small hit game state. Therefore, in the first KT state (high base state), the game does not seem to proceed quickly and lightly, and the player may feel uncomfortable. In addition, the time controlled to the small hit game state in the first KT state may be wasted time for the player.

As described above, in the embodiment related to the feature unit 020SH, when the small hit game state is controlled in the first KT state (high probability / first KT state or low probability / first KT state), it is advantageous for the player. The suggestion effect suggesting the content (for example, any of the hold change suggestion effect, the set value suggestion effect, and the probability change suggestion effect) can be executed. Therefore, even if the small hit game is repeatedly executed in the first KT state in which the game ball hardly wins, the player can be given the impression that the game is proceeding smoothly, that is, the first KT.
The small hit game in the state can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game. Further, since the period in which the small hit game is executed in the first KT state can be effectively utilized, it is possible to suppress that the period is wasted time for the player.

Further, when the small hit game state is controlled in the second KT state, an effect corresponding to the control of the small hit game state (for example, the display of the small hit notification image 020SH202 and the winning effect image 020SH203 shown in FIGS. 11-9) is displayed. Made feasible. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the first KT state and the second KT state.

(Modification example 1 of feature portion 020SH)
Next, a modification 1 of the feature portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 020SH, a configuration in which the feature unit 020SH is applied to the so-called one-type pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described. Instead of such a configuration, it is also possible to apply the feature unit 020SH to a so-called one-kind two-kind mixed type pachinko gaming machine. An example of one specification of a pachinko machine of a mixed type of one type and two types will be described below.

In a one-type and two-type mixed type pachinko game machine, in a normal state (non-special state: low base state), a variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol game) is mainly executed by left-handed striking.
When the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, the jackpot game is executed.

In the determination based on the winning of the first starting winning opening, the small hit probability is constant regardless of the set value, and is, for example, 6298/65536 (about 1/100). Although the details will be described later, even if the small hit game is executed based on the winning of the first starting winning opening, the game ball passes through the specific area (V area) in the special variable winning ball device 17. That is almost unpredictable.

Further, in the determination based on the winning of the first starting winning opening, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value. Here, an example of the jackpot probability for each set value based on the winning of the first starting winning opening is shown below.

When the set value is "1", it is 329/65536 (about 1/199).
When the set value is "2", it is 346/65536 (about 1/189).
When the set value is "3", it is 366/65536 (about 1/179).
When the set value is "4", it is 387/65536 (about 1/169).
When the set value is "5", it is 412/65536 (about 1/159).
When the set value is "6", it is 439/65536 (about 1/149).

In the judgment based on winning the first start winning opening, since the small hit probability is constant, the set values "1" to "6" are set by making the loss probability different according to the set values "1" to "6". 6
The jackpot probability can be set according to.

For example, in the first special figure game, when it is determined that the jackpot game is to be executed, the game shifts to a special state (for example, a time saving state) after the jackpot game is executed according to the jackpot type (with a predetermined probability). .. When the jackpot game is executed, depending on the jackpot type, it may return to the normal state, for example, without shifting to the special state.

In the special state, for example, the game (mainly the second special figure game) is performed by right-handed striking aiming at the gate arranged on the right side of the game area and the second start winning opening. The special state is a high-base state, and specifically, the following controls (1) to (4) are performed.
(1) Control is performed to make the probability of hitting a normal figure higher than in the normal state.
(2) Control is performed to make the opening time of the normal electric accessory longer than the normal state.
(3) Control is performed to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal map game from the normal state.
(4) Control is performed to shorten the fluctuation time of the special symbol from the normal state.
As a result, the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening, and the frequency of executing the second special figure game increases. The special state is controlled, for example, until a predetermined number of variable displays are executed.

On the other hand, in the normal state, the above controls (1) to (4) are not performed. Even if the player hits right in the normal state, the probability of hitting the normal figure is low, the opening time of the normal electric accessory is short, and the fluctuation time of the normal figure game is long, so the second start winning opening To win a prize
I can hardly expect it.

Further, in the determination based on the winning of the second starting winning opening, the small hit probability is constant regardless of the set value, and is, for example, 62896/65536 (about 96/100). It should be noted that the small hit probability in the judgment based on the winning of the second starting winning opening and the small hit probability in the judgment based on the winning of the first starting winning opening are different.

Further, in the determination based on the winning of the second starting winning opening, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value. Here, an example of the jackpot probability for each set value based on the winning of the second starting winning opening is shown below.

When the set value is "1", it is 329/65536 (about 1/199).
When the set value is "2", it is 346/65536 (about 1/189).
When the set value is "3", it is 366/65536 (about 1/179).
When the set value is "4", it is 387/65536 (about 1/169).
When the set value is "5", it is 412/65536 (about 1/159).
When the set value is "6", it is 439/65536 (about 1/149).

In the judgment based on winning the second start winning opening, since the small hit probability is constant, the set values "1" to "6" are set by making the loss probability different according to the set values "1" to "6". 6
The jackpot probability can be set according to.

As described above, the small hit probability is 96 / in the judgment based on the winning of the second starting winning opening.
Since it is 100, the small hit symbol is likely to be derived and displayed in the variable display (mainly the second special figure game) in the special state. In the small hit game state, the special variable winning ball device 17 arranged on the right side of the game area is opened, and the game ball wins in the special variable winning ball device 17 (small hit attacker).
When the player passes through a specific area (so-called V area) provided in the special variable winning ball device 17, a big hit game is executed. In the small hit game state in the special state, since the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is longer than in the normal state, it is easy to win a prize in the special variable winning ball device 17 and to easily pass through the V region. It has become.

In the special state (mainly the second special figure game), when the game ball passes through the V region under the control of the small hit game state before the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed, the special state is terminated. A jackpot game is executed. In addition, in the special state, even when it is determined that the jackpot game is executed before the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed (even when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed).
, Similarly, the special state is terminated and the jackpot game is executed. Then, when the jackpot game is executed, it is controlled to the special state again according to the jackpot type (with a predetermined probability). in this way,
By performing the jackpot game in a special state (by the consecutive villas), the player can expect many prize balls.

On the other hand, in the special state, even if the jackpot game is executed before the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed, depending on the jackpot type, the game shifts to the normal state without being controlled by the special state. In some cases. Further, in the special state, even when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, the normal state is entered. Specifically, in the special state, if the big hit game is not executed before the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed (for example, although the game ball is controlled to the small hit game state, the game ball wins a special variable prize. If a prize is not won in the ball device 17, the V region is not passed, or the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed), the normal state is entered. As a result, the control of the special state ends, and the consecutive villa ends. Even in a one-type and two-type mixed type pachinko gaming machine, for example, a variable display of a special symbol is not performed in the big hit game state and the small hit game state.

In such a one-to-two mixed type pachinko gaming machine, when the small hit game state is controlled in a special state, a special effect corresponding to the control of the small hit game state (special state) (for example, "small hit attacker") (Display the image of "Aim at the special variable winning ball device 17)!") Can be executed. As a result, in the small hit game in the special state, the player can expect a big hit.

Further, in the variable display of the first special figure game in the normal state (non-special state: low base state), the small hit symbol may be derived and displayed (small hit probability: about 1/100). In the small hit game in the normal state, the game is performed by left-handed striking, and since the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged in the right side area, it is difficult to win a prize in the special variable winning ball device 17. .. Even if a right-handed hit is made, it is difficult to win a prize in the special variable winning ball device 17 because the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is short, and even if a winning is made in the special variable winning ball device 17, V Since it is difficult to pass through the region, it can hardly be expected that the game ball will pass through the V region.

In the first modification, in such a one-kind two-kind mixed type pachinko gaming machine, the normal state (
When controlled to the small hit game state (special state) in the non-special state), the feature unit 020S
The suggestion effect related to H may be made feasible. The suggestion effect is an effect that suggests content that is advantageous to the player, and is, for example, a suggestion effect based on the determination result of the look-ahead determination, a set value suggestion effect, or the like. The suggestion effect based on the determination result of the look-ahead determination is, for example, a hold change suggestion effect, but is not limited to this, and an effect suggesting that the hold storage information having a high expectation of a big hit is stored (for example,). It may be a display of a background image, a character image, or the like with a high degree of expectation).

Even in the special state, when the first hold storage is stored, the small hit symbol may be derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special figure game. In this case, if the small hit game is configured to be difficult to pass through the V region, the suggestion effect related to the feature unit 020SH may be executed when controlled by the small hit game.

According to the first modification, even if the small hit game in the normal state in which the game ball hardly wins is executed, the player can be given the impression that the game is proceeding smoothly, that is, the small in the normal state. The hit game can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game. Therefore, according to the first modification, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the normal state in the one-type and two-type mixed type pachinko gaming machine. The pachinko gaming machine of the one-to-two mixed type is not limited to the above-mentioned specifications, and may have other specifications as long as the small hit game in a normal state in which the game ball hardly wins is executed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the feature unit 020SH can be expressed as follows. A gaming machine capable of playing a game (a pachinko gaming machine of a mixed type of one type and two types), in which a gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state and identification information (for example, a special symbol) are variably displayed and displayed. The game state control means includes a variable display execution means for deriving and displaying the result and an effect execution means, and the game state control means has an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player.
A special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state and a non-special state (for example, a small hit game state)
A special state (characteristic unit 0) that is more easily controlled by the special state than the non-special state
The special state according to the modified example 1 of 20SH: (for example, a time saving state) can be controlled, the advantageous state and the special state are states in which the variable display is not performed, and the effect executing means is described. When controlled to the special state in the special state, it is possible to execute a special effect corresponding to the control of the special state (for example, display an image of "Aim at the small hit attacker (special variable winning ball device 17)!"). Yes, when controlled to the special state in the non-special state, a suggestion effect that is different from the special effect and suggests content that is advantageous to the player (for example, a suggestion effect based on the determination result of the look-ahead determination) , Setting value suggestion effect, etc.) can be executed.

(Modification example 2 of the feature portion 020SH)
Next, a modification 2 of the feature portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 020SH, the configuration in which the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened once at the time of a small hit has been described. In the second modification, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the special variable winning ball device 17 may be opened a plurality of times according to the small hit type.

Specifically, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 17 is a small hit C having the longest opening time.
In the case of, it was set to 1.8 seconds × 1 time (see FIG. 10-14), but it is not limited to this. The opening pattern may be, for example, when the opening time is the longest, the total opening time may be 1.8 seconds or less, and may be 0.9 seconds × 2 times or 0.2 seconds × 9 times. In addition, it may be possible to execute a suggestion effect of the content according to the opening pattern. Specifically, for example, a suggestion effect corresponding to opening of 0.9 seconds × 2 times may be executed. In this way, even if the opening pattern is opened a plurality of times, the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided by performing a suggestion effect according to the opening pattern.
It is possible to make it difficult to pay attention to the opening of, and to pay attention to each suggestion effect.

(Modification example 3 of feature portion 020SH)
Next, a modification 3 of the feature portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment of the feature unit 020SH, the configuration in which the suggestion effect can be executed in the first KT state has been described. In the third modification, the suggestion effect may be executed in the normal state (low probability / low base state) instead of or in addition to such a configuration.

For example, in the normal state (low probability / low base state), the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed by winning the first start winning opening, but the small hit probability in the small hit determination in this case is
As shown in FIG. 10-3, it is "6298/65536" (about 10%). The type of small hit by winning the first start winning opening is small hit A (opening time: 0.2 seconds). Also,
When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit (small hit A) is executed, the non-reach lost symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed so that the player does not have excessive expectations. There is.

Therefore, in the modification example 3, the suggestion effect may be executed when the small hit game state is controlled in the normal state. In addition, in order to secure the time to execute the suggestion effect, the small hit fanfare period and the small hit ending period may be set long. As a result, the effect in the small hit game in the normal state can be made useful for the player. Therefore, the period controlled by the small hit game in the normal state can be effectively utilized, and the interest of the small hit game in the normal state can be improved.

After shifting from the low probability / high base state to the normal state, the variable display based on the second hold storage may be executed. Specifically, immediately after the transition from the low probability / high base state to the normal state, variable display based on the second reserved storage stored in the low probability / high base state before the transition may be executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed at the same time, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display based on the second hold memory in the normal state. When the small hit game is executed,
The variable display of the first special symbol may be executed. In this case, the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the period controlled by the small hit game state, and the variable display of the first special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol is extended by the period controlled in the small hit game state. In the third modification, it is also possible to perform a suggestion effect during the period when the variable display of the first special symbol is extended. That is, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect in the normal state (low probability / low base state). As a result, the first
It is possible to effectively utilize the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is extended, and it is possible to improve the interest.

(Modification example 4 of feature portion 020SH)
Next, a modification 4 of the feature portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 020SH, a configuration for executing a pending change suggestion effect suggesting a jackpot expectation degree has been described as a suggestion effect based on the determination result of the look-ahead determination. In the modified example 4, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, as a suggestion effect based on the judgment result of the look-ahead determination, a suggestion effect suggesting the jackpot type when it is determined to be a jackpot. May be feasible.

For example, when the hold memory determined to be a 2R normal big hit is stored during the small hit game in the high probability / first KT state, that is, from the high probability / first KT state to the low probability / first KT state. If it is known that the transition will occur, it may be possible to perform a disappointing effect (sorry effect) for the player during the small hit game. Specifically, for example, in a small hit game before the variable display based on the hold memory determined to be a 2R normal big hit is started, the background image is darkened, or the background image is a skull and crossbones image. You may perform an effect such as displaying an effect image. Further, in this case, for example, for the held memory of the target, for example.
A hold change suggestion effect may be performed to change the hold display to a hold display with a skull and crossbones image.

On the other hand, during the small hit game in the high probability / first KT state or the low probability / first KT state, 1
It was found that when the hold memory determined to be a 0R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot is stored, that is, the high probability / first KT state or the low probability / first KT state shifts to the second KT state. If this is the case, it may be possible to perform a production (high-probability production) that is pleasing to the player during the small hit game. Specifically, for example, 10R probability variation jackpot or 2
In the small hit game before the variable display based on the hold memory determined to be the R probability variation big hit is started, the background image is displayed brightly (rainbow color), and the background image is an image of an angel mark or an effect. An effect such as displaying an image may be performed. Further, in this case, for example, a hold change suggestion effect may be performed on the hold memory of the target to change the hold display to a hold display with an image of an angel mark.

In addition, if a plurality of small hit games are executed before the variable display corresponding to the hold memory of the target for which the look-ahead is determined is executed, the same suggestion effect is produced in the multiple small hit games (
A disappointing effect or a high expectation effect) may be performed, that is, a suggestion effect may be performed a plurality of times. Further, if the variable display is executed a plurality of times before the variable display corresponding to the target hold memory is executed, the same suggestion is given not only in the small hit game state but also in the variable display a plurality of times. You may perform the production. That is, such a suggestion effect may be continuously executed until the variable display based on the hold storage of the pre-reading determined target is started.

(Variation example 5 of feature portion 020SH)
Next, a modification 5 of the feature portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 020SH, the ratio of determining that the display mode of the hold display is changed during the variable display in FIG. 11-8 (“change determination ratio during variable display” in the description of the modified example 5”. ) Was explained as a ratio similar to the determination ratio (decision ratio of the hold change suggestion effect) for changing the hold display with the hold change suggestion effect during the small hit game. In the modified example 5, the change determination ratio during the variable display and the determination ratio of the pending change suggestion effect may be different ratios.

For example, the decision rate of the pending change suggestion effect may be higher than the change decision rate during the variable display. As a result, it is easier to change the hold display accompanied by the hold change suggestion effect than the change of the hold display during the variable display, and the period controlled by the small hit game state can be effectively utilized.

Further, the change determination ratio during the variable display and the determination ratio of the hold change suggestion effect may be different depending on the result of the look-ahead determination (determination of the jackpot) for the target hold storage information. For example, when it is determined by the look-ahead judgment that a big hit is to be executed, the decision rate of the hold change suggestion effect is set to be higher than the change decision rate during the variable display, while the look-ahead judgment determines that the jackpot is lost. In this case, the decision rate of the pending change suggestion effect may be lower than the change decision rate during the variable display. As a result, the change in the hold display accompanied by the hold change suggestion effect can be made to have a higher degree of expectation than the change in the display mode of the hold display during the variable display. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the pending change suggestion effect during the small hit game.

In the first KT state (high probability / first KT state or low probability / first KT state), the hold display may be changed more easily than in other gaming states (normal state or second KT state). That is, the chance time mode may be set as the mode in which the display mode of the hold display is most likely to change. Further, in this case, the determination ratio of the pending change suggestion effect may be higher than the change determination ratio during the variable display. That is, among the effects of changing the display mode of the hold display, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display may be most easily executed with the hold change suggestion effect during the small hit game. As a result, the period controlled by the small hit game state in the chance time mode can be effectively utilized.

(Modification example 6 of the feature portion 020SH)
Next, a modification 6 of the feature portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment according to the feature unit 020SH, the Gase hold change suggestion effect during the small hit game is executed when the final color of the hold memory during the hold display is all gray (FIG. 11-6). 020SHS70: YE
(See S) has been described. In the modified example 6, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the Gase hold change suggestion effect during the small hit game is stored in the hold memory during the hold display.
It may be feasible even when the hold storage determined to have a special display mode other than gray as the final color is stored.

In this case, the hold storage determined to have a gray final color may be easier to perform the Gase hold change suggestion effect than the hold memory determined to be the special display mode. As a result, even when the hold memory determined to be the special display mode is stored, the hold memory determined to have the final color of gray can be subjected to the Gase hold change suggestion effect. You can liven up the production during the hit game.

On the contrary, for the hold memory determined to be the special display mode, it may be easier to perform the Gase hold change suggestion effect than the hold memory determined to have the display mode whose final color is gray. For example
For the hold memory whose final color is determined to be the special display mode, the hold change suggestion effect may be forcibly executed, and the hold change suggestion effect may not be executed. In this case, in the active display, the display mode is changed to the final color. As a result, the player's expectation can be intentionally lowered at the hold display stage, and the expectation when the display mode changes at the active display stage can be further increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the pending change suggestion production.

(Modification example 7 of feature portion 020SH)
Next, a modification 7 of the feature portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment of the feature unit 020SH, a configuration in which a hold change suggestion effect, a set value suggestion effect, and a probability change suggestion effect are performed as suggestion effects has been described. In the modification 7, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, an explanatory suggestion effect regarding the progress of the game may be executed as a suggestion effect.

The explanation suggestion effect is, for example, an effect using a character image relating to the progress of the game in the chance time mode. Specifically, the explanation suggestion effect such as "maybe the mode shifts to the normal mode in 50 games?" Or "small hit". There is a possibility that it is controlled to a high probability state in the chance mode at the time of the first hit and the explanation suggestion effect such as "It will soon be in RUSH mode!" (62% = "5"
6/56 + 35 "%: see FIG. 11-1), which is an explanatory suggestion effect such as" Is the probability of probability change a little over 60%? ".

Here, in the feature unit 020SH, as a gaming state, a normal state, a high probability / first KT
It is difficult for the player to grasp the content of the game because the game state is controlled to one of a plurality of game states such as a state, a low probability / first KT state, and a second KT state, and the game state changes. is there. Therefore, by making it possible to execute the explanatory suggestion effect of the modification example 7, it is possible to make the player easily grasp the gaming state and the like that can be shifted after the chance mode.
It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Modification example 8 of feature portion 020SH)
Next, a modification 8 of the feature portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 020SH, a configuration in which the feature unit 020SH is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is controlled to a high probability state until the next jackpot when the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot is executed will be described. did. Instead of such a configuration, it is also possible to apply the feature unit 020SH to a gaming machine (for example, a so-called ST machine) that is controlled to a high probability state until a predetermined number of times elapses. Here, a specification example of a pachinko gaming machine of an ST machine will be described.

For example, in the ST machine, when the probability variation jackpot is executed, it is controlled to a high probability state until the variable display of the specified number of times (ST number of times) is executed, and when the variable display of the specified number of times is executed, it is high. It shifts from the probability state to the low probability state.

Also, when the probability variation jackpot is executed, the high base state (high probability / 1st K) after the probability variation jackpot game
It is controlled to (T state). The period controlled to the high probability / first KT state (variable display number) is the period according to the probability variation jackpot symbol (transition variation number). When the number of transition fluctuations is executed after being controlled to the high probability / first KT state, the transition from the high base state (high probability / first KT state) to the low base state (second KT state) is performed. The number of transition fluctuations is, for example, less than the number of STs.

As a result, it becomes possible to control in the second KT state from the elapse of the number of transition fluctuations to the elapse of the number of STs, that is, the small hit game in which a winning can be expected is executed. The second
If the jackpot is not won even once before the variable display of the ST number is executed in the KT state, the variable display of the ST number is executed to return to the normal state. Here, when the small hit game state is controlled in the second KT state, the effect corresponding to the control of the small hit game state (for example, the small hit notification image 020SH202 and the winning effect image 020 shown in FIGS. 11-9).
(Display of SH203) can be executed.

Further, in the ST machine, when the normal jackpot symbol is executed, it is controlled to a high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the normal jackpot game. The period controlled to the low probability / first KT state (variable display number) is usually a period corresponding to the jackpot symbol (transition fluctuation number). Low probability / 1st KT
When the number of transition fluctuations is executed after being controlled to the state, the high base state (low probability / 1st KT)
Transition from the low base state (normal state).

In the high probability / first KT state and the low probability / first KT state, a common effect (for example, Chantime mode) may be executed. In the first KT state, although small hits are likely to occur, it is difficult for the game ball to win the special variable winning ball device 17, that is, the winning ball cannot be expected.

In the modified example 8, when the small hit game state is controlled in the first KT state (high probability / first KT state or low probability / first KT state) in the ST machine, a suggestion effect suggesting an advantageous content for the player. (For example, any of the pending change suggestion effect, the set value suggestion effect, and the probability change suggestion effect) may be made executable.

According to the modified example 8, even if the small hit game in the first KT state in which the game ball hardly wins is repeatedly executed in the ST machine, the impression that the game is proceeding smoothly is given by executing the suggestion effect. It can be given to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game due to the small hit game in the first KT state. In particular, in the pachinko gaming machine of the ST machine, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the first KT state. The pachinko gaming machine of the ST machine is not limited to the above-mentioned specifications, and may have other specifications as long as a small hit game in which the game ball hardly wins is executed.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 020SH)
In relation to the above-mentioned feature portion 020SH, a pachinko gaming machine is known in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed at the same time and small hits are frequently generated in a probabilistic gaming state (for example). , JP-A-2018-033787.). However, when a small hit game in which the game ball hardly wins is executed, the variable display is not performed during this period, which may give the player the impression that the game is not proceeding smoothly. is there. Specifically, for example, if a small hit game in which a game ball hardly wins is repeatedly executed,
In the small hit game state, the special symbol is stopped and displayed each time, which may give the player the impression that the game is not progressing smoothly. For this reason, the player may feel uncomfortable, and the interest of the game may be reduced.

Therefore, the gaming machine of the means D1 according to the feature unit 020SH is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game), and a gaming state control for controlling the gaming state. The means (for example, the portion of the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) for executing steps S120 to S128 shown in FIG. 6) and the identification information (for example, a special symbol) are variably displayed and displayed. Variable display execution means for deriving and displaying the result (
For example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 10) shown in FIG.
The part that executes steps S25A and S25B in 3) and the effect executing means (for example,
The game state control means includes an effect control CPU 120), and the game state control means has an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player and a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is different from the advantageous state. , A non-special state (first KT state) and a special state (for example, a second KT state) that is more easily controlled by the special state than the non-special state can be controlled, and the advantageous state and the special state are described as described above. When the variable display is not performed and the effect executing means is controlled to the special state in the special state, the special effect corresponding to the control of the special state (for example, the small effect shown in FIG. 10-9). Hit notification image 020SH202, small design 020
SH201 and winning effect image 020SH203) can be executed, and when controlled to the special state in the non-special state, a suggestion effect (indicative effect) that is different from the special effect and suggests advantageous contents for the player. For example, the pending change suggestion effect (shown in FIG. 11-11 (E)) can be executed.

According to such a configuration, even if the small hit game is repeatedly executed in the non-special state (for example, the first KT state), it is possible to give the player the impression that the game is proceeding smoothly, that is, that is, The small hit game in the non-special state can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game. In particular, according to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the non-special state by the suggestion effect.

Further, as the game machine of the means D2 related to the feature unit 020SH, in the game machine described in the means D1, the effect executing means corresponds to the variable display of the identification information, and the decoration identification information (for example, a decorative symbol) is displayed. Variable display is possible, and when the special state is controlled in the special state, the display result of the decoration identification information is a special display result (for example, a definite symbol "1," which is a combination indicating a small hit game. 3,5 ”) is displayed, and when controlled to the special state in the non-special state, a predetermined display result (combination of decorative symbols indicating loss) different from the special display result is displayed as the display result of the decoration identification information. Is displayed.

According to such a configuration, in the non-special state, since it is almost impossible to expect the winning ball to win the special winning opening during the small hit game, the predetermined display result (for example, the lost symbol) is forcibly stopped and displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being overly expected.

Further, it is shown that the display result of the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state for the variable display which has not been started yet in the game machine according to the means D1 or D2 as the game machine of the means D3 according to the feature unit 020SH. The pre-start determination means for determining (for example, pre-reading determination) whether or not the display result is obtained, and the effect executing means provides the suggestion effect (for example, FIG. 11-10) for making a suggestion regarding the pre-start determination means. (Holding change suggestion effect shown in (E)) can be executed.

According to such a configuration, since the suggestion effect based on the determination result of the look-ahead determination can be performed, the expectation for the reserved memory can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the non-special state.

Further, as the gaming machine of the means D4 according to the feature unit 020SH, the gaming machine according to any one of the means D1 to D3 includes a holding storage means for storing information related to the variable display as the holding storage information, and the effect executing means , The hold storage information stored in the hold storage means is displayed as a hold display (for example, hold display 020SH206 shown in FIG. 11-10 (A)), and an action acting on the hold display in the suggestion effect. Production (for example, Fig. 11-10)
The action effect image 020SH213) shown in (E) of (E) can be executed, and there are a case where the display mode of the hold display changes and a case where the display mode of the hold display does not change.

According to such a configuration, since it is possible to perform a series of effects including an action effect and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display, it is possible to pay attention to the hold display and increase the expectation for the hold memory. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the non-special state.

Further, as the game machine of the means D5 according to the feature unit 020SH, in the game machine described in any one of the means D1 to D4, it is possible to set one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player. The setting value suggestion image 020SH2 shown in FIG. 11-12 (E) is provided, and the effect execution means makes a suggestion regarding the setting means.
20) is feasible.

According to such a configuration, in the small hit game in the non-special state (for example, the first KT state), the player can guess the set value. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the non-special state.

Further, in the game machine according to any one of means D1 to D5 as the game machine of the means D6 according to the feature unit 020SH, the non-special state includes the first non-special state (for example, the non-probability change state:
There are a low probability / first KT state) and a second non-special state (for example, a probabilistic state: high probability / first KT state) that is more easily controlled to the advantageous state than the first non-special state. The means can execute a common effect (chance time mode) when it is controlled in the first non-special state and when it is controlled in the second non-special state, and the suggestion effect is It is suggested that the second non-special state is controlled (for example, the probability change suggestion image 020SH230 shown in FIG. 11-13 (E)).

According to such a configuration, the common effect is executed when controlled by either the high probability / first KT state or the low probability / first KT state, and the probability change suggestion effect is produced in the small hit game in the Chantime mode. Since it is feasible, it is possible to make the player guess whether or not the player is in the probabilistic state in the small hit game in the high probability / first KT state and the low probability / first KT state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the non-special state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of means D1 to D6 as the gaming machine of the means D7 according to the feature unit 020SH, the effect executing means has a plurality of types of suggestive effects having different modes (for example, as the suggestive effect). Odd number setting suggestion, even number setting suggestion, shown in (B) of FIG. 11-7.
And the setting value of 4 or more suggestion) can be executed, and the advantage of the content suggested to the player differs depending on which type of the suggestion effect is executed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variation of the suggestion effect by making it possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestion effects, so that it is possible to prevent the suggestion effect from becoming a monotonous effect. In addition, since the degree of advantage differs depending on the suggestion effect, the degree of attention of the player can be different depending on the suggestion effect to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest during the small hit game in the non-special state.

Further, in the game machine according to any one of means D1 to D7 as the game machine of the means D8 according to the feature unit 020SH, the variable display executing means is a variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol). And the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel, and the first state in which the game medium easily passes through the start area (for example, the second start winning opening). The second state in which the game medium does not easily pass through the starting region is provided with a variable first variable winning means (for example, the variable winning ball device 6B shown in FIG. 1), and the gaming state controlling means is the first. The variable winning means can be controlled to a predetermined state (for example, the first KT state) that easily changes to the first state, and the effect executing means controls the special state (for example, a small hit game state) in the predetermined state. The suggestion effect can be executed when it is done.

According to such a configuration, even if the small hit game in the first KT state in which the game ball hardly wins is repeatedly executed, it is possible to give the player the impression that the game is proceeding smoothly, that is, the first The small hit game in the 1KT state can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game. In particular, according to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the first KT state.

Further, as the game machine of the means D9 according to the feature unit 020SH, in the game machine described in any one of the means D1 to D8, a winning state in which the game ball is easy to win (open state) and a winning state in which the game ball is difficult to win. A second variable winning means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 17 shown in FIG. 1) that can be changed is provided in a difficult state (closed state), and the second variable winning means is easy to win in the special state. The effect can be changed to a state, and the effect executing means executes the suggested effect in response to the change of the second variable winning means to the winning easy state (for example, the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17). ..

According to such a configuration, it is difficult to pay attention to the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17, and it is possible to pay attention to the suggestion effect. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the small hit game in which the game ball hardly wins a prize, and it is possible to prevent the small hit game from deteriorating the interest of the game.

Further, in the game machine according to any one of means D1 to D9 as the game machine of the means D10 according to the feature unit 020SH, the game state control means has the game medium in a specific area (for example, special variable) in the special state. It is possible to control the advantageous state based on passing through a specific region (so-called V region) in the winning ball device 17.

According to such a configuration, even if a small hit game in a normal state (non-special state) in which a game ball hardly wins is executed in a pachinko game machine in which the feature unit 020SH is a kind and two types mixed type, the game is smoothly played. It is possible to give the player the impression that is progressing, that is, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game due to the small hit game in the normal state. In particular, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the normal state.

Further, in the game machine according to any one of means D1 to D10 as the game machine of the means D11 related to the feature unit 020SH, when the effect executing means is controlled to the special state in the special state, the game medium is used. It corresponds to the passage of the special area of the game medium based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the special area (for example, the discharge area) (for example, the game ball is detected by the second count switch 24 provided in the special winning opening). Predetermined effect (for example, FIG. 11-
The winning effect image 020SH203) shown in 11 (C) can be executed, and when the game medium is controlled to the special state in the non-special state, the predetermined state is determined regardless of whether or not the game medium has passed through the special area. Do not perform the production.

According to such a configuration, in the second KT state, the player can be encouraged to win a prize in the special variable winning opening, and the interest in the second KT state can be improved. On the other hand, in the small hit game in the first KT state, although the game ball may rarely win a prize in the special variable winning opening, in order to prevent the predetermined effect from being executed, the prize at the time of the small hit in the first KT state is given. It is possible to prevent the player from expecting it.

(Explanation of feature unit 003SH)
Next, a game machine related to the feature unit 003SH will be described. The gaming machine according to the feature unit 003SH is a gaming machine capable of playing a game. In this embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game will be described as an example.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 003SH includes a state control means, a setting means, and an effect executing means. The state control means and the setting means are, for example, the game control microcomputer 10.
It is realized by the CPU 103 of 0. The effect execution means is realized by, for example, the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12.

In the feature unit 003SH, the state control means can control an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a specific state that is different from the advantageous state. The advantageous state is, for example, a jackpot game state. The specific state is, for example, a high probability state. Specifically, in the feature unit 003SH, the specific state is a high probability / second KT state (hereinafter, also referred to as “small hit RUSH state”) or a high probability / first KT state. However, the specific state may be a low probability / first KT state.

In the feature unit 003SH, the setting means can be changed to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. The set value is one value that is set among a plurality of values having different advantages for the player. Specifically, the set value is a value for changing the winning probability of the jackpot according to the set value. For example, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit is changed.

The set value is, for example, composed of 6 stages of "1" to "6". The set value "6" is the value with the highest winning probability, and the winning probability decreases as the value decreases in the order of "5", "4", "3", "2", and "1". That is, when the set value "6" is set, the advantage is highest for the player, and the value is smaller in the order of "5", "4", "3", "2", "1". As it becomes, the advantage for the player becomes gradually lower. The set value is changed by operating the setting change button provided inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a clerk.

In the feature unit 003SH, the control of the specific state ends based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied while the specific state is controlled. Specifically, the state control means terminates the specific state based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition. The predetermined condition is, for example, a condition for terminating the high probability / second KT state. The establishment of the predetermined condition is that the jackpot symbol (normal jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed in the variable display in the high probability / second KT state (shifting to the jackpot gaming state of the normal jackpot).

However, the establishment of the predetermined condition is not limited to this, and for example, in a pachinko gaming machine that performs a fall lottery to shift from a high probability state to a low probability state, the fall lottery may be won, and the specified number of times has elapsed. In a pachinko gaming machine (so-called ST machine) that is controlled to a high probability state until it is completed, the specified number of times may elapse.

In the feature unit 003SH, the length of the control period of the specific state differs depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, if the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the control period of the specific state becomes long, and
On the other hand, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the control period of the specific state is shortened.

In the feature unit 003SH, the effect executing means can execute a specific effect using the specific display regarding the setting suggestion. The setting suggestion is a suggestion of a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the setting suggestion is a suggestion of a high setting value, a suggestion of denying the setting values "1" and "2", and
It is a suggestion of an even number setting value and a suggestion of an odd number setting value. However, the setting suggestion is not limited to these, and may be, for example, a suggestion of the set values "3" to "6" or a suggestion that the set value "6" is rich.

The specific display will be described in detail later, but is, for example, a display corresponding to the suggestion of the set value (display of a playing card in this example). Further, the specific effect is, for example, an effect (card pack opening effect) in which a card pack containing a playing card is opened and a playing card suggesting a set value appears from the card pack. In addition, the specific display includes a card pack display indicating a state in which the type of playing card is concealed (a state before the card pack opening effect is performed).

In the feature unit 003SH, in the specific effect, it is possible to display a specific display of a number corresponding to the number of times of establishment of a specific condition different from the predetermined condition in the specific state. The number of times the specific condition is established in the specific state is, for example, the number of times controlled to the small hit game state in the high probability / second KT state (
The number of small hits won).

In the feature unit 003SH, the number of displays of the specific display displayed in the specific effect is larger when the period from being controlled to the specific state until the predetermined condition is satisfied is longer than when the period is short. The ratio is high. Specifically, the number of card packs and playing cards displayed in the card pack opening effect is when the period from when the card pack is controlled to a high probability state until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display is long. But than when the period is short
The rate of increase is high.

Further, in the feature unit 003SH, the effect executing means can execute the specific effect based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied and the specific state is completed. Specifically, in the effect executing means, the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display, and the high probability / second KT state (or high probability / first).
When the KT state) is completed, it is possible to execute a card pack opening effect of displaying a plurality of playing cards and card packs.

The timing for executing the specific effect (card pack opening effect) is, for example, the ending period in the jackpot game state. However, the timing of executing the specific effect is not limited to this, and may be a fanfare period or a round period in the jackpot game state, or may be a variable display period in which the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the high probability state. ..

Further, in the feature unit 003SH, the state control means can control an advantageous state, a specific state, and a special state different from the advantageous state and the specific state. The special state is, for example, a small hit game state. The specific state is a state in which the game value is easily given by the special state.
Specifically, the specific state is a high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH state).

The number of displays of the specific display (display of the card pack and the display of the playing card) increases according to the number of times of control of the special state in the specific state. The production execution means is, for example, a small hit RUSH.
The effect of acquiring the same number of card packs as the number of times controlled in the small hit game state in the state is executed. The longer the period controlled to the small hit RUSH state, the more times the small hit gaming state is controlled. Therefore, the longer the period controlled in the small hit RUSH state, the larger the number of cards displayed on the card pack and playing cards.

Further, in the feature unit 003SH, the ratio at which the specific condition is satisfied is a common ratio regardless of the set value. The rate at which the specific condition is satisfied is, for example, the probability of winning a small hit. The small hit winning probability is a constant probability regardless of the set value. In the feature unit 003SH, the small hit winning probability is, for example, 1/2 probability regardless of the set value of "1" to "6".

Further, in the feature unit 003SH, the effect executing means executes the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the suggestion of the set value and the second setting suggestion effect as the specific effect in response to the control of the special state. It is possible. The first setting suggestion effect, which will be described in detail later, is an effect in which an enemy character appears and destroys the enemy character, and is an effect in which a set value is suggested depending on the type of the enemy character. The second setting suggestion effect as a specific effect is a series of effects including a card pack acquisition effect and a card pack opening effect.

In the feature unit 003SH, the accuracy of suggesting the set value is different between the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect. The accuracy of the suggestion of the set value is the reliability of the suggestion of the set value. In the following, the accuracy of suggesting a set value may be referred to as "set reliability". For example, in the feature unit 003SH, the second setting suggestion effect has higher setting reliability than the first setting suggestion effect. However, the setting reliability of the first setting suggestion effect may be higher than the setting reliability of the second setting suggestion effect.

Further, in the feature unit 003SH, the execution timing is different between the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect. Specifically, the first setting suggestion effect is performed during the variable display in which the display result indicating the small hit is derived and displayed. Further, the second setting suggestion effect is performed after the first setting suggestion effect. Specifically, in the feature unit 003SH, the effect of acquiring the card pack in the second setting suggestion effect is the variable display in which the first setting suggestion effect is performed (the display result indicating the small hit is derived and displayed). Display) is performed in the next variable display. That is, the effect of acquiring the card pack is performed in the variable display immediately after being controlled to the small hit game state.

In addition, the card pack opening effect in the second setting suggestion effect is performed in the normal big hit big hit game state (for example, the ending period) that triggers the end of the small hit RUSH state.

Further, in the feature unit 003SH, there are a plurality of types of specific displays having different types of setting suggestions as specific displays. Specifically, the plurality of types of specific displays are, for example, the displays of four types of playing cards (ace, king, queen, and jack). Ace suggests, for example, a high setting. King suggests, for example, even settings. Queen suggests, for example, an odd number of settings. Jack indicates the default (does not suggest a setting).

Priority is set for each of the plurality of types of specific displays. For example, if the priority of four types of playing cards is expressed using an inequality sign, it is ace>king>queen> jack. That is, the priority is highest in ace, and lower in order of king, queen, and jack. Display control is performed for a plurality of specific displays according to their priority. For example
The higher the priority of a playing card, the more conspicuous the display mode is.

In addition, in this specification, "high ratio" or "different ratio" means A: B = 70.
A: B = 100%, regardless of whether the ratio of one is high or different, such as%: 30%.
: 0%, one with a higher percentage or a different one (ie, one allocation is 10)
It is a concept that includes (0% and the other allocation is 0%).

(Outline of setting suggestion effect related to feature part 003SH)
Next, the outline of the setting suggestion effect related to the feature unit 003SH will be described. FIG. 12-1 shows
It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of the setting suggestion effect which concerns on the feature part 003SH. In FIG. 12-1
(A) shows an example of the effect during the variable display in the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH state). Specifically, (A) is "variable display in which a display result indicating a small hit is derived and displayed".
→ Shows the transition of “small hit game state” → “next variable display”.

The variation time of the variable display in which the display result indicating the small hit is derived and displayed is, for example, 5 seconds.
During this variable display, an enemy character appears as the first setting suggestion effect. There are four types of enemy characters, for example, and the set value is suggested according to the type.

In the small hit game state, the effect that the ally character destroys the enemy character is performed. The small hit game state is, for example, about 2 to 3 seconds. When the small hit game state ends, in the next variable display, the effect of adding the number of prize balls (acquired balls) acquired in the small hit game state is performed, and then the effect of acquiring the card pack is performed. When a card pack is acquired, it is displayed in addition to the number of card packs acquired, which indicates the cumulative total of card packs. The display of the number of acquired card packs is continuously displayed in the small hit RUSH state. In addition, when the small hits are continuously won, that is, even in the next variable display, the enemy character is displayed when the display result indicating the small hits is derived and displayed.

In FIG. 12-1, (B) shows the transition at the time of the probability variation jackpot that occurred in the high probability / second KT state (or high probability / first KT state). The high probability / first KT state here is
It is a high probability / first KT state that has transitioned via the high probability / second KT state. Specifically, in the high probability / second KT state, the number of card packs acquired is displayed. High probability / 2nd KT
The number of card packs displayed in the state continues even after the transition from the high probability / second KT state to the high probability / first KT state (after the 6R probability variation jackpot jackpot game is executed in the high probability / second KT state). Is displayed.

As shown in (B), when the display result indicating the jackpot is derived and displayed in the high probability / second KT state (or high probability / first KT state), the transition from the “big hit game state” to the “next variable display”. To do.

In the jackpot game state, a probability variation jackpot effect showing a 10R probability variation jackpot (or a 6R probability variation jackpot) is performed during the fanfare period or the round period. In addition, a result production will be performed during the ending period. When the jackpot game of the 10R probability variation jackpot (or the 6R probability variation jackpot) is completed, it is controlled to the high probability / second KT state (or high probability / first KT state) according to the type of the jackpot that is derived and displayed. If the number of card packs acquired is displayed before being controlled to the jackpot game state, the display of the number of card packs acquired will continue to be displayed even in the high probability / second KT state (or high probability / first KT state). Will be done.

In FIG. 12-1, (C) shows the transition at the time of the probability variation jackpot that occurred in the high probability / second KT state (or high probability / first KT state). The high probability / first KT state here is
Similar to (B), the number of card packs acquired is displayed. As shown in (C), when the display result indicating the jackpot is derived and displayed in the high probability / second KT state (or high probability / first KT state), the transition from the “big hit game state” to the “next variable display”. To do.

In the jackpot game state, a normal jackpot effect indicating a normal jackpot is performed during the fanfare period or the round period. In addition, during the ending period, a result effect and a card pack opening effect will be performed. In the card pack opening effect, all the card packs acquired in the small hit RUSH state are opened, and playing cards appear. There are four types of playing cards, for example, and the set value is suggested according to the type.

Even if there is a period in which the small hit RUSH state is controlled before the start of the big hit, the number of card packs acquired may be 0 if the small hit game state is never controlled in the small hit RUSH state. In this case, the card pack opening effect may not be performed. In other words, the card pack opening effect may be executed according to the number of card packs acquired.

When the big hit game state of the normal big hit is finished, it is controlled to the low probability / first KT state (time saving state). In the low probability / first KT state, the first setting suggestion effect and the effect of acquiring the card pack are not performed. In the low probability / first KT state, when the predetermined number of fluctuations (50 fluctuations) elapses without winning the jackpot, the state transitions to the normal state (low probability / low base state).

In this way, the setting suggestion effect related to the feature unit 003SH is in the small hit RUSH state.
The setting value is suggested by the display of the enemy character. In addition, all the card packs acquired in the small hit RUSH state are used to perform a card pack opening effect during a normal big hit big hit game, and a set value is suggested by displaying a playing card.

(About the jackpot type judgment table of the feature unit 003SH)
FIG. 12-2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a jackpot type determination table of the feature unit 003SH. In FIG. 12-2, (A) shows a jackpot type determination table when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. In FIG. 12-2, (B) shows a jackpot type determination table when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed.

As shown in (A) of FIG. 12-2, there are three types of jackpots when executing the variable display of the first special symbol: 10R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, and 6R normal jackpot. is there. By using the jackpot type determination table of FIG. 12-2 (A), any one of these three types of jackpots is determined. That is, in the normal state, basically, one of these three types of big hits is played.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (B), the jackpot types when executing the variable display of the second special symbol are 10R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, and 6R normal jackpot. There are four types of jackpots. By using the jackpot type determination table of FIG. 12-2 (B), any one of these four types is determined. That is, in the first KT state and the second KT state, basically, one of these three types of big hits is played.

In any of the jackpot type determination tables (A) and (B) of FIG. 12-2, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined is constant regardless of the set value. Also, in Fig. 12-2 (
In any of the jackpot type determination tables of A) and (B), the percentage determined for the probability variation jackpot is 65%, and the percentage determined for the normal jackpot is 35%.

Hereinafter, (A) and (B) of FIG. 12-2 will be compared and described. The 10R probability variation jackpot is (A
) Is easier to determine than (B). Specifically, the 10R probability variation jackpot is 9 in (A).
It is%, and in (B) it is 10%. Further, the 6R probability variation jackpot is more difficult to determine in (B) than in (A). Specifically, the 6R probability variation jackpot is 54% in (A) and 50% in (B). Further, the 2R probability variation jackpot is more likely to be determined in (B) than in (A).
Specifically, the 2R probability variation jackpot is 0% in (A) and 5% in (B). In addition, it should be noted
The 2R probability variation jackpot is a jackpot with almost no balls. However, the 2R probability variation jackpot may be a jackpot with two rounds of balls.

In this way, regarding the 10R probability variation big hit, since (B) is easier to determine than (A), the 10R probability variation in the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) and the high probability / first KT state. It is possible to expect the player to get a lot of balls from the big hit. On the other hand
Regarding the 2R probability variation jackpot, which is not highly advantageous for the player, (B) is better than (A).
Is easier to determine, so that it is possible to prevent the player's degree of advantage from being excessively increased in the small hit game state, and it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

(An example of the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the feature unit 003SH)
FIG. 12-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the second special symbol in the feature unit 003SH. Although the description is omitted, in the feature unit 003SH, the first
The jackpot probability and the small hit probability of the special symbol are the same as the probabilities shown in FIG. 10-3.

In FIG. 12-3, (A) shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability according to the set value in the low probability state. (B) shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability according to the set value in the high probability state. The difference between (A) and (B) is that the small hit probability is mainly "1/2" as compared with the probability shown in FIG. 10-4.

More specifically, in (A) and (B), the set value indicates any of "1" to "6". Further, in (A) and (B), the jackpot probability becomes higher as the set value is higher. On the other hand, in (A) and (B), the small hit probability is a constant value regardless of the set value.

Moreover, when comparing (A) and (B), the jackpot probability of (B) is 10 more than that of (A).
The probability is about twice as high. Moreover, when comparing (A) and (B), the small hit probability is (
A) and (B) have the same probability. That is, the small hit probability is a constant probability regardless of whether it is in a high probability state or a low probability state.

Although not shown, in the feature unit 003SH, the type of small hit is, for example, one type similar to that of small hit C (see FIG. 10-14). The small hit C is a small hit in which the special winning opening is opened for 1.8 seconds during the small hit game, and the winning ball can be expected to win the special winning opening during the small hit game. Further, in the feature unit 003SH, the fluctuation time of the variable display in the high probability / second KT state is 5 seconds in both the case of winning a small hit and the case of non-reach loss. That is, the second fluctuation patterns # 23 and # 26 shown in FIG. 10-9 (H) and FIG. 10-
The second fluctuation patterns # 29 and # 30 shown in 9 (I) shall not be used.

(Production determination process in the 2nd KT state)
Next, with reference to FIG. 12-4, a process for causing an enemy character to appear as a first setting suggestion effect to acquire a card pack will be described. Figure 12-4 shows the second KT.
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing in a state. The effect determination process in the second KT state is a process executed in the variable display start setting process of S171 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

The process shown in FIG. 12-4 is premised on being controlled to a high probability / second KT state. In FIG. 12-4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current variable display is a variable display immediately after being controlled to the small hit game state (step 003SHS101). In addition, in the feature unit 003SH, the small hit winning probability may be any of the set values 1 to 6.
The probability is 1/2. If the variable display this time is not the variable display immediately after being controlled to the small hit game state (step 003SHS101: NO), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step 003SHS104.

When the variable display this time is a variable display immediately after being controlled to the small hit game state (step 0)
03SHS101: YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes and sets the addition effect (addition display) of the acquired balls (step 003SHS102). Then, the effect control CPU 120
Set the execution of the card pack acquisition effect (step 003SHS103). In the previous variable display, a series of effects including the previous variable display, the small hit game state, and the next variable display may be set to be executed. In this case, the series of effects will be continued. , Step 003SHS103 may be omitted.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern in which the display result indicating the small hit is derived and displayed (step 003SHS104).
When the fluctuation pattern this time is not the fluctuation pattern in which the display result indicating the small hit is derived and displayed (step 003SHS104: NO), that is, when the display result indicating the big hit is the fluctuation pattern in which the display result indicating the big hit is derived and displayed, or the loss is lost. When the display result shown is a variation pattern to be derived and displayed, the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step 003SHS107.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern this time is a fluctuation pattern in which the display result indicating the small hit is derived and displayed (step 003SHS104: YES), the enemy character determination process for determining the enemy character to be displayed during the variable display. Is executed (step 003SHS105)
.. In the enemy character determination process, the enemy character determination table described later with reference to FIG. 12-5 is used.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the execution of the enemy character appearance effect (step 003SHS106). Then, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the received fluctuation pattern command (step 003SH).
S107). Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process timer set value of the process data 1 in the selected process table in the process timer and starts the process timer (step 003SHS108).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 uses the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1).
, Lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), and control of the effect device (image display device 5, various lamps, speakers 8L, 8R) is executed (step 003SHS109). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a control signal (display control execution data) to the VDP in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14.
Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time in the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer and starts the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer (step 003SHS110). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 003SHS111), and a series of processes is completed.

In the variable display in which the display result indicating the small hit is derived and displayed by the above-mentioned processing, the first
It is possible to perform an effect of displaying an enemy character as a setting suggestion effect of. In addition, in the variable display immediately after the small hit game is performed (the next variable display after the variable display in which the display result indicating the small hit is derived and displayed), it is possible to perform an effect of acquiring a card pack.

(Example of enemy character determination table)
FIG. 12-5 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an enemy character determination table. The enemy character determination table shown in FIG. 12-5 is a table showing the determination ratio of the enemy character for each set value. The set value indicates any of "1" to "6". The enemy character is a character (
(Described as "character" in the figure) Shows four types A to D.

Character A indicates a default suggesting that it may be any set value. Character B indicates that there is a high possibility that an odd number of set values is set. Character C indicates that there is a high possibility that an even set value is set. Character D indicates that there is a high possibility that a high setting value is set.

The details will be described below. The ratio at which each character of each set value is determined is represented by an inequality sign.
In the case of the setting value "1, 3", the default (character A)> odd number setting suggestion (character B)> high setting suggestion (character D)> even number setting suggestion (character C).
In the case of the setting value "2, 4", the default (character A)> even number setting suggestion (character C)> high setting suggestion (character D)> odd number setting suggestion (character B).
In the case of the setting value "5", default (character A)> high setting suggestion (character D)> odd number setting suggestion (character B)> even number setting suggestion (character C).
In the case of the setting value "6", the default (character A)> high setting suggestion (character D)> even number setting suggestion (character C)> odd number setting suggestion (character B).

That is, the character A indicating the default is most easily determined by any of the set values.
In addition, the ratio at which each character is determined is compared below for each set value.
The odd number setting suggestion (character B) is easily determined when the number is odd, and the lower the setting value is, the easier it is to be determined.
The even-numbered setting suggestion (character C) is more likely to be determined when the number is even, and the lower the set value, the easier it is to determine.
The higher the setting value, the easier it is to determine the high setting suggestion (character D), and the setting value "5",
In the case of "6", it is easier to determine than the odd number setting suggestion (character B) and the even number setting suggestion (character C).

By making such an allocation, the character A can be the default, the character B can be an odd number setting suggestion, the character C can be an even number setting suggestion, and the character D can be a high setting suggestion.

(Example of waiting process for hitting a special figure related to feature unit 003SH)
Next, an example of the process for determining the card pack opening effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-6. FIG. 12-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the special figure hit waiting process in the second KT state according to the feature unit 003SH. The special figure hit wait process in the second KT state is a process executed in the special figure hit wait process of S173 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

The process shown in FIG. 12-6 is premised on being controlled to a high probability / second KT state. In FIG. 12-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a jackpot start designation command (first jackpot start designation command or second jackpot start designation command) has been received (step 003SHS131). When the jackpot start designation command is received (step 003SHS131: YES), that is, when a jackpot occurs, the effect control CP
U120 determines whether or not it is a normal jackpot (6R normal jackpot) (step 003S).
HS132).

If it is not a normal jackpot (step 003SHS132: NO), that is, if it is one of a 2R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, and a 10R probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 003SHS135. On the other hand, in the case of a normal big hit (step 003SHS132: YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes a card pack opening effect determination process for determining which type of playing card to appear for each of the acquired card packs. (Step 003SHS133). In the card pack opening effect determination process, the card pack opening effect determination table, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 12-7, is used.

In the card pack opening effect determination process, a process of determining which type of playing card to appear is performed for each card pack. After this, C for production control
The PU 120 stores the determination result of the card pack opening effect in a predetermined storage area such as the RAM 122 (step 003SHS134). Then, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the effect during the big hit (step 003SHS135). Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the selected process table in the process timer and starts the process timer (step 003SHS136).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 uses the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1).
, Lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), and control of the effect device (image display device 5, various lamps, speakers 8L, 8R) is executed (step 003SHS137). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a control signal (display control execution data) to the VDP in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14.
Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during the jackpot (step S176) (step 003SHS138), and ends a series of processes.

When the big hit start designation command is not received in step 003SHS131 (step 003SHS131: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the small hit start designation command is received (step 003SHS139). When the small hit start designation command has not been received (step 003SHS139: NO), the effect control C
The PU 120 ends a series of processes.

When the small hit start designation command is received (step 003SHS139: YES)
That is, when a small hit occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets the execution of the enemy character defeat effect (step 003SHS140). In the variable display in which the display result indicating the small hit is derived and displayed, a series of effects including the variable display, the small hit game state, and the next variable display may be set to be executed. In this case, the variable display may be set. A series of productions may be continued, and step 003SHS140 may be omitted.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the small hit medium effect (step 003SHS141). Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process timer set value of the process data 1 in the selected process table in the process timer and starts the process timer (step 003SHS142).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 uses the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1).
, Lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), and control of the effect device (image display device 5, various lamps, speakers 8L, 8R) is executed (step 003SHS143). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a control signal (display control execution data) to the VDP in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14.
Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process (step S174) (step 003SHS144), and ends a series of processes.

By the process described above, the card pack opening effect can be determined. The determined card pack opening effect is executed, for example, in the ending effect process described later with reference to FIG. 12-8. Further, in the above description, the card pack opening effect determination process (step 003).
SHS133) is now performed in the special figure hit waiting process. As a result, it is possible to execute the card pack opening effect during the fanfare period or the round period.

However, the card pack opening effect determination process (step 003SHS133) is not limited to the special figure hit waiting process. For example, the card pack opening effect determination process is not limited to the special figure hit waiting process, but is S in the effect control process process shown in FIG.
It may be executed in the big hit middle effect process of 176, or may be executed in the ending effect process of S177.

More specifically, for example, if the card pack opening effect is to be performed during the round period, the card pack opening effect determination process may be executed in the jackpot middle effect process. Further, if the card pack opening effect is to be performed during the ending period, the card pack opening effect determination process may be executed during the ending period. In this way, by executing the card pack opening effect determination process according to the timing of performing the card pack opening effect, it is possible to reduce the processing load in the special figure hit waiting process, and the data to be stored in the RAM 122. The amount can be reduced.

(Example of card pack opening production decision table)
FIG. 12-7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a card pack opening effect determination table. FIG. 12
The card pack opening effect determination table shown in -7 is a table showing the determination ratio of playing cards for each set value. The set value indicates any of "1" to "6". After opening, the playing cards show four types: Jack, Queen, King, and Ace.

Jack indicates a default that suggests that it could be any setting.
Queen indicates that an odd number of settings is likely to be set. King indicates that an even number of settings is likely to be set. Ace indicates that a high setting value is likely to be set.

The details will be described below. The ratio at which each character of each set value is determined is represented by an inequality sign.
When the setting value is "1", odd number setting suggestion (queen)> default (jack)> even number setting suggestion (king)> high setting suggestion (ace). When the set value is "1", the high setting suggestion (ace) is not determined.
When the setting value is "2", even number setting suggestion (king)> default (character A)> odd number setting suggestion (queen)> high setting suggestion (ace). When the set value is "2", the high setting suggestion (ace) is not determined.
In the case of the setting value "3", odd number setting suggestion (queen)> default (jack)> high setting suggestion (ace)> even number setting suggestion (king).
When the setting value is "4", even number setting suggestion (King)> High setting suggestion (Ace)> Default (
Character A)> odd number setting suggestion (queen).
When the setting value is "5", high setting suggestion (ace)> odd number setting suggestion (queen)> default (jack)> even number setting suggestion (king).
When the setting value is "6", high setting suggestion (ace)> even number setting suggestion (king)> default (
Jack)> odd number setting suggestion (queen).

In addition, the ratio of each playing card determined is compared below for each set value.
The odd number setting suggestion (queen) is more likely to be determined when the number is odd, and the lower the setting value, the easier the determination.
The even number setting suggestion (king) is more likely to be determined when the number is even, and the lower the setting value, the easier the determination.
The higher the setting value, the easier it is to determine the high setting suggestion (ace). In addition, the set values "5" and "6"
In the case of "", it is easier to determine than the odd number setting suggestion (queen) and the even number setting suggestion (king). That is, in the case of the set values "5" and "6", the high setting suggestion (ace) is most likely to be determined. Therefore, in the case of the set values "5" and "6", it is possible to easily suggest a high setting.
Further, the high setting suggestion (ace) is not determined when the set values are "1" and "2". That is, the high setting suggestion (ace) indicates that the set values "1" and "2" are denied. Therefore, the high setting suggestion (ace) indicates that the display has high accuracy (high setting reliability).

With such an allocation, Jack can be the default, Queen can be an odd setting suggestion, King can be an even setting suggestion, and Ace can be a high setting suggestion.

Further, it is compared with the enemy character determination table shown in FIG. 12-5 below.
The rate at which the default (jack) is determined is lower than the rate at which the default (character A) in the enemy character determination table is determined. That is, when the card pack opening effect determination table is used, it is difficult to suggest an ambiguous setting value, which suggests that any setting value may be used as compared with the case where the enemy character determination table is used. ..

Further, the ratio at which the odd number setting suggestion (queen) is determined when the set value is odd is higher than the ratio at which the odd number setting suggestion (character B) in the enemy character determination table is determined when the set value is odd. That is, when the set value is odd, it is easier to suggest an odd number setting when the card pack opening effect determination table is used than when the enemy character determination table is used.
Further, the ratio at which the odd number setting suggestion (queen) is determined when the set value is even is lower than the ratio at which the odd number setting suggestion (character B) of the enemy character determination table is determined when the set value is even. That is, when the set value is an even number, it is more difficult to suggest an odd number setting when the card pack opening effect determination table is used than when the enemy character determination table is used.

Further, the ratio at which the even number setting suggestion (king) is determined when the set value is even is higher than the ratio at which the even number setting suggestion (character C) in the enemy character determination table is determined when the set value is even. That is, when the set value is an even number, it is easier to suggest an even number setting when the card pack opening effect determination table is used than when the enemy character determination table is used.
Further, the ratio at which the even number setting suggestion (king) is determined when the set value is odd is lower than the ratio at which the even number setting suggestion (character C) in the enemy character determination table is determined when the set value is odd. That is, when the set value is odd, it is more difficult to suggest an even number setting when the card pack opening effect determination table is used than when the enemy character determination table is used.

In addition, the ratio at which the high setting suggestion (ace) is determined when the set value is high (set values 5 and 6) is determined in the enemy character determination table when the set value is high (set values 5 and 6). High setting suggestion (character D) is higher than the determined rate. That is, when the set value is a high set value, it is easier to suggest a high setting when the card pack opening effect determination table is used than when the enemy character determination table is used.
In addition, the ratio at which the high setting suggestion (ace) is determined when the set value is low (set values 1 to 3) is determined in the enemy character determination table when the set value is low (set values 1 to 3). High setting suggestion (character D) is lower than the determined rate. That is, when the set value is a low set value, it is less likely to suggest a high setting when the card pack opening effect determination table is used than when the enemy character determination table is used.

Therefore, the suggestion of the set value (playing card) determined by the card pack opening effect determination table is compared with the suggestion of the set value (enemy character) determined by the enemy character determination table shown in FIG. 12-5. The setting reliability (accuracy) is high.

(Example of ending effect processing related to feature unit 003SH)
Next, an example of processing when executing the card pack opening effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-8. FIG. 12-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the ending effect processing related to the feature unit 003SH. The ending effect processing is a process executed in S177 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 12-8, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot end designation command has been received (step 003SHS151). When the jackpot end designation command is received (step 003SHS151: YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs a result effect of displaying the number of prize balls, the number of consecutive villas, the total number of prize balls in the consecutive villas, etc. in the big hit game. Execution setting (step 003SHS152) is performed, and a series of processes is completed.

On the other hand, when the jackpot end designation command has not been received (step 003SHS151:
NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the result effect is being produced (step 003SHS153). When the result is being produced (step 003SHS153: YE)
S), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the result effect (step 003SHS154).

If it is not the end timing of the result production (step 003SHS154: NO),
The effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. On the other hand, when it is the end timing of the result effect (step 003SHS154: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is in the ending period of the normal jackpot (6R normal jackpot) (step 0).
03SHS155). If it is not during the ending period of the normal jackpot (step 003S)
HS155: NO), that is, probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 10R
During the ending period (probability change jackpot), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes.

On the other hand, when the ending period of the normal jackpot is in progress (step 003SHS155: Y)
ES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the cumulative total of acquired card packs is being displayed (step 003SHS156). Here, the case where the cumulative total of acquired card packs is not displayed during the ending period of the normal jackpot is the case of the normal jackpot won in the normal state (low probability / low base state), or the high probability / second KT state. There is a case of a normal big hit that is won in the high probability / first KT state without going through. In addition to this, for example, although a big hit that can shift to the high probability / second KT state is won, it is controlled to the small hit game state even once in the high probability / second KT state, such as in the case of a so-called hold ream. There is also a case of a normal jackpot won in a high probability / second KT state.

When the cumulative total of acquired card packs is not displayed (Step 003SHS156: N
O), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. When the card pack has been acquired (step 003SHS156: YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the card pack opening effect to be executed (step 003SHS157), and ends a series of processes.

In step 003SHS153, when the result is not being produced (step 003)
SHS153: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the card pack opening effect is in progress (step 003SHS158). When the card pack is not being opened (
Step 003SHS158: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. On the other hand, when the card pack is being opened (step 003SHS158: YES)
, The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the card pack opening effect (step 003SHS159).

When it is not the end timing of the card pack opening effect (step 003SHS159:
NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. When it is the end timing of the card pack opening effect (step 003SHS159: YES), the effect control CPU1
20 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 003SHS160), and ends a series of processes.

By the above-mentioned processing, the card pack opening effect determined in the special drawing hit waiting processing can be executed during the ending period. Therefore, the high-probability state (for example, the high-probability / second KT state) ends and the time-saving state (low-probability / first KT state) ends, and the player feels disappointed, but the card pack The set value can be suggested by the opening effect. As a result, the ending period can be made a meaningful period for the player, so that the unfortunate feeling that the player has can be alleviated. Further, when a high set value is suggested, it is possible to increase the motivation to play in the subsequent gaming state including the time saving state.

(Example of screen transition of appearance of enemy character and acquisition of card pack)
FIG. 12-9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of screen transitions of the appearance of an enemy character and the acquisition of a card pack. In FIG. 12-9, in the small hit RUSH state (small hit RUSH mode), the display result indicating the small hit is derived and displayed on the variable display screen → the screen when the small hit game state is controlled → the small hit The transition of the variable display screen after being controlled to the gaming state will be described.

FIG. 12-9 shows the screen of the first variation after being controlled to the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH state). In the small hit RUSH state, the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode. As shown in (A), the image display device 5 displays a variable display (scroll) of the decorative symbol 003SH100. The decorative symbol 028SH100 includes three symbols, a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol. Further, in the lower left of the image display device 5, the decorative pattern 003SH
The small symbol 028SH101 corresponding to the variable display of 100 is variably displayed (scrolled). In the feature unit 003SH, the fluctuation time of the variable display in the small hit RUSH state is 5 seconds in both the case of winning the small hit and the case of non-reach loss.

Further, in the lower center of the image display device 5, an active display 003SH corresponding to a variable display is displayed.
110 is displayed. Further, next to the active display 003SH110, a hold display 003SH111 indicating the second hold storage is displayed. In addition, in the upper right of the image display device 5,
A right-handed notification 003SH105 is displayed to notify that the game ball is launched toward the right-handed game area. As a result, the player plays the game by hitting right in the small hit RUSH state.

Further, a total prize ball number display 003SH120 is displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5.
The total number of prize balls displayed 003SH120 indicates the total number of prize balls paid out during the consecutive villas. Here, the consecutive villa is, for example, a high probability state (high probability / first KT state, or high probability / second KT state) after winning a so-called first hit (for example, 6R probability variation jackpot or 10R probability variation jackpot). It is controlled to win a probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 10R probability variation jackpot).

That is, in the consecutive villa, the jackpot game state by the probability variation jackpot is repeatedly performed through the high probability state. The number of consecutive villas is the number of big hits obtained by adding the number of big hits repeatedly controlled via a high probability state and one first hit. In (A), the total number of prize balls is displayed 00.
In 3SH120, the 10R probability variation jackpot immediately before is the first hit, and 1500 due to the jackpot.
Indicates that there was a winning ball.

Here, the screen shown in (A) is displayed by determining and executing various effects based on the effect control command received from the main board 1 by the effect control CPU 120. In particular,
The effect control CPU 120 is based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol 003SH100 (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol 003SH100, the reach effect, and various types. Whether or not to execute various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined, and based on the decision result, the decorative pattern 0
03 The variable display of SH100 is executed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 has an effect mode (small hit RU) according to the game state based on the game state specified by the effect control command.
SH mode) is determined, and the effect mode based on the determination result is executed.

In (A) of FIG. 12-9, when a predetermined time (for example, about 3 seconds) elapses, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (B).

FIG. 12-9 (B) shows a screen when the decorative symbol 003SH100 is erased and the enemy character image 003SH130 appears during the variable display in which the display result indicating the small hit is derived and displayed. The enemy character image 003SH 130 shows, for example, the enemy character D suggesting a high setting value. In (B), the enemy character image 003SH130 of the enemy character D is displayed, but depending on the determination result of the enemy character determination process (step SHS105 in FIG. 12-4), any one of the enemy characters A to C is displayed. The enemy character image 003SH130 may be displayed.

Further, in the small hit RUSH state, when the display result of the non-reach loss is derived and displayed, none of the enemy characters A to D is displayed. Therefore, by displaying any one of the enemy characters A to D, it is suggested that the display result indicating the small hit is derived and displayed. In (B), although the decorative symbol 003SH100 has been erased, the small symbol 003SH101 is variably displayed, and it is notified that the special symbol (second special symbol) is being variably displayed.

In (B), when the variable display stop timing is reached and the small hit game state is controlled,
The screen transitions to the screen shown in (C).

FIG. 12-9 (C) shows a screen in a small hit game state. In (C), the small symbol 003SH101 is stopped and displayed with the definite symbol "1, 3, 5" which is a combination indicating the small hit game. Further, (C) shows an effect in which the ally character 003SH140 destroys the enemy character D (enemy character defeat effect). In the feature unit 003SH, no matter which of the enemy characters A to D appears, the enemy character is always destroyed.

The small hit game state includes a small hit fanfare period, an opening period of the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening), and a small hit ending period. The effect shown in (C) is performed during the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening), but is not limited to this, and may be performed during the small hit fanfare period or the small hit ending period. It may be executed over each period.

In displaying the screen shown in (C), the effect control CPU 120 has read, for example, an exit code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol 003SH100 (in the figure, the small symbol 003SH101) from the effect control pattern. Alternatively, the final decorative symbol 003SH100, which is the display result of the decorative symbol 003SH100, is stopped and displayed in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol 003SH100 is to be stopped and displayed. In (C), when the small hit game state ends, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (D).

FIG. 12-9 (D) shows the screen during the next variable display after the small hit game state is finished.
In (D), a prize effect image 003SH121 showing that 10 prize balls were obtained by winning a prize (for example, 1 ball) in the special prize opening in the small hit game state of (C).
Is displayed. In addition, the total prize ball number display 003SH120 is a value obtained by adding 10 balls (1).
510) is shown. If there are a plurality of winning numbers in the special winning opening in the small hit game state of (C), the winning effect image 003SH121 is displayed as many times as the number of winnings.

When the display of the winning effect image 003SH121 and the addition display of the total prize ball number display 003SH120 are completed in (D) of FIG. 12-9, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (E).

FIG. 12-9 (E) shows a screen for acquiring the card pack 003SH150. A card pack is an item acquired by being controlled in a small hit game state. That is, the card pack is acquired regardless of whether or not there is a prize in the special winning opening in the small hit game state. In (E), when the player is notified that the card pack 003SH150 has been acquired, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (F).

FIG. 12-9 (F) shows the total number of acquired card packs 003SH150.
The screen to be added to SH151 is shown. The total number of acquisitions displayed 003SH151 is in the consecutive villas (small hit R)
Shows the total number of card packs 003SH150 acquired in (in the USH state). That is, the total number of acquisitions display 003SH151 is displayed even if a probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 10R probability variation jackpot) occurs in a high probability state (high probability / second KT state or high probability / first KT state). The value before the jackpot game is displayed in succession without being reset after the jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot.

The effects shown in (D) to (F) are executed in a period of, for example, about 3 seconds from the start of the variable display. Therefore, when the variable display shown in (D) to (F) is a variable display in which the display result indicating the small hit is derived and displayed, as shown in (B) after the screen of (F). The enemy character image 003SH130 is displayed on the screen, and then the screen transitions (C) to (F) occur. On the other hand, when the variable display shown in (D) to (F) is a variable display in which the display result indicating non-reach loss is derived and displayed, the enemy character image 003SH130 is not displayed, and then the display is lost. The display result indicating is derived and displayed.

In displaying the screens shown in (D) to (F), if the effect control CPU 120 receives the special winning opening winning designation command (effect control command), the second KT state flag is set. (That is, if it is in the high probability / second KT state), 10 is added to the value of the prize ball counter. Then, in the next variable display after finishing the small hit game state, the effect control CPU 120 displays the winning effect image 003SH121, the total prize ball number display 003SH120, and the card pack 003SH150 on the image display device 5. And the addition display of the total number of acquisitions display 003SH151 is performed.

After shifting to the small hit RUSH state, if 39 fluctuations elapse without winning the big hit, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (G).

FIG. 12-9 (G) shows the variable display of the 40th variation after being controlled to the small hit RUSH state. In (G), the card pack 003SH150 is displayed, and the total number of acquisitions display 003SH151 is additionally displayed. That is, in the variable display of the 39th variation after being controlled to the small hit RUSH state, it is shown that the small hit was won. In this way, in the small hit RUSH state, each time the small hit game state is controlled, the card pack 003
The production to acquire SH150 is performed.

Here, if the total number of acquisitions display 003SH151 is displayed during the normal jackpot game, the card pack opening effect is performed during the ending period. On the other hand, if the total number of acquisitions display 003SH151 is not displayed, the card pack opening effect is not performed during the ending period. Therefore, when the total number of acquisitions display 003SH151 is not displayed, another effect may be performed instead of the card pack opening effect during the ending period.

Further, when the total number of acquisitions display 003SH151 is not displayed, the ending period may be ended without performing another effect in place of the card pack opening effect during the ending period. That is, the length of the ending period may be different depending on whether or not the total number of acquisitions display 003SH151 is displayed during the normal jackpot jackpot game.

Specifically, as an ending pattern for a normal jackpot jackpot game, an ending pattern with a long ending period and an ending pattern with a short ending period may be prepared in advance. In this case, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 003SH
(The game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) has a history (flag) indicating that the computer was controlled to the high probability / second KT state before the start of the normal big hit big hit game, and the high probability. / The history (count value) of the number of times controlled in the small hit game state in the second KT state may be referred to, and one of the ending patterns may be determined using these histories.

Specifically, when performing another effect instead of the card pack opening effect (when the flag is on and the count value is "1" or more), an ending pattern having a long ending period may be determined. Further, when the other effect is not performed (when the flag is off and at least one of the count values is "0" is satisfied), an ending pattern having a short ending period may be determined. ..

As shown in FIG. 12-9, in the small hit RUSH state, the enemy character image 003SH130 of (B) is displayed in the variable display in which the display result indicating the small hit is derived and displayed, and therefore the small hit is won. It is possible to make the player recognize that. Further, since the set value can be suggested depending on the type of the displayed enemy character, the player can be made to guess the set value. In addition, by performing the effect of destroying the enemy character of (C) in the small hit game state, it is possible to excite the effect in the small hit game state and improve the interest.

Further, in the next variable display after the small hit game, the winning effect image 003SH of (D)
By displaying 121, the player can be made to recognize the number of prize balls acquired in the small hit game state. Further, by displaying the card pack 003SH150 of (E), it is possible to make the player recognize that the small hit game has been executed and that the setting value is often suggested in the card pack opening effect.

Further, by performing the addition display of the total number of acquisitions display 003SH151 in (F), the small hit R
In the high probability state (during the consecutive villas) including the USH state, the player can be made to recognize the total number of times the small hit game is executed and the degree (number of times) that the set value is suggested in the card pack opening effect. .. Further, in the next variable display after the small hit game, by performing the effects (D) to (F), the next variable display after the small hit game is a variable display in which the display result of the non-reach loss is derived and displayed. Even if it is, the production can be lively.

In this way, in the feature unit 003SH, in the small hit RUSH state, the variable display in which the display result indicating the small hit is derived and displayed, the small hit game state, and the variable display immediately after being controlled to the small hit game state are displayed. A series of productions can be performed over the course. Therefore, small hit RUS
In the H state, the production when a small hit is won can be further enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(An example of screen transition when performing a card pack opening effect during a big hit game)
FIG. 12-10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of screen transition when the card pack opening effect is performed during the jackpot game. FIG. 12-10 describes an example of screen transition when a 6R normal jackpot is won and controlled to a jackpot gaming state in a small hit RUSH state (small hit RUSH mode). In addition, in the high probability / first KT state, even when the 6R normal jackpot is won, the card pack opening effect shown in FIG. 12-10 may be performed.

FIG. 12-10 (A) shows a 6R normal jackpot notification screen. Specifically, on the image display device 5, the decorative symbol 003SH100 (and the small symbol 003SH101) is stopped and displayed with an even number of doublets indicating that there is a possibility of a 6R normal jackpot. In addition, decorative pattern 00
Even if the 3SH100 is stopped and displayed with an even number of doublets, in the jackpot game state, an effect of promoting to a probability variation jackpot (an effect of notifying that the probability variation jackpot is obtained: for example, an effect of changing to an odd number of doublets) is performed. There is also.

In (A), the total number of acquired cards 003SH151 is displayed on the upper left of the image display device 5, and the number of card packs acquired during the consecutive villa including the small hit RUSH state is displayed. In FIG. 12-10 (A), the total number of card packs acquired from the previous jackpot to the current jackpot is displayed.

Here, the total number of acquisitions display 003SH151 indicates the cumulative number of card packs acquired during the consecutive villas. As described above, if the 6R probability variation jackpot is won in the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH state), it may be controlled to the high probability / first KT state after the 6R probability variation jackpot. In this case, the number of acquired card packs is continuously displayed even in the high probability / first KT state. Therefore, even if the 6R normal jackpot is won in the high probability / first KT state, the card pack opening effect shown in FIG. 12-10 is performed.

In (A), when the predetermined symbol confirmation time elapses, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (B).

FIG. 12-10 (B) shows an effect screen of the fanfare period in the jackpot game of 6R jackpot. In (B), the image display device 5 displays a character image 003SH141 showing a 6R normal jackpot. Further, also in (B), the total acquired number display 003SH151 is continuously displayed on the upper left of the image display device 5.

In displaying the screen shown in (B), the effect control CPU 120 displays, for example, an image during the fanfare period in response to receiving a jackpot start designation command from the main board 11. In (B), when the fanfare period elapses, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (C).

FIG. 12-10 (C) shows the effect screen of the round period (for example, the third round) in the jackpot gaming state of the 6R normal jackpot. In (C), the image display device 5 displays a character image 003SH 142 indicating the round period. Further, in (C), the total number of prize balls displayed 003SH120 is displayed by adding the number of prize balls paid out from the start of the big hit to the present (up to 3 rounds). Further, also in (C), the image display device 5
In the upper left of the above, the total number of acquisitions display 003SH151 is continuously displayed.

In displaying the screen shown in (C), the effect control CPU 120 receives an image during the round period in each round game, for example, in response to receiving a large winning opening opening display command from the main board 11. Is displayed. In (C), when the final round is completed, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (D).

FIG. 12-10 (D) shows an effect screen of the result effect during the ending period.
As shown in (D), the result effect indicates, for example, the number of big hits in the consecutive villa and the total number of prize balls acquired during the consecutive villa. Further, also in (D), the total acquired number display 003SH151 is continuously displayed on the upper left of the image display device 5.

In displaying the screen shown in (D), the effect control CPU 120 receives, for example, a jackpot end designation command for designating the termination of the jackpot game state from the main board 11, and the ending period. Display the image inside. When the result effect is finished in (D), the screen transitions to the screen shown in (E).

FIG. 12-10 (E) shows an effect screen at the start of the card pack opening effect during the ending period. In (E), the image display device 5 is displayed to indicate that the card pack opening effect is started. Further, also in (E), the total acquired number display 003SH151 is continuously displayed on the upper left of the image display device 5. After displaying the screen shown in (E), the screen transitions to the screen shown in (F).

FIG. 12-10 (F) shows an effect screen during the card pack opening effect during the ending period. Here, it is assumed that the set value is set to, for example, "6". In the card pack opening effect, 1 from multiple card packs indicated by the total number of acquisitions display 003SH151
The effect is to take out the cards one by one and open the card pack. When you open the card pack, one of the four types of playing cards (Ace, King, Queen, Jack) will appear in the card pack.

A priority is set for each playing card, and the cards are displayed in a display mode according to the priority. For example, Ace's playing card 003SH171 has a high set value and a set value of "1".
, A card that suggests the denial of "2" and is a nice card for the player, so it is displayed in the largest display area. Since King's playing card 003SH172 is a card that suggests an even set value (because there is a possibility of set values 4 and 6), it is displayed in the display area next to the ace card. Since the Queen's playing card 003SH173 is a card that suggests an odd number of settings (because there is a possibility of settings 3 and 5), it is displayed in the next largest display area after the King's card. Jack's playing card 003SH174 is displayed in the smallest display area to indicate that it may be any set value.

In addition, in FIG. 12-10 (F), one card is taken out from a plurality of card packs, and the card pack is opened. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of card packs may be opened at once (simultaneously). Further, in FIG. 12-10 (F), the number of each playing card is displayed numerically, but each playing card may be displayed side by side (for example, nine ace cards are displayed side by side). .. In this case, a predetermined number of sheets (for example, 1)
When the number of sheets reaches 0), it may be displayed in a display mode (for example, a display mode in which the color and size are different) indicating a predetermined number of sheets.

When the card pack opening effect shown in FIG. 12-10 (F) is completed (when the period controlled by the jackpot game state is completed), the screen transitions to the screen shown in (G).

FIG. 12-10 (G) shows the first variable display controlled to the time saving state (low probability / first KT state). In the time saving state, the effect mode is controlled to the time saving mode. Further, in the time saving state, the right-handed notification 003SH105 is displayed, and the game is performed by right-handed.

As shown in FIGS. 12-10 (A) to 12-10, the total number of acquired card packs 003SH151 is continuously displayed on the upper left of the image display device 5 even during the jackpot game, so that the number of acquired card packs is displayed. It is possible to suggest to the player that the setting suggestion according to the above is performed. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the card pack opening effect to be performed before the card pack opening effect is performed.

Further, as shown in (F), by performing the card pack opening effect, it is possible to suggest a set value to the player depending on which type of playing card appears in large numbers. For example, in (F), since the ace playing cards are the most and the king playing cards are the next most appearing, there is a high possibility that the setting value is high, and the setting values are not "1" and "2". Also,
It can be suggested that there is a high possibility that the set value is an even number (for example, the set value “6”).

In particular, in the feature unit 003SH, since the card pack opening effect is usually performed in the big hit,
By ending the villa, the unfortunate feelings that the player has can be alleviated. Specifically, in the normal jackpot jackpot game, since it is possible to suggest a setting value that is important for the player in the subsequent game, it is possible to improve the interest of the production during the normal jackpot jackpot game. ..

(About the priority of each playing card)
FIG. 12-11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the priority set for each playing card and the display area. As shown in FIG. 12-11, there are four types of playing cards (ace, king, queen, and jack) in the card pack opening effect. In addition, the priority is 1 to
It is one of 4, and each is associated with a playing card. Specifically, ace has the highest priority. Next, King has a high priority. Next is Queen's priority. Jack has the lowest priority.

In addition, it is displayed in the size of the display area according to the priority. Specifically, the higher the priority of a playing card, the larger the display area is displayed. It should be noted that the display mode may be according to the priority. For example, the higher the priority of the playing cards, the more conspicuous the display mode (for example, different colors,
It may be a different background image, a different effect image, etc.). In addition, the higher the priority, the more emphasized the effect using the sound or the lamp.

(An example of screen transition when the card pack opening effect is not performed during the jackpot game)
FIG. 12-12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of screen transition when the card pack opening effect is not performed during the jackpot game. FIG. 12-12 describes an example of screen transition when a 10R probability variation jackpot is won and controlled to a jackpot gaming state in a small hit RUSH state (small hit RUSH mode).

In the small hit RUSH state (high probability / second KT state), 2R probability variation big hit and 6R
Even if you win the probabilistic jackpot, the card pack opening effect will not be performed. Similarly, in the high probability / 1st KT state, even if the 2R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, or the 10R probability variation jackpot is won, the card pack opening effect is not performed. Also, in the low probability / 1st KT state, even if the 2R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, the 10R probability variation jackpot, or the 6R normal jackpot is won, the card pack opening effect is not performed.

FIG. 12-12 (A) shows a notification screen for a 10R probability variation jackpot. Specifically, on the image display device 5, the decorative symbol 003SH100 (and the small symbol 003SH101) is stopped and displayed with doublets of "7" indicating that there is a possibility of a 10R normal jackpot.

In (A), the total number of acquired cards 003SH151 is displayed on the upper left of the image display device 5, and the number of card packs acquired during the consecutive villa including the small hit RUSH state is displayed. In (A), when the predetermined symbol confirmation time elapses, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (B).

FIG. 12-12 (B) shows an effect screen of the fanfare period in the jackpot game state. In (B), the image display device 5 has a character image 00 showing a 10R probability variation jackpot.
3SH143 is displayed. Also in (B), the upper left of the image display device 5 is
The total number of acquisitions display 003SH151 is continuously displayed.

In displaying the screen shown in (B), the effect control CPU 120 displays, for example, an image during the fanfare period in response to receiving a jackpot start designation command from the main board 11. In (B), when the fanfare period elapses, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (C).

(C) of FIG. 12-12 shows the round period in the jackpot gaming state of the 10R probability variation jackpot (
For example, the production screen of the third round) is shown. In (C), the image display device 5 displays a character image 003SH144 indicating the round period. Further, in (C), the total prize ball number display 003SH120 is displayed from the start of the big hit to the present (up to 3 rounds).
The number of prize balls paid out is added and displayed. Further, also in (C), the total acquired number display 003SH151 is continuously displayed on the upper left of the image display device 5.

In displaying the screen shown in (C), the effect control CPU 120 receives an image during the round period in each round game, for example, in response to receiving a large winning opening opening display command from the main board 11. Is displayed. In (C), when the final round is completed, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (D).

FIG. 12-12 (D) shows an effect screen of the result effect during the ending period.
As shown in (D), the result production shows the number of big hits in the consecutive villa and the total number of prize balls won in the consecutive villa. Also in (D), the total number of acquisitions is displayed at the upper left of the image display device 5.
SH151 is continuously displayed.

In displaying the screen shown in (D), the effect control CPU 120 may be, for example, the main board 1.
The image during the ending period is displayed in response to the reception of the jackpot end designation command that specifies that the jackpot game state is terminated from 1. In (D), when the ending period elapses (when the period controlled to the jackpot game state ends), the screen transitions to the screen shown in (E).

Here, during the ending period of the normal jackpot jackpot game, a card pack opening effect may be performed. On the other hand, during the ending period of the jackpot game of probabilistic jackpot, the card pack opening effect is not performed. Therefore, during the ending period of the jackpot game of the probabilistic jackpot, another effect may be performed instead of the card pack opening effect.

Further, during the ending period of the jackpot game of the probabilistic jackpot, the ending period may be ended without performing another effect instead of the card pack opening effect. That is, the length of the ending period may be different between the jackpot game of the probabilistic jackpot and the jackpot game of the normal jackpot.

Specifically, as a supplement, an ending pattern for a normal jackpot (an ending pattern with a long ending period) and an ending pattern for a probabilistic jackpot (an ending pattern with a short ending period) may be prepared in advance. In this case, feature unit 003S
Pachinko game machine 1 related to H (microcomputer 100 for game control (specifically, CP)
In U103)), one of the ending patterns may be determined by referring to the type of jackpot before the start of the jackpot game.

FIG. 12-12 (E) shows the effect screen of the first variation after the big hit game of the 10R probability variation big hit is completed and the state is changed to the small hit RUSH state (small hit RUSH mode). In (E), the total number of acquisitions display 003SH151 is continuously displayed on the upper left of the image display device 5. After shifting to the small hit RUSH state, if 39 fluctuations elapse without winning the big hit, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (F).

FIG. 12-12 (F) shows the variable display of the 40th variation after being controlled to the small hit RUSH state. In (F), the card pack 003SH150 is displayed, and the total number of acquisitions display 003SH151 is additionally displayed. That is, in the variable display of the 40th variation after being controlled to the small hit RUSH state, it indicates that the small hit was won.

As shown in FIGS. 12-10 (A) to 12-10, the total number of acquisitions is displayed on the upper left of the image display device 5 during the big hit game of the 10R probability variation big hit and in the small hit RUSH state after that.
Since H151 is continuously displayed, it is possible to suggest to the player that the setting suggestion is performed according to the number of acquired card packs. Further, by performing the small hit game in the small hit RUSH state, the player can obtain the joy of the prize ball and the joy of increasing the number of card packs. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the small hit RUSH state.

As described above, in the embodiment related to the feature unit 003SH, the control of the small hit RUSH state is completed based on the fact that the 6R normal big hit is won while the small hit RUSH state is controlled, that is, 6R The length of the control period of the small hit RUSH state differs depending on the presence or absence of the normal big hit. In addition, in the card pack opening effect, it is possible to display the number of card packs and playing cards corresponding to the number of times the small hit is won in the small hit RUSH state.

Therefore, the small hit RUSH state ends and the time is shortened, which makes the player feel unfortunate. However, by suggesting the set value, the ending period becomes a meaningful period for the player. It is possible to reduce the unfortunate feelings that the player has. In addition, in the card pack opening effect, it is possible to present a plurality of estimation elements of set values at one time. As a result, the player can infer the set value using a plurality of inference elements. Further, when a high set value is suggested, the player can increase the motivation to continue the game in the subsequent game state including the time saving state.

(Modification example 1 of feature unit 003SH)
Next, a modification 1 of the feature unit 003SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 003SH, a configuration for acquiring the same number of card packs as the number of winning small hits has been described. That is, in the above-described embodiment of the feature unit 003SH, a configuration capable of displaying the same number of specific displays (card packs) as the number of times the specific condition is satisfied (number of small hits) in the specific state (small hit RUSH state) has been described. ..

In place of or in addition to such a configuration, in the first modification of the feature unit 003SH, a configuration in which the number of small hit wins and the number of card packs won are not the same will be described. That is, in the first modification of the feature unit 003SH, a configuration capable of displaying a specific display (card pack) different from the number of times the specific condition is satisfied (the number of small hits) in the specific state (small hit RUSH state) will be described.

In the first modification of the feature unit 003SH, for example, when a small hit is won N times (N ≧ 2).
) It may be a production to acquire one card pack. As a result, the frequency of acquiring the card pack can be reduced, and the acquisition of the card pack can be a valuable effect for the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, in the modified example 1 of the feature unit 003SH, when a small hit is won once, a plurality of card packs may be acquired. As a result, the frequency of acquiring card packs can be increased, and the effect of winning a small hit in the small hit game state can be enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, in the modified example 1 of the feature portion 003SH, when the small hit is won N times (N ≧ 2).
One card when performing the effect of winning one card pack, when performing the effect of acquiring multiple card packs when winning once per small hit, and when performing the effect of winning once per small hit There may be times when the production is to win the pack. Specifically, the effect control CPU 12
Each time, 0 may determine which effect to execute using a predetermined effect table. As a result, in the small hit RUSH state, even if the small hit is won, the number of card packs acquired can be changed each time. Therefore, the player can pay attention to the number of acquired card packs. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, in the first modification of the feature unit 003SH, when the card pack is not acquired, the effect of not displaying the enemy character may be performed. As a result, it is possible to suggest whether or not a card pack has been acquired depending on whether or not an enemy character has appeared. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the presence or absence of the enemy character.

Further, in the modification 1 of the feature unit 003SH, when the card pack is not acquired, the enemy character may be displayed and the effect of not destroying the enemy character may be performed. As a result, the appearance of the enemy character makes it possible to pay attention to whether or not to destroy the enemy character (whether or not to acquire the card pack) while suggesting the set value.

Further, in the first modification of the feature unit 003SH, one of an enemy character that is easy to destroy and an enemy character that is difficult to destroy may be displayed. For example, when the card pack is acquired, the enemy character which is easy to destroy may be easily displayed, while when the card pack is not acquired, the enemy character which is difficult to destroy may be easily displayed. As a result, it is possible to suggest whether it is easy or difficult to obtain a card pack afterwards depending on the type of enemy character that appears, and it is possible to draw attention to the character that appears.

Further, it is possible to perform an effect of displaying either an enemy character that is easy to acquire a large number of card packs or an enemy character that is difficult to acquire a large number of card packs. For example, even when acquiring a card pack, if the number of cards is large, the enemy character that is easy to acquire a large number of cards is likely to be displayed, while if the number of cards is small, it is difficult to acquire a large number of enemy characters. May be displayed easily. As a result, the number of card packs to be acquired after that can be suggested depending on the type of the enemy character that appears, and the type of the enemy character can be focused on.

In addition, when displaying an enemy character that is easy (or difficult to defeat) or an enemy character that is easy (or difficult) to acquire the number of sheets, the setting value is suggested for each character according to the character type. You may. That is, the suggestion setting value may be associated with each character regardless of whether it is easy (or difficult) to defeat or easy (or difficult) to acquire the number of sheets. As a result, it is possible to suggest the ease of acquiring the card pack and the number of cards depending on the type of the enemy character that appears, and it is also possible to suggest the set value.

(Modification example 2 of feature unit 003SH)
Next, a modification 2 of the feature unit 003SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 003SH, a configuration in which a small hit game is generated as a trigger for acquiring a card pack has been described. That is, in the embodiment related to the feature unit 003SH described above, the specific display of the number corresponding to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied (the number of small hits) in the specific state (small hit RUSH state) (the number of small hits)
The configuration that can display the card pack) was explained.

In place of such a configuration, or in addition to such a configuration, in the modification 2 of the feature unit 003SH, a configuration in which the trigger for acquiring the card pack is other than the occurrence of the small hit game (for example, the number of fluctuations) will be described. To do. That is, in the second modification of the feature unit 003SH, a configuration capable of displaying a specific display (card pack) corresponding to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied (for example, the number of fluctuations) in the specific state (small hit RUSH state) will be described.

In the second modification of the feature unit 003SH, a case where the number of times the specific condition is satisfied is set to the number of fluctuations after being controlled to the high probability / second KT state will be described. However, the number of times a specific condition is met is
Not limited to the number of fluctuations after being controlled to the high probability / second KT state, the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening after being controlled to the high probability / second KT state, and the high probability / second KT state are controlled. The number of winnings in the general winning opening 10 since then, the number of specific effects since being controlled to the high probability / second KT state (for example, the number of reach losses and the number of appearances of a specific character), and the high base state It may be the elapsed time from being controlled, and so on.

In the second modification of the feature unit 003SH, for example, when the variable display is performed M times (M ≧).
2) It may be an effect of acquiring one card pack. The variable display referred to here is a variable display of loss (for example, non-reach loss), but may include a variable display in which a display result indicating a small hit is derived and displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to obtain a card pack every time the variable display is performed M times. Therefore, even if it is a non-reach loss variable display, it can be a variable display indicating that a useful effect is to be performed for the player thereafter. As a result, the interest can be improved.

Further, in the modification 2 of the feature unit 003SH, when the variable display is performed once, a plurality of card packs may be acquired. As a result, the frequency of acquiring card packs can be increased, and the effect can be enhanced even with the variable display of non-reach loss in the small hit game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, in the modification 2 of the feature unit 003SH, when the variable display is performed M times (M ≧ 2).
) When performing the effect of acquiring one card pack, when performing the effect of acquiring multiple card packs when the variable display is performed once, and when performing the effect of acquiring multiple card packs, and when the variable display is performed once 1 There may be times when the effect is to acquire individual card packs. Specifically, CP for production control
The U120 may use a predetermined effect table to determine which effect to perform each time. With such a configuration, even if the non-reach loss is variablely displayed in the small hit RUSH state, it is possible to know at what timing the card pack is acquired and how many card packs can be acquired. It can be made difficult. This makes it possible to pay attention to the number of card packs acquired. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

In the second modification of the feature unit 003SH, the timing for displaying the specific display (card pack) may be any timing during the variable display. Further, when displaying the card pack, an enemy character suggesting a set value may be displayed, and an effect of destroying the enemy character may be performed.

(Modification example 3 of feature unit 003SH)
Next, a modification 3 of the feature unit 003SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 003SH, the configuration in which only the setting value is suggested in the card pack opening effect has been described. That is, in the embodiment related to the above-mentioned feature unit 003SH, in the specific effect (card pack opening effect), only the specific display (playing card) related to the setting suggestion is described.

In place of such a configuration, or in addition to such a configuration, in the modification 3 of the feature unit 003SH, in the card pack opening effect, a promotion effect for notifying that it is a "probability change jackpot" and a hold continuous effect. The configuration for performing the above will be described. That is, in the modification 3 of the feature unit 003SH, in the specific effect (card pack opening effect), the specific display (playing cards) of the number corresponding to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied (the number of small hit wins) in the specific state (small hit RUSH state). A configuration in which a card) and a special display (a card for notifying promotion and a card for notifying hold ream) regarding an advantageous state (big hit game state) can be displayed will be described.

The special display regarding the advantageous state (big hit game state) includes the display of the promotion effect and the display of the hold continuous effect. The display of the promotion effect is a display for notifying that the value of the advantageous state is improved. The display of the hold continuous effect is a display for notifying that the hold memory stored in the jackpot game state includes the hold memory determined to be a jackpot by the look-ahead determination. Feature 00
In the third modification of 3SH, in the card pack opening effect, a promotion effect may be performed, or a hold continuous effect may be performed. However, the configuration may be such that only one of the promotion effect and the hold continuous effect can be executed.

In the modification 3 of the feature unit 003SH, for example, in the high probability / second KT state, 6R
When the probability variation jackpot is won, the display result indicating the 6R normal jackpot is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the display result indicating the 6R probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed. Further, in the big hit game state of the 6R probability variation big hit, the same effect as the big hit effect in the big hit game state of the 6R normal big hit is performed. Then, during the ending period, the card pack opening effect is performed.

In the card pack opening effect, a promotion effect is performed to notify that the jackpot game this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot. In the promotion effect, for example, a playing card indicating "promotion" may be displayed. According to the third modification of the feature unit 003SH, the promotion effect may be performed in the card pack opening effect, so that the player can expect the promotion effect. Also,
In the card pack opening effect, the set value can also be suggested. Therefore, by making it possible to execute the promotion effect in the card pack opening effect, it is possible to further improve the interest of the card pack opening effect.

Further, in the hold continuous effect in the card pack opening effect, for example, a playing card indicating "one more time" may be displayed. According to the modification 3 of the feature unit 003SH, since there is a possibility that the hold continuous effect is performed in the card pack opening effect, the player can expect the hold continuous effect. In addition, the set value can also be suggested in the card pack opening effect. For this reason, it is possible to further improve the interest of the card pack opening effect by making it possible to execute the hold continuous effect in the card pack opening effect.

In addition, in the card pack opening effect, the functional configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the modification 3 of the feature unit 003SH in the case where the hold sequence effect for notifying the hold sequence is performed is supplemented. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the modification 3 of the feature unit 003SH may further include a pre-start determination means and a hold storage means in the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the feature unit 003SH. ..

The pre-start determination means determines whether or not the variable display that has not yet been started is a display result indicating that the display result of the variable display is controlled to an advantageous state. The hold storage means stores information related to the variable display as hold storage information. The production execution means is a specific production.
When the hold information that is the display result indicating that the control is controlled to the advantageous state is stored in the hold storage means, the special display (card for notifying the hold sequence) regarding the advantageous state (big hit game state) can be displayed. Just do it.

(Modification example 4 of feature unit 003SH)
Next, a modification 4 of the feature unit 003SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 003SH, a configuration for displaying one type of card pack at the stage of acquiring the card pack has been described. That is, in the embodiment relating to the feature unit 003SH described above,
The configuration in which the specific display (card pack) regarding the setting suggestion before opening the card does not suggest the setting was explained.

In place of or in addition to such a configuration, in the modification 4 of the feature unit 003SH, a configuration in which a plurality of types of card packs suggesting set values are displayed at the stage of acquiring the card packs. Will be described. That is, a modification 4 of the feature portion 003SH.
Then, the configuration in which the specific display (card pack) before opening the card suggests the setting will be described.

In the fourth modification of the feature unit 003SH, the card pack has a configuration capable of taking a plurality of display modes suggesting set values. For example, the card pack may be displayed in gold, red, blue, or gray. For example, a golden card pack is a card that suggests a high setting value and a denial of the setting values "1" and "2" in the card pack opening effect (ace playing card).
Is a display mode in which is likely to be displayed. In addition, the gray card pack is a display mode in which there is a high possibility that a card (Jack's playing card) suggesting a default will be displayed in the card pack opening effect.

According to the modification 4 of the feature unit 003SH, regarding the suggestion of the set value, the type of the enemy character and
It is possible to present multiple (three) inference factors of the type of card pack and the type of playing card. Therefore, the player can infer a composite set value using a plurality of inference elements. Then, based on this estimation, when it is estimated that the setting value is high, the motivation to continue the game can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped immediately at the end of the consecutive villa (at the end of the time-saving game). Therefore, it is possible to promote the operation of the game machine.

(Modification example 5 of feature unit 003SH)
Next, a modification 5 of the feature unit 003SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 003SH, a configuration for displaying a plurality of types of playing cards in a display mode according to priority has been described. That is, in the embodiment related to the above-mentioned feature unit 003SH, the second
In the setting suggestion effect (card pack opening effect), the configuration in which the display control of the specific display (playing card) according to the priority is performed has been described.

In place of or in addition to such a configuration, in the modified example 5 of the feature unit 003SH, a configuration in which a plurality of types of enemy characters are displayed in a display mode according to priority will be described. That is, in the modified example 5 of the feature unit 003SH, in the first setting suggestion effect, the configuration in which the display control of the enemy character is performed in the display mode according to the priority will be described.

Specifically, in the modification 5 of the feature unit 003SH, priority may be set for each display of the enemy character in the first setting suggestion effect. Similar to the embodiment of the feature unit 003SH, the character D suggests, for example, the high set value and the negation of the set values "1" and "2". Character C suggests, for example, an even set value. Character B suggests, for example, an odd set value. Character A indicates a default (does not suggest a set value).

For example, when the priorities of the four types of enemy characters A to D are expressed using an inequality sign, enemy character D> enemy character C> enemy character B> enemy character A. That is, the priority is
The enemy character A has the highest priority, and the enemy character B, the enemy character C, and the enemy character D have the lowest priority. The display of a plurality of characters is controlled according to the priority. For example, the character D having a higher priority is displayed in a more conspicuous display mode.

According to such a configuration, useful information (suggestion of a high setting value) for the player can be displayed in a conspicuous display mode even in the first setting suggestion effect. In addition, information (default) that is not useful to the player can be displayed in an inconspicuous display mode. Therefore, the setting suggestion can be made more effectively.

(Modification example 6 of feature unit 003SH)
Next, a modification 6 of the feature unit 003SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 003SH, a configuration for displaying an enemy character in a variable display in which a display result indicating a small hit is derived and displayed has been described. That is, in the above-described embodiment of the feature unit 003SH, the configuration in which the first setting suggestion effect is displayed only in one variable display has been described.

In place of or in addition to such a configuration, in the modified example 6 of the feature unit 003SH, the enemy characters are accumulated in the consecutive villas in the variable display in which the display result indicating the small hit is derived and displayed. The configuration to be displayed will be described. That is, in the modification 6 of the feature unit 003SH, a configuration in which the first setting suggestion effect is cumulatively displayed over a plurality of variable displays will be described.

In the modification 6 of the feature unit 003SH, the display result indicating the small hit is derived and displayed in the small hit RUSH state. The icon image showing the enemy character displayed during the variable display (cumulative display).
Should be displayed. This icon image is provided for each type of enemy character and indicates the number of appearances for each enemy character. This icon image is always displayed during the consecutive villas. Further, when an enemy character is displayed in the small hit game, the number of appearances (cumulative display) of the icon image corresponding to the enemy character increases. In addition, this icon image is a card pack opening effect (
It is displayed until the second setting suggestion effect) is completed.

By displaying such an icon image, the player can grasp at a glance which type of enemy character is displayed and how many times. In addition, the player can infer the set value from the displayed icon image before the car pack opening effect is performed. Furthermore, in the card pack opening effect, by displaying a list of playing cards and a list of the number of times the enemy characters are displayed at the same time, the player can guess the combined set value using a plurality of guessing elements. Become. Therefore, it is possible to make a more interesting setting suggestion.

(Modification example 7 of feature unit 003SH)
Next, a modification 7 of the feature unit 003SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 003SH, a configuration in which a card pack is acquired regardless of whether or not a special winning opening has been won in the small hit game state has been described. That is, in the above-described embodiment of the feature unit 003SH, as the specific display of the number corresponding to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the specific state, the specific display of the number corresponding to the number of small hit wins in the high probability / second KT state is used. The configuration to be performed was explained.

In place of or in addition to such a configuration, in the modified example 6 of the feature unit 003SH, a configuration in which a card pack is acquired when a prize is won in the special winning opening will be described. That is, in the modification 7 of the feature unit 003SH, the specific display of the number corresponding to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the specific state is the specific display of the number corresponding to the number of winnings at the time of small hit in the high probability / second KT state. The configuration will be described.

In the modified example 7 of the feature unit 003SH, when there is a prize in the special winning opening during the small hit game in the small hit RUSH state, a card pack is displayed to be obtained, and there is no winning in the special winning opening. In addition, you should prevent you from getting a card pack. Also, to the special winning opening 2
If a ball is won, two card packs may be obtained, and if three balls are won in the special winning opening, three card packs may be obtained.

According to the modification 7 of the feature unit 003SH, the player can obtain two benefits, that is, a prize ball and a card pack, by winning a prize in the special winning opening. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Modification example 8 of feature unit 003SH)
Next, a modification 8 of the feature unit 003SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 003SH, a configuration in which the feature unit 003SH is applied to a so-called small hit RUSH machine that can be controlled to a small hit RUSH state (high probability / second KT state) has been described. Instead of such a configuration, it is also possible to apply the feature unit 003SH to the non-small hit RUSH machine. An example of one specification of a pachinko gaming machine of a non-small hit RUSH machine will be described below.

The non-small hit RUSH machine is not controlled to the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH state), for example, the high probability / high base state (so-called probability variation state) and the low probability / high base state (so-called). It is controlled to either a time saving state) or a low probability / low base state (normal state). In the non-small hit RUSH machine, it may be controlled to a high probability / low base state (so-called latent probability change state).

The probabilistic state is a gaming state controlled after the jackpot game of the probabilistic jackpot. The time saving state is a gaming state controlled after the jackpot game of non-probability variable jackpot (also referred to as "normal jackpot"). The normal state is a gaming state that is controlled after a predetermined number of fluctuations has elapsed in the time saving state. When the configuration is controlled to a high probability / low base state (latent probability variation state), the latent probability variation state is a gaming state controlled after the jackpot game of the latent probability variation jackpot (for example, 2R latent probability variation jackpot).

In the high base state, the game ball is mainly won in the second start winning opening and the game is advanced. Also,
In the low base state, the game ball is mainly won in the first start winning opening and the game is advanced. The non-small hit RUSH machine may be a so-called ST machine or a so-called probabilistic machine. The ST machine is a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability state and executes the variable display of the specified number of times until the variable display of the specified number of times (ST number of times) is executed. The probability change machine is a game machine that is controlled to a high probability state until the next big hit.

When the configuration is controlled to a high probability / low base state (latent probability change state), in the latent probability change state, for example, whether the game is controlled in the high probability state or the low probability state is played. It is possible to control the production mode (latent mode) that is difficult for the person to understand. Thereby, for example, by displaying a character or the like, it is possible to suggest whether the control is performed in a high probability state or a low probability state, and it is possible to improve the interest in the latent probability change state. ..

In the modified example 8 of the feature unit 003SH, in the non-small hit RUSH machine, the control of the probabilistic state is completed based on the fact that the normal big hit is won while the probabilistic state is controlled, that is,
Normally, the length of the control period of the probabilistic state may be different depending on whether or not the jackpot is established.
Further, also in the modification 8 of the feature unit 003SH, a specific effect (card pack opening effect) using a specific display (card pack and playing card) regarding the setting suggestion can be executed.

In the specific effect, it is possible to display a specific display (card pack and playing card) of a number corresponding to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the probabilistic state. The number of times the specific condition is satisfied here is the number of variable display times of the identification information after being controlled to the probabilistic state (for example, the number of variable display times in which the non-reach loss display is derived and displayed). For example, in the modification 8 of the feature unit 003SH, it is possible to perform an effect of acquiring a card pack every time a predetermined number of fluctuations elapses in the probabilistic state. The predetermined number of fluctuations may be, for example, 1 fluctuation, or may be a predetermined number of fluctuations such as 5 fluctuations and 10 fluctuations.

In the modified example 8 of the feature unit 003SH, the establishment of the specific condition is not limited to the variable display number of the identification information after being controlled to the probabilistic state. For example, the establishment of a specific condition is controlled by the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening after being controlled in the probabilistic state, the number of winnings in the general winning opening 10 after being controlled in the probabilistic state, and the probabilistic state. It may be the number of specific effects since then (for example, the number of times of reach loss, the number of appearances of a specific character), the elapsed time after being controlled to a high base state, and the like.

Here, in the non-small hit RUSH machine, if the big hit is not won in the probabilistic state (so-called addiction), the player's ball may decrease, although it is slower than in the normal state. As a result, the interest may be reduced. In particular, if a big hit is usually won after such an addiction, the probabilistic state will end (the consecutive villas will end), which may further reduce the interest.

Therefore, in the modified example 8 of the feature unit 003SH, it is possible to present an estimation element (playing card) of a number of set values corresponding to the degree of addiction as compensation for a decrease in interest due to addiction in the probabilistic state. In addition, in the card pack opening effect, it is possible to present a plurality of estimation elements of set values at one time. As a result, the player can infer the set value using a plurality of inference elements. Then, based on this estimation, when it is estimated that the setting value is high, the motivation to continue the game can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped immediately at the end of the consecutive villa (at the end of the time-saving game). Therefore, it is possible to promote the operation of the game machine.

(Modification example 9 of feature unit 003SH)
Next, a modification 9 of the feature unit 003SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 003SH, a configuration in which the feature unit 003SH is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described. Instead of such a configuration, it is also possible to apply the feature unit 003SH to the slot machine. An example of one specification of the slot machine will be described below.

In the slot machine, for example, a medal is inserted to set a predetermined number of bets, a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the symbols are stopped according to the operation of the stop button by the player. When the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when it is made to
A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a slot machine equipped with one or more of a big bonus, a regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ).

In the feature unit 003SH applied to the slot machine, the state control means has an advantageous state (for example, big bonus, regular bonus, ART, etc.) that is advantageous to the player and a specific state (for example, during ART preparation) that is different from the advantageous state. It can be controlled to (high probability state, etc.). In the feature unit 003SH applied to the slot machine, the control means can be set to any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player. For example, the set value is composed of 6 stages from "1", which is the most difficult to win in the advantageous state, to "6", which is the easiest to win in the advantageous state, as in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the feature unit 003SH applied to the slot machine, the effect control means can execute a specific effect (for example, a card pack opening effect) using a specific display (for example, a card pack or a playing card) regarding the setting suggestion. In the feature unit 003SH applied to the slot machine,
In the state control means, a predetermined condition is satisfied when the state is controlled to a specific state (high probability state or ART).
The control of the specific state is terminated based on the winning of the specific role during the preparation and the digestion of the game a predetermined number of times). In the feature unit 003SH applied to the slot machine, the length of the control period of the specific state differs depending on whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied.

Further, in the feature unit 003SH applied to the slot machine, in the specific effect, a specific display of a number corresponding to the number of establishments in a specific state of a specific condition (for example, the number of games, the number of winnings of a predetermined combination, etc.) different from the predetermined condition (for example) For example, a card pack or a playing card) can be displayed.

According to the modification 9 of the feature unit 003SH, the player feels disappointed when the specific state ends, but the player feels disappointed by suggesting the set value by the specific effect. You can reduce your feelings. In addition, when a high set value is suggested, the player can increase the motivation to continue the game in the subsequent game state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped immediately at the end of the consecutive villa (at the end of the time-saving game). Therefore, according to the slot machine according to the modification 9 of the feature unit 003SH, it is possible to promote the operation of the game machine.

(Explanation of means relating to feature unit 003SH)
In a pachinko gaming machine whose settings can be changed in relation to the above-mentioned feature unit 003SH, the set value is suggested by displaying a character image selected with a selection rate according to the set value when the fluctuation of the identification information is stopped. Pachinko game machines are known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-2).
00902. ). However, simply displaying a character image as an effect suggesting a set value is not sufficient.

Therefore, the gaming machine of the means E1 related to the feature unit 003SH (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game) is
An advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state shown in FIGS. 12-1 (B) and (C)) advantageous to the player and a specific state different from the advantageous state (for example, the high value shown in FIG. 12-1 (A)). probability/
2nd KT state) and a game machine that can be controlled
It can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player (for example, setting values of "1" to "6" shown in FIGS. 12-3 (A) and (B)). Setting means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) and
A specific effect using a specific display related to the setting suggestion (for example, a display for acquiring a card pack shown in FIG. 12-9 (E) or a display in which a playing card shown in FIG. 12-10 (F) appears) (
For example, an effect control means (which can execute the card pack opening effect shown in FIG. 12-10 (F)) (
For example, the effect control CPU120) and
With
The control of the specific state is based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied (winning the normal jackpot shown in FIG. 12-10 (A)) while being controlled to the specific state (for example, high probability / second KT state). Finished
In the specific effect (for example, the card pack opening effect), the small hit game state shown in FIG. 12-9 (C) is set to a specific condition different from the predetermined condition in the specific state (for example, the small hit RUSH state). The specific display (for example, the display for acquiring the card pack shown in FIG. 12-9 (E)) corresponding to the number of times the establishment (for example, the number of small hits won) is established,
The display in which the playing card shown in FIG. 12-10 (F) appears) can be displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to display a number of specific displays corresponding to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the specific state according to the length of the control period of the specific state. Therefore, the longer the control period of a specific state, the more setting suggestions can be made. As a result, it is possible to suggest a setting with a high degree of interest, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, as the game machine of the means E2 related to the feature unit 003SH, in the game machine described in the means E1, the effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) satisfies a predetermined condition and the specific state ends (for example). , As shown in FIG. 12-10 (A), based on the high probability / winning the normal jackpot in the second KT state) (for example, in the ending period in the normal jackpot game shown in FIG. 12-10 (E)). ), Specific effect (for example, Fig. 12-10 (F)
The card pack opening effect) shown in)) can be executed.

According to such a configuration, the player feels disappointing when the specific state ends, but by suggesting the set value, the disappointing feeling that the player has can be alleviated. it can. In addition, when a high set value is suggested, the player can increase the motivation to continue the game in the subsequent game state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped immediately at the end of the consecutive villa (for example, at the end of the time-saving game). As a result, the operation of the technical machine can be promoted.

Further, as the game machine of the means E3 according to the feature unit 003SH, in the game machine according to the means E1 or E2.
The advantageous state (for example, the jackpot state shown in FIGS. 12-1 (B) and (C)), the specific state (for example, the high probability / second KT state shown in FIG. 12-1 (A)), and the advantageous state. The state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 10 shown in FIG. 6) that can be controlled by a state and a special state different from the specific state (for example, the small hit state shown in FIG. 12-1 (A)).
Part where steps S120 to S128 are executed in 0 (specifically, CPU 103))
With more
The specific state (for example, high probability / second KT state) is a state in which the game value is likely to be given by the special state (for example, a small hit state).
The display number of the specific display (total acquisition number display 003SH151 shown in FIG. 12-9 (F)) is
It increases according to the number of times the special state is controlled in the specific state.

According to such a configuration, the longer the control period of the specific state is, the more the number of specific displays corresponding to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the specific state can be increased. Therefore, it can be suggested that the longer the control period of the specific state, the more the game value can be given to the player by the special state, and the more setting suggestions can be made. Therefore, the interest of the specific state and the special state can be further improved.

Further, as a game machine of the means E4 according to the feature unit 003SH, in the game machine described in the means E3.
Satisfaction rate of the specific condition (for example, small hit winning probability shown in FIGS. 12-3 (A) and (B))
Is a common ratio (for example, 1/2 ratio) regardless of the set value.

According to such a configuration, in a specific state (for example, high probability / second KT state), a game value is likely to be given by a special state (for example, a small hit state), but a ratio of establishment of a specific condition (for example, a small hit). By setting the winning probability) to a common ratio regardless of the set value, it is possible to prevent the player's degree of advantage from being excessively increased in a specific state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the gambling from becoming too high and realize a sound game.

Further, as the game machine of the means E5 according to the feature unit 003SH, in the game machine according to the means E3 or E4,
The effect control means has a first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the suggestion of the set value in response to the control of the special state (for example, an effect of displaying the enemy character image 003SH130 shown in FIG. 12-9 (B)). And a second setting suggestion effect as the specific effect (for example, FIG. 12-10 (F).
The card pack opening effect) that displays the playing cards 003SH171 to 174 shown in)) can be executed.
The accuracy of suggesting the set value differs between the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect (for example, the playing card determined in the card pack opening effect determination table shown in FIG. 12-7). However, the accuracy (setting reliability) is higher than that of the enemy character determined by the enemy character determination table of FIG. 12-5).

According to such a configuration, the set value can be suggested with different accuracy between the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect. Therefore, the player can infer a composite set value using a plurality of inference elements, and can increase the degree of attention to both effects. Further, by this estimation, when it is estimated that the setting value is high, the motivation to continue the game can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped immediately at the end of the consecutive villa (at the end of the time-saving game). Therefore, it is possible to promote the operation of the game machine.

Further, as the game machine of the means E6 related to the feature unit 003SH, in the game machine according to the means E5,
The first setting suggestion effect (for example, the enemy character image 003S shown in FIG. 12-9 (B)).
The execution timing is different between the effect of displaying H130 and the effect of suggesting the second setting (for example, the effect of opening the card pack displaying the playing cards 003SH171 to 174 shown in FIG. 12-10 (F)) (for example, the effect of displaying H130). Enemy character image 003S shown in FIG. 12-9 (B)
The effect of displaying the H130 is executed during the variable display. The card pack opening effect of displaying the playing cards 003SH171 to 174 shown in FIG. 12-10 (F) is executed during the jackpot game. ).

According to such a configuration, the setting value can be suggested at different execution timings, so that the interest of the game can be improved at each timing. Further, since the control related to the suggestion of the set value can be distributed, the control load related to the suggestion of the set value can be suppressed.

Further, as the game machine of the means E7 related to the feature unit 003SH, in the game machine according to any one of the means E1 to E6.
As the specific display, a plurality of types of specific display having different types of setting suggestions (for example, FIG. 12-).
There is a playing card 003SH171-174) shown in 10 (F),
Each of the plurality of types of specific display has a priority (for example, the priority shown in FIGS. 12-11).
Is set,
In the specific effect, display control of the specific display is performed according to the priority (for example,
As shown in FIGS. 12-10 (F) and 12-11, Ace playing cards suggesting high setting values are displayed in a large display area, and King playing cards suggesting even setting values are larger than Ace. Queen's playing cards, which are displayed in a small display area and suggest odd settings, are displayed in a smaller display area than King, and Jack's playing cards, which indicate default, are displayed in a smaller display area than Queen. ).

According to such a configuration, information useful to the player (suggestion of a high setting value) can be displayed in a conspicuous display mode, and information that is not useful to the player (default) can be displayed in a conspicuous display mode. Can be displayed with. Therefore, the setting suggestion can be made more effectively. In addition, when it is estimated that the value is high, the motivation to continue the game can be improved.

(Explanation of Feature 007SH and Feature 008SH)
Next, the gaming machine related to the feature unit 007SH and the feature unit 008SH will be described. Since the feature unit 007SH and the feature unit 008SH can have the same configuration, the feature unit 007SH will be described below unless otherwise specified.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 007SH is a gaming machine capable of playing a game. In this embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game will be described as an example. Further, unless otherwise specified, the basic specifications and state transitions of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 007SH are the same as those shown in the feature unit 020SH (see FIG. 11-1).

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 007SH includes a variable display executing means, a state controlling means, a setting means, and an effect executing means. The game state control means, the variable display execution means, the pre-start determination means, the hold storage means, and the setting means are realized by, for example, the CPU 103 of the main board 11. The effect execution means is realized by, for example, the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12.

The variable display execution means variably displays the identification information, and derives and displays the variable display result. The identification information includes, for example, a first special symbol, a second special symbol, decorative identification information (decorative symbol), a small symbol, and the like. The variable display executing means starts the variable display of the identification information when the start condition is satisfied, and stops the variable display of the identification information when a predetermined fluctuation time elapses.

The state control means controls the advantageous state based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result. The specific display result is, for example, a jackpot symbol. The advantageous state is, for example,
It is a big hit game state. Further, the state control means controls the special state based on the fact that a special display result different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result. The special display result is, for example, a small hit symbol. The special state is, for example, a small hit game state.

The state control means can be set to any one of a plurality of set values including the first set value and the second set value, which have different advantages for the player. There are six types of setting values, for example, setting values "1" to "6". The jackpot winning probability varies depending on the set value. Specifically, the probability of winning a big hit is highest for "6" and decreases in the order of "5", "4", "3", "2", and "1" as the value decreases. That is, when the set value "6" is set, the advantage is highest for the player, and "5", "4", "3", "2", "2", "
As the value decreases in the order of "1", the advantage for the player gradually decreases.

The first set value is a set value other than "6", for example, "1". The second set value is "1
It is a setting value other than "6", for example. The set value is changed by the clerk operating the setting change button provided inside the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The effect execution means executes the effect. The effect executing means is an image display device 5 or a speaker 8L.
The 8R controls various LEDs and the like to execute the effect.

The variable display executing means can derive and display a specific display result and a predetermined display result different from the special display result as the variable display result. The predetermined display result is, for example, a lost symbol.
Here, the number of special determination values for determining the variable display result as the special display result is the same regardless of the set value. The number of special judgment values is a number indicating a small hit judgment value among random numbers for hit judgment. The small hit judgment value differs depending on the type of starting winning opening. In the feature unit 007SH, the number of special judgment values due to winning in the second start winning opening is, for example, the number indicating the small hit judgment value (for example, "62400") among the number of random numbers for hit judgment (for example, "65536"). ). Therefore, in the feature unit 007SH, the small hit probability due to winning the second starting winning opening is "1 /.
1.05 ”(=“ 62400/65536 ”). The small hit determination value is common regardless of the set value and is a common value regardless of the gaming state.

Further, the number of predetermined determination values for determining the variable display result as the predetermined display result is larger in the first set value than in the second set value. In the feature unit 007SH, the number of predetermined determination values is, for example, a number indicating a loss determination value among the number of hit determination random numbers (for example, "65536"). For example, as for the loss determination value, a larger number is assigned as the set value is lower, and a smaller number is assigned as the set value is higher. Therefore, the loss probability is higher as the set value is lower and lower as the set value is higher. The loss determination value differs depending on the set value, the type of starting winning opening, and the game state. In addition, the jackpot determination value also differs depending on the set value, the type of starting winning opening, and the game state, as in the case of the loss determination value.

The state control means controls the first specific state, which is a state in which variable display can be executed. The first specific state is, for example, a high probability / first KT state (high probability / high base state) or a low probability / first K.
It is a T state (low probability / high base state). In addition, the first specific state is a low probability / non-KT state (
Normal state) is included.

Further, the state control means can control the second specific state. The second specific state is a state in which the variable display can be executed, and the game value is more likely to be given by the special state than in the first specific state. Specifically, the second specific state is, for example, a high probability / second KT state (high probability / low base state). In the high probability / second KT state, the second is mainly due to winning the second starting port.
The display result of the small hit is derived and displayed by the variable display of the special symbol, and the game proceeds. Therefore, in the high probability / second KT state, the small hit game state is frequently controlled, and an increase in the number of balls obtained can be expected. The high probability / second KT state may be referred to as a "small hit RUSH state".

Here, even in the high probability / second KT state, a display result indicating a loss may be derived and displayed. As described above, the loss probability tends to be higher as the set value is lower and lower as the set value is higher. In particular, in the high probability / second KT state, such a tendency becomes remarkable.
Therefore, if the player counts the number of losses in the high probability / second KT state, the set value can be estimated. For this reason, there is a risk that the setting suggestion effect provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be less interesting.

Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 007SH has a configuration in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the loss in the second specific state. The configuration of the feature unit 007SH, which makes it difficult to recognize the loss, will be described in detail below.

In the first specific state, the effect executing means displays the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information during the variable display, and erases the corresponding display before the end of the variable display. The corresponding display is, for example, an active display. Before the end of the variable display includes the timing (variation stop timing) in which the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. For example, when the effect executing means receives the symbol determination designation command transmitted from the main board 11, the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, and the corresponding display is deleted. Therefore, in the first specific state, the player can easily recognize that the variable display has ended or that the variable display display result has been derived and displayed by visually observing the corresponding display. There is.

On the other hand, the effect executing means hides the corresponding display in the second specific state. In addition, the effect executing means can execute a special effect corresponding to the control of the special state in the second specific state. The special effect is an effect of notifying a small hit and an open effect of the special variable winning ball device 17 in the small hit game state. In particular, in the second specific state, the fluctuation time of the variable display is short, and in most of the variable displays, a display result indicating a small hit is derived and displayed.

In this way, in the second specific state, by hiding the corresponding display, the player cannot easily recognize that the end of the variable display or the display result of the variable display has been derived and displayed. It has become. Further, in the second specific state, by executing the special effect, the effect in the second specific state, which can be expected to increase the number of balls to be acquired, can be made lively.

In addition, the effect executing means can display the hold display in the first specific state, and also executes the move display of the hold display in response to the start of the identification information. The hold display includes a hold icon corresponding to the hold information to be stored and a hold number display indicating the number of holds to be stored. The move display of the hold display is a so-called hold shift display. The hold shift display is, for example, a display in which one or more hold displays displayed in order in the digestion order are moved to a position indicating the previous order when the hold memory is digested. Therefore, in the first specific state, the player can easily recognize that the end of the variable display, the start of the next variable display, and the display result of the variable display are derived and displayed by visually recognizing the corresponding display. You can do it.

Further, the effect executing means can hide the hold display and execute a special effect in the second specific state. In addition, since the effect execution means hides the hold display in the second specific state, the movement display of the hold display is also hidden.

In this way, in the second specific state, by hiding the hold display, the player can end the variable display, start the next variable display, and derive and display the display result of the variable display. It cannot be easily recognized. Further, in the second specific state, by executing the special effect, the effect in the second specific state, which can be expected to increase the number of balls to be acquired, can be made lively.

(About the setting suggestion effect related to the feature part 007SH)
In the feature unit 007SH, the effect executing means can execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value set in the setting means. The setting suggestion effect is an effect that suggests a set value depending on, for example, the type of character to be displayed, the type of background image, the type of sound to be output, the lighting mode of the lamp to be lit, and the like. Further, the timing of performing the setting suggestion effect may be any timing such as during the execution of the variable display, the execution of the big hit game, or the execution of the small hit game. Further, the setting suggestion effect may be executed regardless of the gaming state. In the feature unit 007SH, as the setting suggestion effect, for example, various setting suggestion effects shown in FIGS. 9-5, 10-54, 12-10 and the like can be applied.

(About the special display related to the feature section 007SH)
In the feature unit 007SH, the effect executing means can execute the special display corresponding to the advantageous state when it is controlled to the advantageous state. The special display is, for example, a unique display in the jackpot game state. Specifically, the special display includes a unique character, a background image, a total number of prize balls, a right-handed notification, and the like, which are displayed in the jackpot game state.

Further, in the feature unit 007SH, at least a part is common between the effect mode in the advantageous state and the effect mode in the second specific state. In the feature unit 007SH, for example, a special display (for example, a background image) in an advantageous state is displayed also in the second specific state. However, the effect mode common to the advantageous state and the second specific state is not limited to the background image. For example, voice (BGM
), Display of a specific character, display of the total number of prize balls, display of right-handed notification, and the like.

(Regarding the number of variable displays related to the feature section 007SH)
In the feature unit 007SH, the effect executing means enables the variable display number display to be displayed in the first specific state, while hides the variable display number display in the second specific state. The variable display number display is, for example, the same as the number display displayed on the so-called data lamp installed on the upper part of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the pachinko hall.

Specifically, the variable display number display is the number of times the variable display has been executed since the end of the previous jackpot game. Therefore, the number-of-times display of the variable display is reset every time the jackpot game state is controlled. In addition, for example, in the case of a big hit with a small number of balls acquired and no change in the game state, such as a 2R normal big hit in the low probability / first KT state, that is, it is not necessary to positively notify that the big hit is a big hit. In the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to reset the variable display number display. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unfortunate that he could not get one ball even though he won the big hit.

(About variable display of decorative identification information related to feature section 007SH)
In the feature unit 007SH, in the first specific state, the effect executing means variably displays the decorative identification information (for example, the decorative symbol) corresponding to the variable display of the identification information, and at least whether or not the specific display result is derived. Is notified by deriving and displaying the variable display result of the decoration identification information. Whether or not the specific display result is derived is, specifically, whether it is a big hit or a loss. Therefore, in the first specific state, the end of the variable display, the start of the next variable display, and the display result of the variable display can be easily recognized.

On the other hand, the effect executing means can hide the decoration identification information and execute the special effect in the second specific state. As described above, in the second specific state, by hiding the decoration identification information, the player cannot easily recognize the end of the variable display and the display result of the variable display. In addition, in the second specific state, by executing a special effect,
It is possible to improve the interest of the game by making the production in the second specific state where the increase in the number of balls obtained can be expected lively.

(About the jackpot probability, small hit probability, and loss probability of the first special symbol)
FIG. 13-1 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the jackpot probability, the small hit probability, and the loss probability of the first special symbol in the feature unit 007SH. FIG. 13-1 (A) shows the big hit probability, the small hit probability, and the loss probability according to the set value in the low probability state for the first special symbol. FIG. 13-1 (B) shows the big hit probability, the small hit probability, and the loss probability according to the set value in the high probability state for the first special symbol. The probabilities shown in FIGS. 13-1 (A) and 13-1 (B) are the same as the probabilities shown in FIGS. 10-3 (A) and (B), but differ in that the denominator is represented as "1".

(About jackpot probability)
In FIGS. 13-1 (A) and 13-1 (B), the jackpot probability increases as the set value increases. As shown in FIG. 13-1 (A), in the low probability state, the jackpot probability is "1/320" when the set value is "1", and increases as the set value increases, and the set value increases. When is "6", it is "1/264". Further, as shown in FIG. 13-1 (B), in the high probability state, the jackpot probability is about 10 times higher than in the low probability state. Specifically, when the set value is "1", it is "1/32", and it becomes higher as the set value becomes higher, and when the set value is "6", it becomes "1/26". ..

(About small hit probability)
As shown in FIGS. 13-1 (A) and 13-1 (B), the small hit probability is a constant probability "1 / 10.4" regardless of the gaming state or the set value. From this small hit probability, in the variable display of the first special symbol, the display result indicating the small hit is derived and displayed with a probability of once every 10 or 11 times. However, when the display result indicating a small hit is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol is changed to the same variable display as in the case of loss, and the variable display is changed.
As for the display result, the display result indicating the loss is derived and displayed. Further, in the small hit game state based on the variable display of the first special symbol, since it is almost impossible to expect a prize in the special variable winning opening, the effect of notifying the small hit game state is not performed.

(About loss probability)
In FIGS. 13-1 (A) and 13-1 (B), the loss probability increases as the set value decreases. However, in both the low probability state and the high probability state, the loss probability is much higher than the big hit probability and the small hit probability. Specifically, the loss probability is 200 compared to the jackpot probability.
It is more than twice as high, and about 10 times higher than the small hit probability. Therefore, the loss probability is almost constant regardless of the set value. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-1 (A), the loss probability in the low probability state is about "1 / 1.11" at any set value. Also,
As shown in FIG. 13-1 (B), the set value of the loss probability is "1" even in the high probability state.
When ~ "5", it is about "1 / 1.15", and when the set value is "6", it is about "1 / 1.16".
", And there is almost no change.

(About the jackpot probability, small hit probability, and loss probability of the second special symbol)
FIG. 13-2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the jackpot probability, the small hit probability, and the loss probability of the second special symbol in the feature unit 007SH. FIG. 13-2 (A) shows the big hit probability, the small hit probability, and the loss probability according to the set value in the low probability state for the second special symbol. FIG. 13-2 (B) shows the big hit probability, the small hit probability, and the loss probability according to the set value in the high probability state for the second special symbol. Each probability shown in FIGS. 13-2 (A) and 13-2 (B) mainly has a small hit probability of "1 / 1.0" as compared with the probability shown in FIGS. 12-3 (A) and (B).
It differs in that it is set to "5".

(About jackpot probability)
In FIGS. 13-2 (A) and 13-2 (B), the jackpot probability is the same as the jackpot probability shown in FIGS. 13-1 (A) and 13-1 (B).

(About small hit probability)
As shown in FIGS. 13-2 (A) and 13-2 (B), the small hit probability has a constant probability of "1 / 1.05" regardless of the set value or the gaming state, for example, from the viewpoint of suppressing gambling. is there. In addition, it should be noted
Based on this small hit probability, even in the high probability / first KT state and the low probability / first KT state, the display result indicating the small hit is frequently derived and displayed. However, when the display result indicating a small hit is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol in the first KT state,
The variable display of the decorative pattern is changed to the same variable display as in the case of loss, and the display result indicating the loss is derived and displayed. Further, in the small hit game state based on the variable display of the second special symbol in the first KT state, it is almost impossible to expect a prize in the special variable winning opening, so that the effect of notifying the small hit game state is performed. Absent.

(About loss probability)
In FIGS. 13-2 (A) and 13-2 (B), the loss probability increases as the set value decreases. In the low probability state, the loss probability is much higher (about 10 times higher) than the jackpot probability. Therefore, the loss probability is almost constant regardless of the set value. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-1 (A), the loss probability in the low probability state is about "1/22" or "1/23" depending on the set value, and there is not much difference. ..

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13-1 (B), the loss probability in the high probability state greatly differs depending on the set value. This is because in the high probability state, the difference between the jackpot probability and the loss probability is 2
This is because it is about 4 times larger and not so large. Specifically, the loss probability is, for example, "1/60" when the set value is "1", decreases as the set value increases, and "1 /" when the set value is "6". It is "100". Therefore, high probability / 2nd K
In the variable display of the second special symbol in the T state, when the set value is "1", the set value is "6".
Compared to the case of "", the possibility that the display result of the loss is derived and displayed is 1.5 times or more higher.

As described above, the appearance rate of loss is higher in the high probability state than in the low probability state. Therefore, in the case of the high probability state, the player counts the number of occurrences of the loss as compared with the case of the low probability state, so that the set value can be easily estimated. Specifically, for example, if a player plays a game for a long time, it may be controlled to a high probability / second KT state many times. In this case, the player can estimate the set value by counting the number of losses in the high probability / second KT state each time the player is controlled in the high probability / second KT state.

Here, in the setting suggestion effect, the set value is suggested to the player. However, in the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to suggest that the high setting value is set even when the low setting value is actually set. Therefore, in the setting suggestion effect, the interest of the game can be improved by intentionally letting the player guess the set value.

On the other hand, if the player counts the number of losses (appearance rate) in the high probability / second KT state, the set value can be estimated with higher accuracy than the set value suggestion effect. Especially,
If it is presumed that a low setting value is set, it may lead to a decrease in the player's willingness to continue playing. In addition, if it is presumed that a high set value is set and the game is played only on the game table with the high set value, a disadvantage may occur for the game store.

Therefore, in the feature unit 007SH, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the display result of the loss is derived and displayed in the high probability / second KT state.

Although not shown, in the feature unit 007SH, the type of small hit is, for example, one type of small hit similar to that of small hit C (see FIG. 10-14). As described above, the small hit C is a small hit in which the special winning opening is opened for 1.8 seconds during the small hit game, and the game ball can be expected to win the special winning opening during the small hit game. In addition, in the feature unit 007SH, high probability / second K
The fluctuation time of the variable display in the T state is 5 seconds in both the case of winning a small hit and the case of non-reach loss. That is, the second fluctuation pattern # shown in FIG. 10-9 (H).
23, # 26 and the second fluctuation patterns # 29, # 30 shown in FIG. 10-9 (I) are not used.

(Example of command analysis processing related to feature unit 007SH)
Next, an example of the display control process when the background designation command is received will be described with reference to FIG. 13-3. FIG. 13-3 is performed by the effect control CPU 120 related to the feature unit 007SH.
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the display control processing when the background specification command is received. The display control process shown in FIG. 13-3 is a process executed by the command analysis process (S75) shown in FIG. 7.

In FIG. 12-3, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the background designation command transmitted from the main board 1 is received (step 007SHS101). When the background specification command has not been received (step 007SHS101: NO), the effect control CPU1
20 ends a series of processes. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the background designation command (step 007SHS101: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received background designation command is the "high accuracy / second KT background designation command" (step). 007SHS
102).

When the received background specification command is not the "high accuracy / second KT background specification command" (step 007SHS102: NO), the effect control CPU 120 has the received background specification command as the "low accuracy / non-KT background specification command". Determine if or not (step 007SHS
103). When the received background specification command is "low accuracy / non-KT background specification command" (
Step 007SHS103: YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background of the normal mode (background in the normal state) (step 007SHS104), and steps 007SHS.
Move to 108. When the background of the normal mode is set, both the active display and the hold display will be displayed. Therefore, the hold shift display can also be executed.

When the received background specification command is not the "low accuracy / non-KT background specification command" (step 007SHS103: NO), the effect control CPU 120 has the received background specification command as the "high accuracy / first KT background specification command". Determine if or not (step 007SHS
105). When the received background specification command is not the "high accuracy / first KT background specification command" (step 007SHS105: NO), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background in the time saving mode (low probability / background in the first KT state) (step 007SHS105: NO). Step 007SHS106) and step 007SHS108. When the background of the time saving mode is set, both the active display and the hold display will be displayed. Therefore, the hold shift display can also be executed.

When the received background specification command is the "high probability / first KT background specification command" (step 007SHS105: YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background of the probability change mode (high probability / background in the first KT state). (Step 007SHS107). When the background of the probabilistic mode is set, both the active display and the hold display will be displayed. Therefore, the hold shift display can also be executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 displays and sets the decorative pattern (step 007SHS).
108). Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the display of the variable display number display indicating the variable display number since the end of the previous jackpot game (step 007SHS109). Then, the effect control CPU 120 displays and sets a small symbol (step 007SHS110), and ends a series of processes.

In step 007SHS102, the received background specification command is "high accuracy / second KT".
When it is a "background designation command" (step 007SHS102: YES), C for effect control
The PU 120 is a production control CPU 120, and the background of the small hit RUSH mode (high probability / second).
The background in the T state) is set (step 007SHS111). When the background of the small hit RUSH mode is set, both the active display and the hold display are hidden. Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the decorative symbol to be hidden (step 007SHS112).
). Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variable display count display to be hidden (step 00).
7SHS113), a series of processes is completed.

By the above-mentioned processing, the decorative pattern, the variable number of times, the active display, according to the game state,
It is possible to set the presence or absence of each of the hold display. In addition, a background image can be set according to the game state. For example, in the small hit RUSH mode, the decorative pattern,
Variable display count, active display, and hold display can be hidden. On the other hand, in other modes (non-small hit RUSH mode), all of these can be displayed.

Although the above-mentioned display control process has been described as being performed in the command analysis process, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the above-mentioned display control process can also be performed by a process executed in the special figure hit wait process of S173. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the jackpot type and the game state after the jackpot game by using the jackpot start designation command transmitted from the main board 1 in the special figure hit waiting process. Then, the effect control CPU 120 can set the background image after the end of the big hit to the background image according to the specified gaming state.

(About the background image in the small hit RUSH mode)
Next, using FIG. 13-4, the background image in the non-small hit RUSH mode and the small hit RUSH
The background image in the mode will be described. FIG. 13-4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a background image in the probability variation mode and a background image in the small hit RUSH mode. In FIG. 13-4, as the background image in the non-small hit RUSH mode, the background image in the probability variation mode will be described as an example.

FIG. 13-4 (A) shows a background image in the probability variation mode. FIG. 13-4 (A) shows a daytime landscape image showing the probability variation mode. In addition, the background image in the probabilistic mode is displayed as active 00.
7SH110 and hold display 007SH111 are included. Further, the background image in the probability variation mode also includes a first reserved number display 007SH131 indicating the first reserved number of stored numbers and a second reserved number display 007SH132 indicating the second reserved number of stored numbers.

FIG. 13-4 (B) shows a background image in the small hit RUSH mode. FIG. 13-4 (B) shows a night view image showing the small hit RUSH mode. In addition, the background image in the small hit RUSH mode includes the first reserved number display 007SH131 and the second reserved number display 007SH132.
Is included. In addition, the background image in the small hit RUSH mode has an active display of 007SH.
110 and hold display 007SH111 are not included.

The decorative symbol, the variable number of times of display, and the small hit symbol are superimposed and displayed on the background images shown in FIGS. Specifically, by setting the background image to a lower layer and setting the decorative symbol, variable display count, and small hit symbol to the upper layer, the decorative symbol and variable display count can be set compared to the background image. , It is possible to display the small hit symbol in the foreground. In addition, it should be noted
For example, the small symbol is set at the top of the layer, and the visibility is not deteriorated.

The images shown in FIGS. 13-4 (A) and 13-4 (B) are set on different layers. For example, a landscape image is set as a lower layer, and other images (active display 007SH110, hold display 007SH111, first hold number display 007SH131, and second hold number display 0) are set.
07SH132) is set to a layer higher than the landscape image. As a result, it is possible to display another image in front of the landscape image, and the visibility of the other image is not deteriorated.

In FIG. 13-4, the probability variation mode has been described as an example of the effect mode in the non-small hit RUSH mode, but the same image control can be applied to the normal mode and the time saving mode. Specifically, in the normal mode and the time saving mode, although the landscape image is different from that in the probability variation mode, the active display 007SH110, the hold display 007SH111, the first hold number display 007SH131, and the second hold number display 007SH132 Is displayed.

(About screen transition in non-small hit RUSH mode)
Next, an example of the screen transition in the non-small hit RUSH mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-5 and 13-6. In addition, in FIG. 13-5 and FIG. 13-6, the probability variation mode will be described as an example of the non-small hit RUSH mode.

13-5 and 13-6 are explanatory views showing an example of subsequent screen transitions after being controlled to the 6R probability variation jackpot gaming state. In addition, in FIGS. 13-5 and 13-6, the display result indicating the 6R probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed in the variable display in the normal state, and the screen transition during the jackpot game of the jackpot (so-called first hit) and after the jackpot game. Will be described.

FIG. 13-5 (A) shows an effect screen in a round game in a 6R probability variation jackpot game state. As shown in FIG. 13-5 (A), the image display device 5 has a jackpot type suggestion symbol 007SH.
200 (and small symbol 007SH101) is displayed as an odd number symbol other than "7" (symbol of "3" in the figure), suggesting that the 6R probability variation jackpot was won. In addition, FIG.
In −5 (A), the background image of the “mountain” indicating the 6R probability variation jackpot and the character A are displayed.

Further, in FIG. 13-5 (A), the total number of prize balls is displayed 007S on the upper part of the image display device 5.
H120 is displayed. The total number of prize balls displayed 007SH120 indicates the total number of prize balls paid out from the start of the big hit to the present (5 rounds in the figure). In addition, the image display device 5
In the upper right corner of, right-handed notification 007SH that prompts the player to launch the game ball toward the game area on the right side.
105 is displayed. As a result, during the big hit game, the player can be urged to hit right, and the game ball can be won in the big winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 arranged on the right side of the game area of the game board 2. In the 6R probability variation jackpot, when the final round is completed, Fig. 13-5 (B)
) Is displayed.

FIG. 13-5 (B) shows an effect screen of the ending effect in the 6R probability variation jackpot ending period. As shown in (B), the ending effect indicates, for example, that the control of the high probability / first KT state is started, that is, the probability variation mode is started. Further, also in FIG. 13-5 (B), the total number of prize balls is displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5 007SH1.
20 and the jackpot type suggestion symbol 007SH200 are continuously displayed. When the ending effect is finished (when the period controlled to the jackpot game state is finished), FIG. 13-5 (C)
Transition to the screen shown in.

FIG. 13-5 (C) shows the first variable display controlled to the high probability / first KT state. In the high probability / first KT state, the effect mode is controlled to the probability variation mode. The background image in the probabilistic mode (the background image of the "mountain") is different from the background image during the jackpot game (the background image).
For example, a daytime background image). Further, in FIG. 13-5 (C), the total number of prize balls is displayed in 007SH.
120 is not displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-5 (C), the image display device 5 has a decorative pattern 007SH10.
A variable display (scroll) of 0 is displayed. The decorative symbol 007SH100 includes three symbols, a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol. Further, at the lower left of the image display device 5, a small symbol 007SH101 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol 007SH100 is variably displayed (scrolled).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 also variably displays the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is composed of, for example, an LED, but may be displayed on the image display device 5. The fourth symbol is the first
It is provided corresponding to the special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. The fourth symbol starts blinking when the effect control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern designation command at the start of variation, and ends blinking when the symbol confirmation designation command is received. When the fourth symbol is blinking, the small symbol 007SH101 is also variably displayed, and when the fourth symbol is not blinking, the small symbol 007SH101 is not variably displayed either. That is, the fourth symbol and the small symbol 007.
The same operation as that of SH101 is performed. However, the small symbol 007SH101 is different from the fourth symbol in that the display result is derived and displayed.

Further, in the lower center of the image display device 5, the active display 007SH corresponding to the variable display
110 is displayed. Further, next to the active display 007SH110, a hold display 007SH111 indicating the second hold storage is displayed. Further, in the upper right of the image display device 5, a right-handed hit notification 007SH105 is displayed, which urges the game ball to be launched toward the right game area. As a result, in the high probability / first KT state, the player is urged to hit right, and the game board 2
The game ball can be put into the passing gate 41 arranged on the right side of the game area and the second start winning opening in the variable winning ball device 6B.

In the high probability / first KT state, the game progresses mainly by winning a prize in the second start winning opening, and is frequently controlled to the small hit game state. However, in the high probability / first KT state, the game ball rarely wins the special variable winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 17 during the small hit game. Therefore, in the high probability / first KT state, in the variable display in which the display result indicating the small hit is derived and displayed, the decorative symbol 007SH100 indicating the loss and the small symbol 007SH101 indicating the loss are derived and displayed to display the variable display of the loss. I try to make it look like.

Further, in FIG. 13-5 (C), on the right side of the image display device 5, the first reserved number display 007SH131 indicating the first reserved storage number and the second reserved number indicating the second reserved storage number are displayed. Display 007SH132 is displayed. Further, a variable display number display 007SH140 is displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. The variable display number display 007SH140 indicates the number of times the variable display has been executed since the end of the previous jackpot game. FIG. 13-5 (C)
In, for example, when the reach effect is started, the screen transitions to the screen shown in FIG. 13-5 (D).

FIG. 13-5 (D) shows an effect screen during the reach effect. In FIG. 13-5 (D), the decorative symbol 007SH100 shows a reach mode. Specifically, the decorative pattern 007SH100
Indicates a variable display in which the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped (swaying state).
It also shows a variable display with the middle symbol scrolled. On the other hand, small design 007SH101
Indicates a state in which all three symbols constituting the small symbol 007SH101 are scrolled, not in the reach mode. In FIG. 13-5 (D), when the symbol stop timing is reached, the screen transitions to the screen shown in FIG. 13-6 (E).

In FIG. 13-6 (E), the decorative symbol 007SH100 is derived and displayed as the display result of the reach loss. Further, in FIG. 13-6 (E), the display result of the reach loss is similarly derived and displayed for the small symbol 007SH101. As shown in FIG. 13-6 (E), in the probability variation mode, the decorative symbol 007SH100 and the small symbol 007SH101 notify the loss. In FIG. 13-6 (E), when the symbol confirmation time elapses, FIG. 1
The screen transitions to the screen shown in 3-6 (F).

FIG. 13-6 (F) shows a variable display at the start of the second variation after being controlled to the high probability / first KT state. As shown in FIG. 13-6 (F), the decorative symbol 007SH100 starts the variable display, and the active display 007SH1 displayed in FIG. 13-6 (E).
10 is erased, and the hold display 007SH111 shifts (hold shift display). The hold shift display is, for example, a display in which the three hold displays displayed in FIG. 13-6 (E) are moved to the left by one each. Further, among the hold display 007SH111, the hold display displayed on the leftmost side moves to the position of the active display 007SH110 and is displayed as the active display 007SH110.

Further, in FIG. 13-6 (F), the second reserved number display 007SH132 shows a value “2” obtained by subtracting “1” from that of (E). In FIG. 13-6 (F), when the symbol stop timing is reached (1 second has elapsed from the start of fluctuation), the screen transitions to the screen shown in FIG. 13-6 (G).

In FIG. 13-6 (G), the decorative symbol 007SH100 is derived and displayed as a non-reach loss display result. Further, in FIG. 13-6 (G), the display result of the non-reach loss is similarly derived and displayed for the small symbol 007SH101. In FIG. 13-6 (G), when the symbol confirmation time elapses, the screen transitions to the screen shown in FIG. 13-6 (H).

FIG. 13-6 (H) shows a variable display at the start of the third variation after being controlled to the high probability / first KT state. As shown in FIG. 13-6 (H), the decorative symbol 007SH100 starts the variable display, and the active display 007SH1 displayed in FIG. 13-6 (G).
10 is erased, and the hold display 007SH111 shifts (hold shift display).

As shown in FIGS. 13-5 and 13-6, in the feature unit 007SH, the active display 007SH110 is displayed in the probability variation mode, and the active display 007SH110 is erased at the stop timing of the symbol. As a result, in the probabilistic mode, it is possible to perform an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of the variable display using the active display 007SH110, and it is possible to improve the interest.

As shown in FIGS. 13-5 and 13-6, in the feature unit 007SH, the hold display 007SH111 is displayed in the probability variation mode, and the hold shift display is performed at the start timing of the symbol. As a result, in the probability change mode, the look-ahead effect can be performed using the hold display 007SH111, and the interest can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-5 and 13-6, in the feature unit 007SH, the background image (background image of the "mountain") in the jackpot game state in the 6R probability variation jackpot and the probability variation of the jackpot game in the 6R probability variation jackpot The background image of the mode (the background image of the day) was used as a different background image.
As a result, the jackpot game state where the acquisition of balls can be expected and the high probability that variable display is performed / 1st
The KT state can be clearly distinguished, and the player can enjoy the game according to the controlled state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-5 and 13-6, the feature unit 007SH displays the variable display number display 007SH140 in the probability variation mode. As a result, the player can be made to recognize the variable display number of times executed in the probability variation mode. Therefore, it is possible to arouse the player's desire to win the jackpot quickly, and therefore.
It is possible to improve the player's willingness to play.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-5 and 13-6, in the feature unit 007SH, in the probability variation mode, the decorative symbol 007SH100 is used to derive and display the display result of the variable display. As a result, in the probabilistic mode, the reach effect and the like can be performed using the decorative pattern 007SH100, so that the interest can be improved.

In addition, in FIGS. 13-5 and 13-6, the probability variation mode is described as an example as the effect mode in the non-small hit RUSH mode, but the same image control can be performed in the normal mode and the time saving mode. Is. Specifically, in the normal mode and the time saving mode, the background image is different from that in the probabilistic mode, but the active display 007S is the same as in the probabilistic mode.
H110, hold display 007SH111, first hold number display 007SH131, and second
Hold number display 007SH132 and hold shift display are displayed.

For example, to supplement the 6R normal jackpot as an example, in the case of the 6R normal jackpot, the total prize ball number display 007SH120 and the right-handed notification 007SH105 are displayed during the jackpot game. Further, after the big hit game of 6R normal big hit, it is controlled to the low probability / first KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the time saving mode. Further, in the 6R normal jackpot jackpot game state, for example, a background image of the "sea" is displayed, and in the time saving mode, a background image of, for example, an evening is displayed as a background image different from the background image of the "sea". The display mode of the active display 007SH110, the hold display 007SH111, and the hold shift display depends on each effect mode.
It may have a different display mode.

(About screen transition in small hit RUSH mode)
Next, an example of the screen transition in the small hit RUSH mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-7 and 13-8. 13-7 and 13-8 are explanatory views showing an example of subsequent screen transitions after being controlled to the 10R probability variation jackpot gaming state. It should be noted that FIGS. 13-7 and 13
In -8, the display result indicating the 10R probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed in the variable display in the high probability / first KT state (probability variation mode), and the screen transition during the jackpot game of the jackpot (so-called consecutive villa) and after the jackpot game is performed. explain.

FIG. 13-7 (A) shows an effect screen in a round game in a 10R probability variation jackpot game state. As shown in FIG. 13-7 (A), the image display device 5 has a jackpot type suggestion symbol 007S.
H200 (and small symbol 007SH101) is displayed with the symbol "7", and 10R
It suggests that he won the probabilistic jackpot. For example, when the 10R probability variation jackpot is won, the display result of the variable display is a jackpot other than the 10R probability variation jackpot (for example, 6R).
A decorative pattern indicating the probability variation jackpot) may be displayed, and a promotion effect of promoting to the 10R probability variation jackpot (an effect of notifying that the jackpot is a 10R probability variation jackpot) may be performed by the end of the jackpot game.

Further, in FIG. 13-7 (A), a background image at night and character B are displayed. Character B is a character different from character A in the 6R probability variation jackpot. Also,
In FIG. 13-7 (A), the total number of prize balls is displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5 007SH120.
Is displayed. The total prize ball number display 007SH120 is the first hit (previous 6R probability change big hit)
And the total number of prize balls paid out up to the present (10 rounds in the figure). Further, in the upper right of the image display device 5, a right-handed hit notification 007SH105 is displayed, which prompts the player to launch the game ball toward the right-handed game area. In the 10R probability variation jackpot, when the final round is completed, the screen transitions to the screen shown in FIG. 13-7 (B).

FIG. 13-7 (B) shows an effect screen of the ending effect in the 10R probability variation jackpot ending period. As shown in FIG. 13-7 (B), the ending effect indicates, for example, that the control of the high probability / second KT state is started, that is, the small hit RUSH mode is started. Further, also in FIG. 13-7 (B), the total prize ball number display 007SH120 and the jackpot type suggestion symbol 007SH200 are continuously displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5. Further, the background image shows a background image of "night" similar to the background image in the round effect. When the ending effect is finished (when the period controlled to the jackpot game state is finished), the screen transitions to the screen shown in FIG. 13-7 (C).

FIG. 13-7 (C) shows the first variable display controlled to the high probability / second KT state. In the high probability / second KT state, the small hit RUSH mode is controlled as the effect mode. The background image in the small hit RUSH mode is the same background image (night background image) as the background image during the big hit game. In addition, the same character B as during the jackpot game is displayed. In addition, it should be noted
Assuming that a moving image showing a 10R probability variation big hit is displayed during the big hit game, the moving image may be continuously displayed even during the small hit RUSH mode.

Also, in the small hit RUSH mode, the total prize ball number display 007SH120 is also 1.
It is displayed continuously from the big hit game of 0R probability change big hit. The total prize ball number display 007SH120 is, for example, a display mode similar to the display mode displayed in the jackpot game of the 10R probability variation jackpot.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-7 (C), the image display device 5 has a decorative pattern 007SH10.
0 is not displayed, and the decorative pattern 007SH100 is not variablely displayed (scrolled). On the other hand, a small symbol 007SH101 is variably displayed (scrolled) at the lower left of the image display device 5. In the feature unit 007SH, the fluctuation time of the variable display in the small hit RUSH state is 5 seconds in both the case of winning the small hit and the case of non-reach loss.

Further, the image display device 5 includes an active display 007SH110 corresponding to variable display, and an image display device 5.
The hold display 007SH111 is also not displayed. Further, in the upper right corner of the image display device 5, a right-handed hit notification 007SH105 is displayed, which urges the game ball to be launched toward the right game area. As a result, in the high probability / second KT state, the player is urged to hit right, and the game ball is won in the second start winning opening in the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 17. Can be made to.

Further, in FIG. 13-7 (C), on the right side of the image display device 5, the first reserved number display 007SH131 indicating the first reserved storage number and the second reserved number indicating the second reserved storage number are displayed. Display 007SH132 is displayed. Further, the image display device 5 does not display the variable display number display 007SH140. In FIG. 13-7 (C), for example, when a display result indicating a small hit is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, the screen transitions to the screen shown in FIG. 13-7 (D).

FIG. 13-7 (D) shows a small hit notification effect when a display result indicating a small hit is derived and displayed. In FIG. 13-7 (D), the three symbols constituting the small symbol 007SH101 are "1.
The display result of the small hit of "3, 5" is shown. In FIG. 13-7 (D), when the symbol confirmation time elapses, the screen transitions to the screen shown in FIG. 13-8 (E).

FIG. 13-8 (E) shows a small hit opening effect indicating that the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened. Specifically, the effect image 007SH300 is displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5, emphasizing that the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened. In addition, the speaker 8
It is emphasized that the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened by outputting a sound effect indicating the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17 from L and 8R. Then, when the game ball wins the special variable winning opening, the screen transitions to the screen shown in FIG. 13-8 (F).

FIG. 13-8 (F) shows a screen when a game ball wins a special variable winning opening. Specifically, the winning effect image 007SH121 is displayed on the image display device 5. The winning effect image 007SH121 shows that there were 10 winning balls due to the winning of the game ball in the special winning opening.

Further, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound effect indicating that the game ball has won the special variable winning opening, thereby emphasizing that the game ball has won the special variable winning opening. If there are multiple prizes in the special prize opening, the prize effect image 007SH121 will be displayed.
The number of times is displayed according to the number of winnings. Specifically, when three balls are won in the special winning opening, the winning effect image 007SH121 may be displayed three times.

Here, in the high probability / first KT state (probability variation mode), even if a small hit is won, the effect of notifying that it is a small hit is not performed. This is because, in the small hit game state based on the variable display of the second special symbol in the first KT state, it is almost impossible to expect a prize in the special variable winning opening. It should be noted that, in the high probability / first KT state, the fact that the effect of notifying the small hit is not performed is specifically supplemented. For example, even if the display result indicating the small hit is derived and displayed, in the small hit game state, the effect corresponding to the small hit game state (effect image 007SH300 in FIG. 13-8 (E) and FIG. 13-8 (F).
) Winning effect image 007SH121, etc.) is not performed. In addition, when the display result indicating a small hit is derived and displayed in the variable display, the variable display of the decorative symbol and the small symbol is set to the same variable display as in the case of loss, and the display result of the decorative symbol and the small symbol is Is also trying to derive and display the display result indicating the loss. Low probability / 1st K
As for the T state (time saving mode), as in the high probability / first KT state (probability variation mode), even if a small hit is won, the effect of notifying that it is a small hit is not performed.

FIG. 13-8 (G) shows a variable display at the start of the second variation after being controlled to the high probability / second KT state. As shown in FIG. 13-8 (G), the small symbol 007SH101 starts the variable display, and the second reserved number display 007SH132 is "2", which is a value subtracted by "1" as compared with FIG. 13-8 (E). Is shown. Further, the total prize ball number display 007SH120 shows that the number of game balls increased by 10 due to the winning of the game ball in the special winning opening in FIG. 13-8 (F). The addition to the total prize ball number display 007SH120 may be added after the winning effect image 007SH121 is displayed. In FIG. 13-8 (G), when the symbol stop timing is reached (
After 5 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation), the screen transitions to the screen shown in FIG. 13-8 (H).

In FIG. 13-8 (H), the small symbol 007SH101 is derived and displayed as the display result of the non-reach loss. In FIG. 13-8 (H), since the decorative symbol 007SH100 is not displayed, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the loss display result is derived and displayed. Figure 13-8
In (H), when the symbol confirmation time elapses, the second reserved number display 007SH132 becomes "2".
, That is, since the second reserved storage number is “2”, the next variable display is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 13-7 and 13-8, in the feature section 007SH, the small hit RUSH
In the mode, the active display 007SH110 is not displayed. Therefore, the presence or absence of the advance notice effect for changing the display mode of the active display 007SH110 according to the expectation of the big hit differs between the probability variation mode and the small hit RUSH mode. As a result, the small hit R
In the USH mode, since the active display 007SH110 can be prevented from paying attention, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the division of the variable display (loss of the variable display). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to count the number of losses, and it is possible to make it difficult to guess the set value.

As shown in FIGS. 13-7 and 13-8, in the feature section 007SH, the small hit RUSH
In the mode, the hold display 007SH111 is not displayed, and the hold shift display is not displayed either. Therefore, the presence or absence of the hold look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the hold display 007SH111 according to the expectation of the big hit differs between the probability variation mode and the small hit RUSH mode. As a result, in the small hit RUSH mode, it is possible to prevent the player from paying attention to the hold display 007SH111 and the hold shift display, so that it is difficult for the player to recognize the variable display delimiter (variable display loss). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to count the number of losses, and it is possible to make it difficult to guess the set value.

Further, in the feature unit 007SH, the effect corresponding to the small hit game state (effect image 00).
7SH300, winning effect image 007SH121, etc.) are performed. As a result, in the small hit RUSH mode, the player's consciousness can be focused on the small hit game. Therefore, it is possible for the player to make it difficult to count the number of losses, and it is possible to make it difficult to guess the set value.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-7 and 13-8, in the feature unit 007SH, the jackpot game state in the 10R probability variation jackpot and the high probability / second K after the jackpot game in the 10R probability variation jackpot.
A common effect (background image, character B, total prize ball number display 007SH120, etc.) is performed in the T state. As a result, it is possible to appeal that the state in which the winning balls can be expected continues after the big hit game, and it is possible to further raise the player in the high probability / second KT state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-7 and 13-8, in the feature unit 007SH, the small hit R
In the USH mode, the variable display count display 007SH140 is not displayed. As a result, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to recognize the division of the variable display (loss of the variable display). Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to count the number of losses, and it is possible to make it more difficult to guess the set value.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-7 and 13-8, in the feature unit 007SH, the small hit R
In the USH mode, the decorative pattern 007SH100 is not displayed. As a result, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to recognize the division of the variable display (loss of the variable display). Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to count the number of losses, and it is possible to make it more difficult to guess the set value.

(Modification example 1 of feature unit 007SH)
Next, a modification 1 of the feature unit 007SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 007SH, a configuration for displaying the variable display number display 007SH140 (see FIG. 13-5 (C)) in one display mode has been described. In place of or in addition to such a configuration, in the modification 1 of the feature unit 007SH, the variable display count display 007SH14
A configuration will be described in which 0 can be displayed in a plurality of display modes suggesting a set value. That is, in the first modification of the feature unit 007SH, a configuration that can be displayed in a plurality of display modes suggesting set values in the first specific state (high probability / gaming state excluding the second KT state) will be described.

In the first modification of the feature unit 007SH, the variable display number display 007SH 140 suggests a set value according to the display mode. For example, the variable display count display 007SH140 suggests a display mode (white display mode) that denies the set values "1" and "2", a display mode that suggests an odd number setting (blue display mode), and an even number setting. It is sufficient to make it possible to take a display mode (yellow display mode), a display mode suggesting a high setting (red display mode), and the like.

The suggestion of the set value by the variable display number display 007SH140 may be continuously displayed until the next big hit game is executed, or may be performed at a specific timing. The specific timing may be a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of the first variation, at the start of the 20th variation, etc.), or may be a random timing. The random timing may be, for example, a predetermined timing in the variable display according to the determination result by determining whether or not to suggest the set value at the start of the variable display.

In this way, by making the variable display number display 007SH140 displayable in a plurality of display modes suggesting set values, the variable display number display 007SH140 can be noticed. Further, in the feature unit 007SH, in the high probability / second KT state, it is difficult for the player to count the number of losses and to guess the set value. Therefore, attention can be paid to the suggestion of the set value by the variable display number display 007SH140, and the set value can be effectively suggested.

(Modification example 2 of feature unit 007SH)
Next, a modification 2 of the feature portion 007SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 007SH, the second reserved number display 007SH132 in the small hit RUSH mode.
The configuration for displaying (see FIG. 13-7 (C)) has been described. Instead of such a configuration
Alternatively, in addition to such a configuration, in the modification 2 of the feature unit 007SH, a configuration in which the second reserved number display 007SH 132 is not displayed in the small hit RUSH mode will be described. That is, in the second modification of the feature unit 007SH, a configuration will be described in which the hold number display indicating the hold storage number is hidden in the second specific state.

In the second modification of the feature unit 007SH, the effect control CPU 120 erases the second reserved number display 007SH 132 when the small hit RUSH mode is started. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 starts the small hit RUSH mode and displays the first reserved number 007SH1.
31 may also be erased. Further, the effect control CPU 120 starts the small hit RUSH mode and displays the first reserved number display 007SH131 and the second reserved number display 007S.
Both of H132 may be erased, or one of them may be erased.

According to the second modification of the feature unit 007SH, in the small hit RUSH mode, it is possible to make it more difficult to recognize the delimiter of the variable display of the second special symbol (the loss of the variable display). Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to count the number of losses, and it is possible to make it more difficult to guess the set value.

(Modification example 3 of feature unit 007SH)
Next, a modification 3 of the feature portion 007SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 007SH, the winning effect image 007 is controlled to the small hit game state.
The configuration for displaying SH121 has been described. That is, in the embodiment related to the feature unit 007SH described above, the configuration for displaying the special effect corresponding to the control of the special state (high probability / second KT state) in the special state has been described.

In place of or in addition to such a configuration, in the modified example 3 of the feature unit 007SH, the winning effect image 0 covers the variable display after being controlled to the small hit game state.
A configuration that enables the display of 07SH121 will be described. That is, the feature unit 007S
In the first modification of H, a configuration will be described in which a special effect corresponding to the control of the special state (high probability / second KT state) can be displayed even after the control of the special state is completed.

In the third modification of the feature unit 007SH, the winning effect image 007SH 121 may be continuously displayed in the next variable display after being displayed in the high probability / second KT state. By lengthening the display time of the winning effect image 007SH121, it is possible to enhance the satisfaction of the player by winning a prize in the special variable winning opening.

Further, the prize effect image 007SH121 may be divided into a plurality of times and displayed if there are 10 prize balls due to the game ball winning a prize in the special prize opening. For example, "+3
, "+2", "+5", etc., may be divided into three times and displayed in sequence. This will
It is possible to increase the variation of the display mode of the winning effect image 007SH121, and to liven up the production of the winning effect image 007SH121 to liven up the game.

According to the third modification of the feature unit 007SH, in the small hit RUSH mode, the player's consciousness can be focused on the small hit game. Therefore, it is possible for the player to make it more difficult to count the number of losses, and it is possible to make it more difficult to guess the set value.

(Modification example 4 of feature unit 007SH)
Next, a modification 4 of the feature unit 007SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 007SH, a configuration in which the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the small symbol 007SH 101 has been described as a small hit notification effect when the display result indicating the small hit is derived and displayed. That is, in the embodiment related to the feature unit 007SH described above, a special state (high probability / second KT).
The configuration in which the special effect corresponding to the control of the state) is performed using the identification information has been described.

In place of or in addition to such a configuration, in the modification 4 of the feature unit 007SH, a small hit is displayed as a small hit notification effect when a display result indicating a small hit is derived and displayed. A configuration for positively notifying that the result has been derived and displayed will be described. That is, in the modified example 4 of the feature unit 007SH, a configuration will be described in which the special effect corresponding to the control of the special state (high probability / second KT state) is an effect for notifying that the special state is controlled.

In the modification 4 of the feature unit 007SH, for example, in the small hit notification effect, a specific character or a specific character image (“small hit winning!”) Indicates that the display result of the small hit has been derived and displayed.
Etc. may be displayed to positively notify the winning of the small hit.

According to the third modification of the feature unit 007SH, the player's consciousness can be focused on the small hit game by the small hit notification effect. Therefore, it is possible for the player to make it more difficult to count the number of losses, and it is possible to make it more difficult to guess the set value.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 007SH)
In relation to the above-mentioned feature unit 007SH, for example, the small hit probability is set to the same probability in the low probability state and the high probability state, and the small hit is frequently performed in the high probability state and the gaming state without the normal electric support. There is known a game machine that increases the number of balls to be ejected by generating it (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148127).

Further, for example, in a pachinko gaming machine whose settings can be changed, when the fluctuation of the identification information is stopped,
A gaming machine that suggests a set value by displaying a character image selected with a selection rate according to the set value is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902).

However, in order to suppress gambling, when the small hit probability is common regardless of the set value, if the big hit probability is changed according to the set value, the loss probability also changes accordingly. For this reason, there is a problem that the set value can be estimated by the player counting the number of appearances of the loss.

Therefore, the gaming machine of the means related to the feature unit 007SH (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game) is
Variable display execution means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 or a production control CP) that variably displays identification information (for example, a special symbol or a decorative symbol) and derives and displays a variable display result.
U120) and
Based on the fact that the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the variable display result, the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) is controlled, and the variable display result is a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, the jackpot game state). For example, a state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that controls a special state (for example, a small hit game state) based on the derived display of the small hit symbol).
It can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values including a first setting value (for example, setting value "1") and a second setting value (for example, setting value "6") having different advantages for the player. Setting means (for example, game control microcomputer 100) and
An effect execution means for executing an effect (for example, an effect control CPU 120) and
It is a game machine equipped with
The variable display executing means can derive and display the specific display result and a predetermined display result (for example, loss) different from the special display result as the variable display result.
A special determination value for determining the variable display result as the special display result (for example, FIG. 13-2 (for example, FIG. 13-2).
The number of small hit judgment values) in B) is the same regardless of the set value.
A predetermined determination value for determining the variable display result as the predetermined display result (for example, FIG. 13-2 (for example, FIG. 13-2).
The number of the loss determination values shown in B) is larger in the first set value than in the second set value (for example, in the set value 1, the loss probability is "1/60", and in the set value 6, the loss probability is "1/60". Loss probability is "1 /
It is "100". ),
The state control means can execute variable display in a first specific state (for example, a non-small hit RUSH state such as a high probability / first KT state or a low probability / first KT state) in which variable display can be executed. It is possible to control to a second specific state (for example, high probability / second KT state: small hit RUSH state) in which the game value is more likely to be given by the special state than the first specific state.
The effect executing means is
In the first specific state, the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information (for example, the active display 007SH110 in FIG. 13-5 (C)) is displayed during the variable display, and the corresponding display is displayed before the end of the variable display. Erase and
In the second specific state, the corresponding display is hidden, and a special effect corresponding to the control of the special state (for example, the effect image 007SH300 in FIG. 13-8 (E) and FIG. 13-8 (F)). The winning effect image 007SH121, etc.) can be executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to estimate the set value.

Further, as the game machine of the means 2 according to the feature unit 007SH, in the game machine described in the means 1.
The effect executing means can execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value set in the setting means (for example, an effect that denies the set values "1" and "2", an effect that suggests an even number setting, and the like). Is.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to effectively suggest the set value while making it difficult for the player to estimate the set value.

Further, as the game machine of the means 3 according to the feature unit 007SH, in the game machine according to the means 1 or 2.
The effect mode in the advantageous state (for example, the effect screen of FIG. 13-7 (A)) and the second
At least a part is common (for example, the background image of "night" and the character are common) with the effect mode in the specific state (for example, the effect screen of FIG. 13-7 (C)).
When the effect executing means is controlled to the advantageous state, the special display corresponding to the advantageous state (for example, the display of the character A of the 6R probability variation jackpot shown in FIG. 13-5 (A) and FIG. 1
(Display of character B of 10R probability variation jackpot shown in 3-7 (A)) can be executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest while making it difficult for the player to guess the set value.

Further, as the game machine of the means 4 according to the feature unit 007SH, in the game machine according to any one of the means 1 to 3.
The effect executing means is
In the first specific state, the variable display number display (for example, the variable display number display 007SH140 in FIG. 13-5 (C)) can be displayed, while it can be displayed.
In the second specific state, the variable display number display is hidden (for example, the variable display number display is hidden as shown in FIG. 13-7 (D)).

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to estimate the set value.

Further, as the game machine of the means 5 according to the feature unit 007SH, in the game machine according to any one of the means 1 to 4.
The effect executing means is
In the first specific state, the decorative identification information (for example, the decorative symbol 007SH100 of FIG. 13-5 (C)) is variably displayed corresponding to the variable display of the identification information, and at least the specific display result is derived (for example, the specific display result). Whether or not the combination of doublets) is notified by deriving and displaying the variable display result of the decoration identification information.
In the second specific state, the decorative identification information is hidden (for example, the decorative pattern is hidden as shown in FIG. 13-7 (D)), and the special effect (for example, FIG. 13-8 (F)) is shown. The winning effect image 007SH121, etc.) can be executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to estimate the set value.

Further, as the game machine of the means 6 according to the feature unit 007SH, in the game machine according to any one of the means 1 to 5.
The effect executing means is
In the first specific state, the hold display (for example, the hold display 007S in FIG. 13-5 (C))
H111) is displayed, and the movement display of the hold display (for example, the hold shift display of FIG. 13-6 (F)) is executed in response to the start of the identification information.
In the second specific state, the hold display can be hidden and the special effect (for example, the winning effect image 007SH121 of FIG. 13-8 (F)) can be executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to estimate the set value.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Frame LED
10… General winning opening 11… Main board 12… Production control board 13… Voice control board 14… LED control board 15… Relay board 17… Special variable winning ball device 20… Ordinary symbol display 21… Gate switch 22A, 22B… Start Mouth switch 23 ... 1st count switch 24 ... 2nd count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 41 ... Passing gate 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit

Claims (1)

A variable display execution means that displays the identification information in a variable manner and derives and displays the variable display result,
Control to an advantageous state based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result,
A state control means that controls a special state based on the fact that a special display result different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result, and
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values including a first setting value and a second setting value having different advantages for the player.
The production execution means to execute the production and
It is a game machine equipped with
The variable display executing means can derive and display the specific display result and a predetermined display result different from the special display result as the variable display result.
The number of special determination values for determining the variable display result as the special display result is the same regardless of the set value.
The number of predetermined determination values for determining the variable display result as the predetermined display result is larger in the first set value than in the second set value.
The state control means has a first specific state in which the variable display can be executed, and a second state in which the variable display can be executed and the game value is more likely to be given by the special state than in the first specific state. It is controllable to a specific state and
The effect executing means is
In the first specific state, the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information is displayed during the variable display, and the corresponding display is deleted before the end of the variable display.
In the second specific state, it is possible to hide the corresponding display and execute a special effect corresponding to the control of the special state.
A game machine characterized by that.

Images